Grammar in Context, book 1: high beginning. Third Edition

:.,ir.ar:i .
-n t,l:: --. ,
I:,. .,.:- ' i; *tt': ..: t",...
t
li. {u.-i i!, It
ru f,*md*K*ffii-{,"i
' i,,
''' l',. -
ff: ''i"'lo'
G RAMMAR
The Present Tense of Be
CONTEXT
The United States
Postcard from New York City
Conversation about Life in the U.S.
LESSON FOCUS
Be }:ras three forms in the piesent: am, is, e,re.
Canada is north of the United States.
The U.S. and Canada a?'e big countries.
New York City

Before You Read 1. Look at the map of North America. Find Alaska, Hawaii, and Puerto
Rico.
2. Look at the map-of the United States. Find the s'uate vrher=e you live.
Read the following article. Pay special attention to the forms of the verb
be.
The United States

The United States is a big country. There are 50 states in the U.S. ForW-
eight states are on the mainland. Two states are far from the mainland:
Alaska and Hawaii. Alaska is the largest, state. It is northwest of Canada.
Hawaii is in the Pacific Ocean. This state is a group of small islands.
Lesson One
\\ashington is a state. It is in the northwest. washington, D.c., is not a
state. It is a special government district. It is on the east coast. It is the
capital of the u.S. The white House is in washington, D.C. The white House
is the home of the President.
N{ost states in the eastern part of the U.S. are small. Most states in the
\l'est and southwest are large. The biggest city in the u.s. is New york.
0ther big cities are Los Angeles, chicago, philadelphia, and Boston.
Puerto Rico is not a state. It is a territory of the U.s. It is an island in
the Caribbean Sea. Puerto Ricans are citizens of the U.S. The languages of
Puerto Rico are Spanish and English.
The United States of America
Cincinnati
Cl.Y6lsnd
DE
MD
Washington,
D.C.
O.llls.
TX
tQ
Houston
HonolulF ?5 New Orleens
HI
D
AL Alabama IN lndiana NE Nebraska SC South Carolina
AK Alaska IA lowa NV Nevada SD South Dakota
M Arizona KS Kansas NH New Hampshire TN Tennessee
AR Arkansas KY Kentucky NJ New Jersey TX Texas
CA California LA Louisiana NM New Mexico UT Utah
co Colorado ME Maine NY New York VT Vermonl
CT Connecticut MD Maryland NC North Carolina VA Virginia
DE Delaware MA Massachusetts ND North Dakota WA Washington
FL Florida MI Michigan OH Ohio WV West Virginia
GA Georgia MN Minnesota OK Oklahoma WI Wisconsin
HI Hawaii MS Mississippi OR Oregon WY Wyoming
ID ldaho MO Missouri Pennsylvania
PA DC' District of
IL lllinois MT Montana RI Rhode lsland Columbia
'The District ol Columbia is not a state. Washington D.C. is the capital of the United States.
Note: Washinglon D.C. and Washigton stale are not lhe same.
.l The Present Tcnse of rBc
'
-=€
=ts
F+-E Forms of. Be
I am in New York now.

-l-
My father in Boston.
He a mechanic.
My sister ls in Puerto Rico.
Boston a city.
It beautiful.
We students.
You a teacher.
Puerto Bicans citizens of the U.S.
Chicago and Boston cities.
They big.
Exsncrss I Fill in the blanks with 'is, a,re, or arn.
ExRvptrt The U.S. rc a big country.
1. Alaska the largest state in the U.S.

2. Alaska and Hawaii far from the mainland.
3. The states in the East small.
4. Puerto Rico an island.
5. Puerto Ricans citizens of the U.S.
6. English the main language of the U.S.
7. We in the U.S.
8. I a student in the U.S.
Washington, D.C., is beautiful.
Washington, D.C.,is the capital of

the U.S.
Washington, D.C., is in the East.
Lesson One
We are from Mexico. Place of origin
I am 25 years old.
It is hot in Puerto Rico.
It is 6 o'clock.
Exrncrss 2 Fill in the blanks to make true statements.

Exnuptr' California is on the wegt coast.
(location)
1. Washington, D.C., is on the coast.

(locati,on)
2. Chicago is a Illinois is a state.

(c\assi,Jicati,on)
o
o. Puerto Rico is an with water all around.
(cl.assi,Jication)
4. It is -. now.
(tirne)
5. It is today.
(weath,er)
6. The American president is about

(ase)
t. The teacher is from

@rrr" ,risiD
"f
$.m Word Order with Be
am from Los Angeles.t . The subject is first. The subject

tells who or what we are
Los Angeles is a ciW. tafking about.
. The verb (am, i,s, are) is
It is very big. second.
. The complement is third. The
Spanish is my native language. complement finishes, or
completes, the sentence with a
You location, classification,
description, etc.
It is hot in Cuba.
-----l
rAnrericans often say L.A. for Los Angeles.
The Present Tense of .Be

Exrnclss 3 Put the words in the correct order to make a statement. Use a
capital letter at the beginning and a period at the end.
ExRt,tplr' big / the u.S. / is The U.9. ie biq.
is / beautiful / San FYancisco
is / Texas / abig state I-'

hot today / it / is I
the teacher / from / is / New York

yea.rs / my brother
a big country / Canada / is
in the classroom / are / the students
the map / on page 3 / is
my parents / in Germany /axe- '
am/I/astudent
,d c€
&
tc 6{6"
& The Subject
Chicago is very big. My friend and I are in California.

JJ
Itis in Illinois. We are in Los Angeles.
My sister is married. My cousins are in Mexico.
JJ
She is very happy. They are in Mexico City.
M.y father is at work. China and Korea are countries.
,,,
He is busy. They are in Asia.
Lnxcuncs Norrs
1. The subject can be a pronoun: I Aou, u)e, they, he, she, it.
2. Singular means one. Plural means more than one. A plural noun
usually ends in -s.
SrNcur.en, Ttre lnnguage of the U.S. is English.
Prunat, Ttre Languages of Puerto Rico are Spanish and English.
Lesson One
3. is a singular noun.
Th.e Uni"ted States (th,e U.S.)
The U.S. is a big country. It is in North America.
Notn: Always use the before United States or U.S.
You can be a singular or plural subject. It uses the verb arz.
You are a student.
.Ypu are students.
When the subject is "another person and I," use the plural verb are.
Put the other person before "I."
John and I are good friends. (Nor, I and John . . .)
We use the subject pronoun if to talk about time and weather.
,It is hot in Hawaii.
It is 6 o'clock now.
We use th,ey for plural people and things.
7.
My
n
friends axe here. Th,ey are good to me.
r-__-_--}
My books are here. They are on the floor.
Exsncrsr 4 Fi[ in the blanks with the correct pronoun.

They
ExRt-rpr.r: Canada and Mexico are countries. are in North America.
l. Florida is a state. is in the Southeast.
2. is warm in Florida.
3. New York and Boston are big cities. are in the East.
4. arn a student.
5. The United States is a big country. is between Canada

and Mexico.
6. is 4:30 p.ru.
7. My parents are in California.

are in L.A.
8. You and I are students.

are in the classroom now.
9. is cloudy today.
10. Fuerto Rico and Cuba are islands.

are in the Caribbean Sea.
The Present Tense ofBe v

Exrncrss 5 Fill in the blanks with a subject.
Exlprplr,' Loa Anqelea is a big city.
1. is a city in the East.

2. are states in the East.
3. are citizens of the U.S.
4. is the home of the President.
5. is the language of Mexico.
tl. is the main language of the U.S.
7. are big countries.
8. are in the U.S. now.
9. is u'arm in July.
10. are ESL students.
Before You Read 1. Name a place in the U.S. that you want to visit.
2. What is your favorite city? \Yhy?
Read the following postcard. Pay special attention to the contractions.
t:.,.it:l:::l;' ;1:
Postcard from New York City
Dear bu,rint,
tl* otr, uautiou,. Ilot, in Nur York city xaur. I* t*o bigSut
ary ia,&* u.s. uy daryha* oitL,ra. slos uzry fuqpy h*o.
z*.osutlclr nko&i't t4r?tk' t{s raatV otrl'
Did you know...? ff:"**
NwYorb! * u*y int re#iti, ctfy, bat ll2l o f* k*e,.
The Statue of eup lz aru bu;y. ziuyto a/nay r i* a, fuur7. Anl, tuafiio" brr hb,.
Liberry was a gift low,poaplosaTNettYorkstatwtutty/riudl7,b*Neu
from France in Yor*trs atokin"/,b Hit. Whu,Ittt hrt, r*aagur arukrltfl!,.
1876 to honor wo?oatt*aftaatoof tibery x.out Wr obeau;tifiL

Hnftauarlt,
one hundred
tiEt' tited, uô ur. M o ro ta.Ar.
years of indepen-
dence for the
u.s.
I Lesson One
Contractions with.Be
I am I'm in New York City. We can make a contraction

You are You're at home. with a subject pronoun and ann,
is, and are. Wetake out the first
It is lt's hot today. letter of anl, is, are and put an
She is She's happy. apostrophe (') in its place. We
He is He's busy. usually use a contraction when
we speak. We sometimes write
We are We're tired. a contraction in informal
They are They're on vacation. writing.
My daughter is My daughter's with me. S'e can make a contraction.

New York is New York's big. with most nouns and is.
Ttaffic is Tbaffic's terrible.
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. We don't make a contraction with is if the noun ends in these sounds:
s, z, sh, or ch.
The United States is a big country.
The White House is in Washington, D.C.
France rs in Europe.
New Orleans is a beautiful city.
English is the language of the U.S.
Long Beach is in California.
2. We don't make a contraction with a plural noun arrd are.
Strangers ore helpful.
Exrncrsr 6 Fill in the blanks with the correct form of be. Make a
contraction whenever possible. Not every sentence.can have a
contraction.
to
ExRtqptr, The United States abig country.ho between Canada
and Mexico.
1. Canada and Mexico countries. They in North

America.
2. Texas a big state in the U.S. It in the South.
3. The \4rhite House in Washington. D.C. It the
home of the President. He busy now.
The Present Tense of ,Be

4. Texas and Alaska the biggest states in the U.S.
5. Los Angeles a big city. It \ in California.
e.. Rierto Rico ' .- an island. Puerto Ricans Ameri-
can citizens. - '
7. English the main language of the U.S. Spanish and En-

glish the languages of Puerto Rico. German
the language of Germany. French the language of France.
My daughter and I in New York City now. We
happy here.
9. Life fast in New York City.
10. People busy. They in a hurry.
Exrnclss 7 Fil in the blanks. Make a contraction whenever possible. Not

every sentence can have a contraction.
T,M a student of English at City College. 'm happy
(etample) (1)
in the U.S. My teacher American. His name
(2) (s)
Charles Madison. Charles an experienced teacher.
(4) (5)
patient with foreign students.
I\{y class big. interestirig. All the students

(6) (7)
immigrants,'but we from many different countries.
(8) (e)
Five students from Asia. One woman from
(10) (11)
Poland. from Warsaw, the capital of Poland. Many students
(12)
from Mexico.
(13) -
\VC ready to learn English, but English
(14) (15)
difficult language. I sometimes tell Charles, "You a very kind
(16)
teacher.? Charles says, " all good students, and I
(17) (18)
happy to teach you English."
1.6 Be wtth Descriptions
New York City ls big.

People &re helpful
The weather is nice.
I am tired.
10 Lesson One
LaNcuncr Norrs
I
t. \1'e use a form of be with words that describe the subject. \\re use
adjectives to describe. Descriptive a{ectives harre no plural fornr.
New York is big.
New York and Chicago are big.
Some words that end with -ed or -ing are a{ectives: nzantied; tired;
interesting; boring.
I'm utortied about you.
We're ti,red.
New York City is interesting.
3. We use a form of be with a physical or mental condition.
He's hungry. We're afi'aid.
I'm th,i,r"sty. They're angry.
Exrncrss 8 Complete each statement with a subject and the correct form of
De. Write a contraction wherever possible. Make a true
statement. Use both singular and plural subjects.
ExlNptgs' MY Parente are inteiligent.
pail::
1. red. 7. big.
2. expensive. 8. rvonderful.
3. cheap. 9. difficult.
4. new. 10. beautiful.
5. rich. 11. famous.
6. luy. t2. yourlg.
Exrncrsr 9 Write a form of be and an adjective to describe each of the

following nouns. You may work with a partner.
ExRttpt tst
ia clean.
This classroom
ie intereetinq,
Neu, York City
1. The teacher
2. This city
J. This college
4. Today's r.l'cather
Americans
6. American food
The Prcstrnt 'l't't.lst' ol'8,

.d:
E
"f Be vnth Definitions
I arn a student.
You are a teacher.
New York is an city.
New York and L.A. are big cities.

We are foreign students.
Lnrucuncr Norrs
1. A noun is a person, place or thing. We use a noun after be to classiSr
or define the subject.
2. We use the article a or an before a singular noun. We use anbefore
a vowel sound. The vowels are a, e, i, o, ,tt.
3. We don't use the article a or an before a plural noun.
4. We can put an a(iective before the noun.
€m{4'igxii}3;;!il!ii ::: iri :
Exsnclss l0 f iU in the blanks with a form of be and a definition of the

subject. You may add an a(iective. Be careful to add a or an for
singular nouns.
Exluplr,s' uallorma _
taa
-lJa etate.
t9 an American territory,
Puerto Rico
1. Canada
2. AIaska
3. Blue
4. Wednesday
5. Christmas
6. Saturday and Sunday
7. The Pacific and the Atlantic
8. White and green
9. January and February
10. California and Illinois
12" Lesson One

Exrncrss 1 1 Add an a{ective to each statement. Be careful to use o before
a consonant and an before a vowel sound.
Exlmptrs' July4isaholiday.
July 4 is an important holiday.
1. August is a month.
2. Puerto Rico is an island.
3. Toyota is a company.
4. I'm a student.
5. Los Angeles and Chicago are cities.
6. John is a name.
Exsncrsr 12 fiU in the blanks with the correct form of be. Add a or an for
singular nouns only. Don't use an article with plural nouns.
- Exeuplrs: tJ
ta4 u
The II.S. big country.
are
The U.S. and Canada big countries.
California
San Francisco and Los Angeles cities in California.
Chicago, Los Angeles, and New York big cities.
Puerto Rico island.
Puerto Rico and Cuba islands.
Thanksgiving American holiday.

FYench and Spanish languages.
France and Spain countries.
Exrnctsr l3 Complete each statement. Give a subject and the correct form
ofbe. Add a or an for singular nouns only. Don't use an articld
with plurai nouns. You may work with a partner.
Exnuptrs' Kueeia is a
big country.
Canada and Drazrl are
big countries.
I. nice person.l
, good student.
The present Tense r_rf Be 13

big company.
expensive item.
nice season.
American holiday.
warrn months.
small countries.
South American countries.
big cities.
famous people. (Noro' people is plural)
American cars.
Exrncrsr 14 Fill in the blanks to talk about this city. Make true statements.
Remember to add o ot an for a singular noun. You may work
with a partner.
Chez Taul ia an
Exluprrs, expensive restaurant in this city.
January and February are cold rnonths in this city.
interesting place.
popular tourist attraction.
big stores.
beautiful months.
beautiful park.
inexpensive restaurant.
busy streets.
good college.
dangerous area.
tall buildings.
ExEncrsr l5 Fill in the blanks to make true statements. Put in a subject and
a form of be. Read your answers to the class.
ExRuplrs: Rock muarc ie popular in my country.
ToliLiciane are
rich in my country.
1l$ Lesson One

1. the biggest cW in my country.
2. rich.
tl. expenslve.
4. the language(s) of my country.
5. necessary for a good life.
6. a popular sport.
7. hard to find.
8. a common last name.
9. a beautiful place.
**
E ,H.
L *E**
^Be with Location and Origin
On The book is on the table.

The cafeteria is on the first floor.
i et ta general area) I am at school.

My brother is at home.
They are at work.
In (a complete or The students are in the classroom.

partial enclosure) The wastebasket is in the corner.
#ffi ^k-
The blackboard is in front of the students.
Hffi@
ln back o?Behind The teacher is in back of the desk.
The blackboard is behind the teacher.
The empty desk is between the two students.

ffinH
Abovc/Over The exit sign is over the door.
The clock is above the exit sign.
(contimi.ed)
The Present Tense of Be r5

Under/BeIow The textbook is below the desk.
The dictionary is under the textbook.
Near/By/Close to The sharpener is by the window.

I
t>,)-,4-!,_J. ^ -, The sharpener is near the window.
The sharpener is close to the window.
The light switch is next to the door.
Far from Los Angeles is far from New York.

+ 2r i{'3s
Across from Room 202 is a,cross from Room 203.

o?cras. ::/ oJra 'cf,alo
a /ra r,ds &.&
In (a city) 'Ihe White House is in Washington, D.C.
The White House is on Penrsylvania Avenue.
At (an address) The White House is at 1600 Perunsylvania Avenue.
Mario is from Brazil. He is from Sao Paolo.
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. We use prepositions to show location and origin.
2. Word Order : Subject * Be * Preposition * Place
ExrRclsr 1 6 Use a form of be and a preposition to tell the location of these

things or people in your classroom or school.
ExRuprss: My dictionary
ie in my ba4,
The students
are in front of the teacher.-
1. This classroom
2. The clock
3. The teacher
4. The wastebasket
5. The light switch
t6 Lesson One
6. The chalkboard
7. I
F My books
9. The cafeteria
10. The school
11. The school library

t2. We
€=
e::=
3=€ hb, That, These, Those
These are my books. Those are tall buildings.
LnNcuncs Norrs
1. We use this, thnt, tlrcse, artd those to identi{y objects and people.
2. Only thnt ds can form a contraction in writing: that's.
J. ffier we identify a noun, we can use subject pronouns.

This is my schoot. Ir's on Wilson Avenue.
Those are tall buildings. T\rcy're dorw\town.
That's rnj' teacher. She's a nice woman.
The Present Tense ofBe i7

Exrncrss l7 Imagine that you are showirrg a new student the school
cafeteria. Use this, that, tltese, and those, and a form of be to
complete each statement. The arrows indicate if the item is
near or far.
Thie ie
ExRvptss' the school cafeteria. -->
Thoee are
the clean dishes.
l
1. the trays. -+
2. today's special. -+
o. the napkins. -+
4. the forks, lcdves, and spoons.
5. the cashier. -t
6. the vending machines.
----)
7. the eating area.
8. the teachers'section.
I .10 Negative Statements with ^Be
I am not married. We put not after a form of be to make

Peter is not at home. a negative statement.
We are not doctors.
I'm not late. We can make contracfions for the

English isn't my native language. negative.
My friends aren't here now.
18 Lesson One
LnNcuncr Norrs
There is only one contraction of I am not.There are llvo negative contrac-
ticns for all the oth-er combinations. Study the negative contractions:
I am not I'm not
you are not you're not you aren't
he is not he's not he isn't
she is not she's not she isn't
.l
it is not it's not rt rsn't
we are not we're not we aren't
they are not they're not
Tom is not Tom's not Tom isn't
Exrncrsr l8 Fill in the blanks with a pronoun and a negative verb. Practice
using both negative forms.
ExRt'tplr, The classroom is clean and pig.
It ien't drrry. _It'a-not smalI.
1. We're in the classroom.

in the library. in the cafeteria.
2. Today's a weekday.
Saturday. Sunday.
3. ['m a student. a teacher.

4. The students are busy
laay. tired.
5. You're on time.
early. late.
6. My classmates and I are in an English class.

in the cafeteria. in the library.
Exrncrss l9 Fill in the blanks with a form of. be to make a true affirmative
statement 0r negative statement about the U.S.
t9
Ex.au p r-rs, The U.S. in North America.
The U.S.
tsn't
a small country.
1. Washingf,on, D.C., a state.

2. Washington, D.C., the capital of the U.S. It
on the East Coast.
The Present Tense of Be t9

/-- ) l(:t t 1 : .)r,,-,-'.'' :;'/ €
qt,u.:l.f {r t.t -(..C.,.i.r'", I '!)e I
'le
3. The eastern states big.
4. The western states .big.
5. The White House in New York.

b. New York a big city.
7. Alaska and Hawaii on the mainland.
8. Puerto Rico a state of the U.S.
9. Puerto Rico and Hawaii islands.
10. Florida in the South. It cold in the winter.
Exencrss 2O true or False. Tell if you think the following statements are
true or false. Discuss your opinions
1. English is easy for me.

2. Engiish is-easy for children.
3. American teachers are very strict.2
4. This school is in a nice area.
5. This course is expensive.
6. AU Americans are rich.
7. Baseball is popular in the U.S.
8. January and February are nice months.
Exrnclss 2l Fill in the blanks with a form of be to make an affirmative

statement or negative statement about you, your native country,
or your hometown. You may share your answers with a partner
from a' different country.
,
.-\,â, J
m
ExRptptgs, I from the capital city.
'm not
I from a small town.
1. happy with the goverrrment of my country.

2. from the capital city.
3. My city nolsy.
4. American cars common in my country.
rA slrir{ teacher ha-s a lot of rules.
20 Lesson One
5. Teachers strict.
6. Most people rich.
7. Gas cheap.
8. Apa;tments expensive.
.
9. Bicycles a popular form of transportation.
10. Public transportation good.
11. My country rich.

t2. A college education free.
13. The president (prime minister) a woman.
t4. My hometown in the mountalns.

15. My hometown very big.
16. It very cold in the winter;n my hometown.

:i+W;-i;:',, ..
Exrncrsr 22 Use the words in parentheses ( )Jo change each sentence into
a negative statement.
Exeupr.s: My teacher is American. (Canadian)
He isn't Canadian.
1. Los Angeles and Chicago are cities. (states)
2. I'm from Mexico. (the U.S.)
3. The U.S. is a big country. (Cuba)
4. Alaska is a big state. (Maryland and Delaware)
5. We're in class now. (in the library)
6. You're an English teacher. (a math teacher)
7. Chicago is a big city. (Springfield)
The Present Tense of Be 2t

8. Chicago and Springfield are in Illinois. (Miami)
9. january is a cold month. (July and August)
10. You're American. (I)
ExrRclsr 23 f iU in the blanks with the affirmative or negative of the verb be

to make a true paragraph.
l!)
My name I from an BnglishIt-
(euam,pl,e) (your name) (1)
speaking country. I a student at City College. I in
(2) (3)
my English class now. The class big. My teacher
-. (4) (5)
a man. He/She very young. The classroom very
(6) (t)
nice. It clean. My classmates all very young
(B) (e)
students. We all from the same country We, all
(10) (11)
immigrants. I happ{ to learn English. English very
(12) (13)
easy for me. It a useful language.
(14)
Before You Read 1. Are all the students in our class about the same age?
2. Is, your rent high?
Read the foliowing conversation. Pay special attention to questions with

be.
22 Lesson One
t
t
A. Are you happy with your life in the U.S.?
B. Yes and no. Some things are good. Some things are not so good.
A. What are some good things?
B. I'm free. I'm free to say and do what I like.
A. What are some problems?
B. Rent is high.
A. How much is your rent?
B. It's over $?00 a month for a one bedroom apartment. And medical care
is so expensive.
A. How mueh is a doctor's visit?
B. It's over $100. But the visits are so short. I'm only in the doctor's office
for 15 minutes. And doctors aie cold. They're interested only in your
<=- disease, not in the whole person.
' A. Are you happy with education in the U.S.?
B. Yes and no. Public elementary and high schools are free, but colleges
and uni-sersities are very expensive.
A. How much is the tuition at your college?
B. It's over $50 per credit hour. And books are so expensive. But college
classes are interedting. The students are from all over the world. And
they're all ages. One man in my English class is very old.
A. How old is he?
B. He's 82.
A. Eighty-two? Are you sure?
B. Yes. He's an interesting man. He's a great student. In my country, most
of the students are about the same age. They're young.
A. What are some other differences between colleges in the U.S. and in
your country?
B. The teachers are very friendly and informal here. In my country, the
teachers are strict and formal.
A. What's your favorite thing about life in the U.S.?
B. The people. They're friendly and helpful.
The Present Tense ofBe 23

Be in Yes/No Questions and Short Answers
I am a student. Amlagoodstudent? Yes, you are.

You are from FYance. Are you from Paris? No, I'm noL
He is late. Is he absent? No, he isn't.
She is married. Is she happy? Yes, she is.
It is cold today. Is it windy? Yes, it is.
We are here. Are we late? No, you axen't.
They are neu' students. Are they from Mexico? Yes, they are.
LnucuncE NorEs
1. To ask ayes/no question with the verb be, we put a form of be before
the subject.
2. We usually answer a yes/no question with a short answer. A short
answer contains a pronoun. '
Is the teacher l..ere today? Yes, sh.e ts.

o
r). We don't use a contraction for a short Ees answer.
Is Texas a big state? Yes, iI rls. Nor, Yes, it's.
4. We usually use a contraction for a short'no answer.
Is today Saturday? No, it isn't. oR No, it's not.
5. We usually end a yes/no question with rising intonation. Listen to
your teacher pronounce the statements and questions in the above
box.
ExrRcrsr Look at the maps of the U.S. on pages 2 and 3 to help you
answer these questions.
ExRuplrs: Is Miami in Florida?

Yes, it is.
Is New York City the capital of the U.S.?

No, it isn't.
1. Is Texas a big state? 5. Is Chicago the capital of

2. Are Puerto Ricans citizens of Illinois?
the U.S.? 6. Is Chicago a big city?
3. Is New York City near the 7. Is Puerto Rico an island?
Atlantic Ocean? 8. Is A]aska an island?
4. Is Hawaii near A]aska?
2+ Lesson One
Ererosr 25 Ctose your book. The teacher will ask you some questions.
Answer \rith a true short answer. If the answer is negativer yOu
may add more information.
Exrxlut Is your book new?

Yes, it is. oR No, it isn't. It's a used book.
1. Is your hometown big? t. Are these questions difficult?

d
2. Is Spa4iQh your native 8. Is my pronunciation clear to

language? you?
3. Is English hard for you? 9. Amlastrictteacher?
4. Are you from South America? 10. Are all of you from the same
5. Are you a citizen of the U.S.? country?
6. Are you married? 11. Are all of you the same age?
Exencrsr 25 est questions about this school and class with the words given.
Another student will answer. Use the correct form of. be.
Ex.ampu' school/big
A. Is this schooi big?
B. Yes, it is.
1. this school/near your house 7. this course/free

2. it/new public transportation 8. the textbooks/free
3. the cafeteria/on this floor 9. the teacher/strict
4. itlopen now 10. this room/clean
5. the library/in this building 11. itlbig
6. itlclosed now 12. the chalkboard/black
Exrncrsp 27 XX questions with the words given. Another student will

' answer. Use the correct form of be.
ExRuptr, you/a new student

A. Are you a new student?
B. Yes, I am. oR No, I'm not. This is my second semester here.
1. you/from Asia 7. baseball/popular in your

2. you/a new student country
3. your hometown/ big 8. American cars/popular in your
country
4. you/from the capital city
9. teachers/strict in your country
5. you/an immigrant
10. education/free in your country
6. you/happy in the U.S.
The Present Tense of ,Be 25

ExrRcrsr 28 est questions about the U.S. with the words given. Another
student will answer. If no one knows the answer, ask the
teacher. :
Exlr'lpr.E: movie stars/rich

A. Are American movie stars rich?
B. Yes, they are. They're very rich.
1. American teachers/rich 8. houses/expensive
2. a high school education/free 9. Americans/friendly
3. a college education/free 10. English/the official language
4. college books/free 11. Japanese cars/popular
5. medical care/free 12. fast-food restaurants/popular
6. doctorc/rich 13. movie tickets/cheap
7. blue jeans/popular 14. public schools/closed on
Christmas
ExrRcrss 29 Aead each statement. Then write aUes/no question about the
words in parentheses ( ). Write a short answer.
EXlt'tpl,g: The post office is closed on Sunday. (this school) (yes)
le thia echool cloeed on Sunday? Yea, it ie.
1. July and August are warrn months. (January and February) (no)
2. New York is a big city. (Chicago) (yes)
3. California is a big state. (Alaska and Texas) (yes)
4. Doctors are rich. (movie stars) (yes)
5. Washington, D.C., is in the East. (Washington state) (no)
6. New York is on the East Coast. (California) (no)
7. Chicago isn't a state. (Illinois) (yes)
8. Education in public schools is free. (education in private schools)

/t.^\
26 Lesson One
--
-!
= = ::
--€
= -<-: Wt- Qlestions
Los Angeles a city'.

Is Los Angeles on the West Coast? Yes, it is.
\\-] ere is Los Angeles?
Sacramento the capital of California.
Is Sacramento in Southern Califorrria? No, isn't.
\\-1-Lere is Sacramento?
Study tlie different question words:
Who is your teacher? My leacher is Ms. Weiss.
Il7zol : thing What is your narne? My name is Linda.

What is Christmas? Christn-ras is a holiday.
Ii'7zeia :
time When is Christmas? lt's in December.
Use iz for months ar.d years. lt's o_4 December 25
Use on for days and dates.
Vrlty : reason Why is Mr. Park absent? He's absent because he is sick.
Where is China? It's in Asia.

Ilrhere are your books? They're on the floor.
Where are you from? I'm from Hong Kong.
description, health How is your life in the U.S.? It's difficult.

How is the weather today? It's warm today.
How is your mother? She's fin-e.
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. A wh- question asks for information.
2. The uh- word * is can form a contraction.
W,ere's your father? Holab the u,eather now?
trXCEPTIONS:
. We can't make a contraction for usltich is: -+ Which is yor,rr
book?
. We can't make a contraction for a wh- word + are: ) Wlry
are they late?
V,re usually end a arlz- question with falling intonation. Listen to your
teacher say the questions in the above chart.
The Prersent Terr:;e of /Je 27

j
fisxncrtt 3O n'U in the blanks with the correct question word and a form of
be.
Exlrqprr, What'e your name?

My name is Frank.
1. Los Angeles?
It's in California.
2. your birthday?
lt's in June.
or-
r your teacher?
My teacher is Martha Simms.
4.
ffiarose?
5. you late?
['m late because of traffic.
b. your sisters and brothers?
They're in my country.
7. you?
I'm fine. And you?
8. the teacher's office?
It's on the second floor.
9. the restrooms?
The restrooms are at the end of the hall.
10. Labor Day in the U.S.?

It's in September.
11. we here?
We're here because we want to learn English.
t2. the weather today?

lt's cloudy and cool.
Exgncrsr 3l Test your knowledge. Circle the correct answer to the following
questions. The answers are at the bottom 0f the page.3 (You
may work with a partner.)
1. Where's Dallas?
a. in California b. in Texas c. in Illinois
'An.swers: lb, 2a, llb, 4c, 5c, 6b, 7b, 8c, lla
28 Lesson One
2- \\l'ren is American Independence Day?
a. July 4 b. May 31 c. Decernber 25
It's 8 a.m. in New York. What time is it in Los Angeles?

a. 11 a.m. b. 5 a.m. c. 10 a.m.
4. On what day is Thanksgiving?

a. on Friday b. on Sunday c. on Thursday
5. one of these is the narne of a Great Lake. which one is the name of
a Great Lake?
a. Mississippi b. Missouri c. Michigan
Where is the World Tlade Center?

a. in San Francisco b. in New York City c. in Los Angeles
7. What is the first day of summer?

a. June 1 b. June 21 c. June 30
When is Labor Day in the U.S.?

a. in May b. in June c. in September
9. What's the biggest state?

a. Alaska b. Texas c. New York
I.X3 Questions with What and How
What IS a verb? It's an action word.

What nationality is the teacher? She's American.
Srhat kind of book is this? It's a grammar book.
\\rhat day is today? It's Friday.
\Vhat time is it,? It's 4 o'clock.
\\hat color are your new shoes? They're black.
your new job? lt's great.

L '
the weather today? [t's cool.
old your brother? He's 16 (years old.)
tall you? I'm 5 feet, 3 inches ta!I.
iong this course? It's 10 weeks long.
much that painting? It's $500.
The Present Tense of Be 29

'
. ,.,,' LnNcuAcE Norrs
' "- . :-l
. ^.".
1. A noun can follow u;hat: what ti,me, tohat day, tthat colot'
_.i- -) 2. adjective or adverb can follow hotts: ltow big, hoto old, hou much
Ai-r
\.' 3. For height, Americans use feet (') and inches (").
' -'.' How tall is your father? He's 5 feet 8 inches tall. or He's five-eight.4
' :" 4. y;T":if#{:ii#"JjTj;;y,, to say heno Peopre usuarry answer,
---res= s=.:..i:::..--
Exsnclss 32 pitt in the blanks to complete the questions.
ExRupLr, ,o* old are your parents? They're in their b0s.
l. What your husband? He's Mexican.

2. What it? It's 3 o'clock.
3. \Vhat that? That's
a Japanese car.
4. What words tall, old,

neut, and good? They're a$ectives.
5. What your new car? It's dark blue.
6. How ? My son is ten years old.
7. How ? My brother is 6 feet tall.
8. How ? I'm 25 years old.
9. How ? That car is $10,000.

10. How ? The movie is 2Yz hours long.
ExsRclsr 33 fiU in the blanks to make true statements about yourself. Then
find a partner from a different country, if possible, and
interview your partner by asking questions with the words in
parentheses ( ).
Exnvplu, I'm from Doenia (where)
A. I'm from Bosnia. Where are you from?
B. I'm from Taiwan.
1. My name is . (what)
2. I'm from (Where)
-.
iSt'e Appendix G for convcrsion from cenl.inleters to Ieet and inchcs
30 Lesson One
t
3. The president/prime minister of my country is
(\\ho)
4. Thc presi<ient/prime minister of my country is about
years old. ([Iow)
5. The flag from my country is (What color)
6. My country is in -(*"tl"rnt ,r rrSl"") . (Where)
7. I'm. feet, inches tall. (How

tall)
8. My birthday is in . (When)
(montlD
9. My favorite TV show is . (what)
10. My favorite color is (wha0
Exrncrsr, 34 neaa each statement. Then write a wh- question with the words
in parentheses ( ). Answer with a complete sentence.
Exlupu: Miami is in Florida. (Los Angeles)
Where ie Loe Anqelea? lt'e in California.
2. The capital of England is London. (the capital of the U.S.)
3. Miami and Orlando are in Florida. (Los Angeles and San FYancisco)
4. Alaska is a state. (Philadelphia)
5. Canada is in North America. (Peru)
6. Poland is in Europe. (Ethiopia and Nigeria)
7. Korea and Japan are in Asia. (Colon-rbia)
8. The Mexican flag is green, white, and red. (what color/the American
flag)

9. Igor and Boris are Russian narnes. (what kind of names/James and
William)
10. It's 6 o'clock in New York. (what time/L.A)
Exsnctsr 35 neaA the following telephone conversation between Cindy (C)

and Maria (M). Fill in the blanks.
C. Hello?
M.Hi, Cindy.. This is Maria
How are you?
C. Hi, Maria
(eoatWl,e)
M. I'm fine. This is a longdistance call. I'm not home now.

C. Where
(1)
M. I'm in New York City. I'm on vacation.
C.
(2)
M. Oh, yes. It's very interesting. The Statue of Liberty is here.
C.
(3)
M. It's sunny and warm.
C.
(+)
M. No, I'm not alone.
C. Who
(5)
M. My daughter is with me.
C.
(6)
M. She's 12. She's very interested in the U.S.
C. It's six-thirty in los Angeles. in New York?
(7)
M. It's nine-thirty.
C. I'm happy to hear from you. Thanks for calling.
M. I'11 see you when I get home.
1. Uses of Be
Description: Chicago is big.
Identification/Classification: This is Chicago. It is a city.
Location: Chicago is in lllinois.
32 Lesson One
Place of origin: The teacher is from Chicago.
Age: I am 25 (years old).
Physical or mental condition: He is hungry. I am thirsty. She is worried.
Tlme: It is 6 p.m.
Weather: Ir is warm today.
Subject Pronouns
I we he she it you they
3. Contractions
Srrbject pronoun * form of be: I'm, you're, he's, she's, it's, we're, they're
Subject noun with is: the teacher's, Tom's, Mary's
fs or are * not: isn't, aren't
Wh- word * is: what's, when's, where's, why's, who's, how's
Ihis/That/The se/Thos e
Ihis is an English book.
Ihese are pencils
That is a pen.
Those are pens.
5. Articles a/an
Chicago is a big city.
Puerto Rico is an island.
6. Statements and Questions with Be

-
AIiTIIRIVTT{TTVE. California is a state.

NEGATIVE: Los Angeles isn't a state.
YES/NO QUESTION: Is t os Angeles in California?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, it is.
WH. QUESTION: Where is Chicago?
AFFIRMAIME: You are from Asia.

NEGATME: You aren't from Europe.
YES/NO QUESTION: Are you from China?
SHORT ANSWER: No, I'm not.
I4lf1- QUESTION: Where are you from?
1. Don't repeat the subject with a pronoun.
My father he lives in Australia.
Use correct word order. Put ttre subject at the beginning of the statement.
Cuba ie emall.
Is-sreall-Guba,

Use the correct word order' Put
the a(iective before the noun'
3.
cubais
^MW{K& quesdon'
4. Use the correct word order in a
ie he
Where he-is from?
Every sentence has a verb' Don't omit

be'
6.
ie
MY sister a teacher'
time and weather, the subject is it'

6. Every sentence has a subject' For
It'g
{r 6 o'clock now'
It's
{i very cold todaY
7.Don'tconfuseyow(possession)withyou're'thecontractionfotyouare'
+ara good teacher'

8. Dcn't confuse this zlrld' th'ese'
This
T+ese is mY coat'
These
ts. are mY shoes'
The plural of the subject pronoun

i't is thny' not it's'
9.
TheY're
good pets'
Dogs are friendly animals' Its
States'
10. Always vse tlwbefore U'S' and United
the
MY sister is in U'S'
States'
11. Use a singular verb after the Uni'ted
,io
The U.S. are a big country'
12. Do not use a contraction fot om

rnt'
l'm not
t-amn+ an American'
letter'
13. Put the apostrophe in place of the missing
isn'L
She id* here todaY'
for a contraction'
14. Use an apostrophe, not a comma'
l'rn
ryn a good student'
3+ Lesson One
l5 L se the article a before a singular noun.
a
New York is big city.
16. Don't use a before plural nouns.
July and August are & warm months.
t7. Don't use the article o, before an adjective n'ith no noun.
New York is a big.
18. Use o,n before a vowel sound.
Puerto Rico is # istanO.
19. Don't make an adjective plural.

My daughters are beautifuls-
20. Don't make a contraction with fs after s, z, sll, or clz sounds.

ie
Los Angelests a big city.
2t. For age, use a number only or a number -f years old.
He's 12 year& or He'e 12 yeare old.
22. Don't use a contraction for a short Ues answer.

lam
fue you from Mexico? Yes, Jh-
23. Don't separate how from the adiective or adverb.
old iE he?
How is*e-old?
PART I Find the mistakes with the underlined words arrd, correct them.
Not every sentence has a mistake. If the sentence is correct,
write C.
1?':i
ExRvPtrs' Hi,s nry brolht'r.
Chicago's a big city. C
1. New York and Los Angeles are a big cities.

2. The teacher's not here today.
l'he I'resent Tensc of Br: 35

J. She is'nt in the library.
4. I arnn't from Pakistan. I'm from India.
5. The students they are very smart.
6. Alaska and Texas are bigs states.
7. We're not hungry. We aren't thirsty.
B. It's warm today.

rt
9. I'm from Ulcaine. My rvife from Poland.
10. My little brother is 10 years.
11. French's a beautifuI language.
12. It's 4:35 now.
13. Yoqr in the U.S. now.
t4. These is a good book.

15. These are my pencils.
16. Those dogs are beautiful. Its friendly.
17. I live in U.S.

18. January is cold month.
19. My father is a tall.
20. New York City and L.A. are bigs.
2r. Chewolet is a American company.
22. Is He from Peru? Yes, he's.
23. Chicago it's a big city.
PART 2 Find the mistakes with word order and correct them. Not every
sentence has a mistake. If the sentence is correct, write C.
ExRuplrs, I have u6-"o@>

She is 25 years old. C
1. Is very long this book.

2. She has a car very beautiful.
3. Why you are late?
4. Ilow old are you?

5. What nationality your wife is?
36 Lesson One
r-1. \\'I'rat color is your new coat?
,. \\hy the teacher is absent?

S. Is your father a doctor?
PART 3 Fill in the blanks t0 complete this conversation. Not all blanks
need a word. If the blank doesn't need a word, write 0.
A. where are you from ,
(et:ample) \
B. I'm from Mexico.

(eranwle)
A. Are you happy in U.S.?

(1)
B. Yes, I The U.S. is great country.
(3)
-l
A. big city?
(4) (5)
B. Yes. I'M from Mexico City. It's big city. This eity
(6)
IS big and beautiful too. But cold in the winter.
(7) (8)
A. fror-n Mexico too?
(e)
B. No, my roommate from Taiwan. I'm happy in the U.S., but
(10)
he happy here. He homesick.
(1 1) (12)
A. whv homesick?
(13)
B. His parents in Taiwan. He alone here.
(14) (15)
A. FIow ,
(16)
B. He's very young. He only 18 years
(17) (18)
A. What his uarne?
( 1e)
B. His nane Lu.
The Present Tense of ,Be 37

pARr 4 x;*: ;:slll3:li3l,"t lT,T'ff;L'mrf
it's not possible to
ahe'a
. E)GMPLES: she is
X
English i"
1. we are 6. Los Angeles is
2- you are not 7. Mary is not
3. I am not 8. he is not
4. they are 9. what is
5. this is 10.-wl"rat are
I panr 5 Read the conversation between two students, Sofia (S) and
Danuta (D). They are talking about their classes and teachers.
. Fill in the blanks.
D. Hi, Sofia. How's your English class?
S. Hi, Danuta . tt'? , - wonderful. I ,.,, very happy with it.
(e*ample) ( 1)
D. in level 3. What level in?
(2) (3)
. S. I'-- in level.2.
(4)
--'rn
D. My. English teacher Ms. Kathy James.
- __-_ a very
(5) (6)
good teacher. Who
(7)
S. Mr. Bob Kane is my English teacher. very good, too.
(8)
. D. an old man?
(e)
S. No, he . He's young man. He about
: (10) (11) (12)
25 years . How 2
(ls) (14)
D. Ms. James (15)
about 50 years old.
S. How
(16)
D. Sheh about 5 feet, 6 inches tall.
S. Is she American?
D. Yes, she She's from New York.
(17)
S.
( 1B)
-.
38 Lesson One
I
D. Yes My class is very big. The students from many countries.
(1e)
Ten students from Asia, six students from
(20) (21)
Europe, one student from Afric4 and five a^re
(22) (28)
Central America. Is your class big?
S. No, it
6e4)
D. Where
(25)
S. The students all from the same country. We from
(26) (27)
Russia
D. Russian?
(28)
S. No. -Mr. Kane isn't Russiart. He's from Canada, but he's
(2e)
American citizen now.
D.
(s0)
S. No. Ttrat's not Mr. Kane. That husband. I
(s1) (32)
Iate! See you later.
CTASSROOM r. Write a sentence about yourself. Give your height, a physical description,
ACTIVITIES your nationality, your occupation, Vou age (optional), your gender (man
or woman). Put the papers in a box. The teacher will read each paper.
Guess who it is.
Exnupli, I'm 5'8" tall.

I'm Mexican.
I'm thin.
I'm 21 years old.
\[brk with a partner. Describe a famous person (an actor, a singer, an athlete,
a politician). Report your description to the class. Do not give the person's
narne. See if your classmates can guess who it is.
Exlprpr.g' He is a former basketball player.

He's tall.
He's famous.
He's an African American.
The Present Tense ofBe 39

3. Check the words that describe you. Find a parher and ask each other
Sl questions using these words. See how many things you have in common-
Tell the class something interesting you learned about your partrrer.
a- i. afraid to speak English

b. -happy
from Africa j. - an only childE
c. - from Asia k. - from the capital of my counbry

d. - Europe l. - an American citizen
e. -from
interested in politics m. - hungry
f. - grandparent n. -
married
g. -a 20 years old o. -
athletic
h. -under in love -
4. Fill -in the blanks. Then flnd a partner and read your sentences to your
parbrer. See how many times you match your parbrer's sentence.
a- Love is
b. This city is
c. Children are
d. The teacher is
e. Money is
f. The American president is

g. My friends are
h. Iam
l. Public transportation in this crff is
j. This book is
Woik with a parhrer from the same countqr, if possible. Fill in a few items
for each category. Report some information to the class.
6An only clvikihas no sisters or brothers.
40 Lesson One
Ex.lxfU, \pical of the U.S.
Tcrd Dioneyland baeeball Enqlioh Waohinqlon, New York

ttt- 53/ C"xy the Grand basketball D'C' Loe Anqelee
Toyota Canyon football Chicaqo
lour eountry
WRITING Write a paragraph using Exercise 23 as a model. For every negative statement
that you write, add an affirmative statement. You may add other information,
too.
ExRtqptrt
1u --^., ,\,hn1oorr,*rr--l - -9L

a -t J,;*) r-- f^Jrt.--nt*-lt)a u<ttc&z
- b:. An. - g.-Y. . aL nta,
t -n,t!-* ,t y';. klt-r-. ,-.A'^r, o,
dTt,,lut* a-t P*t x,li"7/n;*rn;7;
.-0',"", t) a,x' AJ'1" r/nt \, m-oa)- . ! .
U
^v
OUT SIDE 1. Interview an American (a neighbor, a co-worker, another student or a teacher

ACTIVITI ES at this college). Ask him or her the following questions. Repor[ this pepon's
answers to the class.
The Present Tense of ,Ba 41

a- What city are you from?
b. Are your pa^rents or grandparents from another country? Where are they
from?
c. Is most of your fandly in this city?
d. Are you happy with this city? Why or why not?
e. What are your favorite places in this city?
Do you have a postcard from your hometown? Bring it to the class and tell
about the picture.
Buy a postcard of this city. Write to a friend, gling some information about
the picture or about this city. Read your postcard.to the class.
Internet Activity
Using the Internet, find out more about the Stafue of Liberty.
1. How tall is it?

I Where is it?
3. Is it free for visitors?
+2 Lesson One
ii
G RAMMAR
Simple Present Tense
CONTEXT
Washington, D.C.
Meet Sara Harris
LESSON FOCUS
A simple present tense verb has tvro forms:
eat-eats run-runs play-plays have-has
We use the simple present tense for facts and regular

activities.
Americans speak English.
The President Li.ues in Washington, D.C.
Americans el,ect a president every four years.
43
Before You Read 1. What capital cities do you know?
2. What do you know about Washington, D.C.?
The Capitol The Vietnam War Memorial
Read the following article. Pay special attention to the present tense verbs.
,,:
-,. l:r:.:',;"::;ii
, =;,,,,'iiili
tffi Washington, I).C.

Washington, D.C., is the capital of the United States. D.C. means District
of Columbia. It is not a state; it is a special government district. More
than half a million people live in Washington. Many residents work for the
government.
Tourists from all over the United States and many other countries visit
Washington. They come to see the Capitol, the building where Congress
meets. Another popular tourist attraction is the White House, the President's
home. Eight to ten thousand tourists visit the White House every day. Tour
guides show visitors many rooms, but they don't show them the President's
private family rooms or private offices.
,-,-)---''
'
,1 (- Z" Besides government buildings, Washington also has many important mon-
''-tt' "'
uments and museums. The Smithsonian Institution has 16 museums, galleries,
and a zoo. The Smithsonian includes the Air and Space Museum. This very
popular museum shows visitors real spaceships, such as the Apollo 11, which
Did you know...? landed on the moon in 1969'
Many visitors want to see the Vietnam War Memorial. This wall of dark
The first location stone has all the names of American soldiers who died in the war in Vietnam.
of the U.S. capital Tourists don't pay to see government buildings and museums. However,
was in New York tourists need tickets fo see many places because these places are crowded.
City. A trip to Washington is an eqjoyable and educational experience.
+4 Lesson T\vo
T
.t a
!
*.? i Simple Present Tense-Forms
I He
lou She works in \\rashington'
\1-e in Washington. It
Thel- The President
\fr- friends
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. We use the base for:m when the subject iS /, Aour u)e, tlrcy,
ot a plural
noun.
2. we use the -s form when the subjectis he, she, it, or a singular noun'
3. Three verbs have an irregular -s form:
have -+ has (Pronunciation lhnzl)
go + goes
ao -+ does (Pronunciation /d/rz/)
4. a singular verb.
Aft,er fam'i,LY, :use
My familY liues in Korea.
Exr,nctsr I Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb.
Exlupu:
ltke
visitors(like/likes) the museums.
1. The President --(liiê/lioes) in the White House'
, Many people in Washington ; ;; : : for the government'

:
(u,olffirorks)
3. Washingtofi
- ,, ,, : many beautiful museums'
(lmuc/lrus)
4. Millions of tourists Washington every Year.

(ur.s i I/t'isils)
5. Tour guides ---=-=- r'isitors the White House'

( sltout/sltou's)
6. The Vietnan'r War l\{emorial the names of men and women

(ltouc/lrus)
who died hr the wat'.
7. "D.C." ('ttr t'u tt htrattts )

District of Columbia.
Simple Prttsettt'Iense 45
nB '+
s-F Simple Present Tense-Uses
The President lives in the White With general truths, to show that
House. something is consistently true
Washington, D.C., has a good
subway.
Americans eat fries and harnburgers With customs

with their hands.
Many Americans have a picnic on
the Fourth of July.
We take a vacation every sununer. To show regular activity (a habit) or
We sometimes go to Washington. repeated action
I come from Bosnia. To show a place of origin

He comes from Iraq.
Exrncrss 2 write the correct form of the verb. Add more words to give
facts.
come from Colombia
ExRuprr, , (come)
1. The capital of my country

(haue)
2. Most people in my country

(haue)
3. In nly native city, I especially

(tike)
4. Tourists in my country
(ui.sit)
5. My native city people.

(hare)
6. My family
(liue)
7. In the U.S., I
(Liue)
8. The U.S.
(ho.uc)
46 Lesson Two
9. I College/School.
(attmd,)
10. This school

(haue)
2.3 Spelling of the -s Form
Add s to most verbs to make the -s form. hope hopes

eat eats
When the base form ends in ss, sh, ch, or r, miss misses
add es and pronounce an extra syllable. wash washes
catch catches
mix mixes
When the base form ends in a consonant +
E change the y to z and add es.
When the base form ends in a vowel * y,
add s. Do not change the A.
Exrncrss 3 Write the -s form of the following verbs.

ExRuplr,st eat
eats
study
etudiee
watchee
1. try 11. say

2. play L2. change
3. have 13. brush

4. go 14. obey
5. worry 15. reach
6. finish 16. fix
7. do L7, work
8. push 18.
9. e4ioy 19. charge

10. think 20. see
Simple Present Tense 47

2.4 Pronunciation of the -s Form
hope-hopes grab-grabs ftuss-mlsses

eat---eats read-reads dance-dances
pick-picks hug-hugs :r.c.r tr-,,.l', use-uses
(
laugh-laughs live-Iives wash-washes
hum-hums -* ,',' r,-'t'-
watch-watches
run-runs change-changes
po \t 1r-u"r-6.{5o-
borrow-borrows fix-fixes
sing-sings
fall-falls
hear-hears
see-sees
LnNcuncs Norrs
1. We pronounce /s/ after voiceless sounds: /p, t, k, fl
2. We pronounce lz/a.fter voiced sounds: /b, d, S, v, ffi, fl,
!, l, r/ and all
vowels.
3. We pronounce /ez/when the base form ends in ss, ce, se, sh, ch, ge, r.
4. The following verbs have a change in the vowel sound. T.isten to your
teacher pronounce these examples.
do /du/-does /d.ltz/
say /seV-says lsezl
Exrncrsr 4 Go back to Exercise 3 and pronounce the base form and -s form
.of
each verb.
Exrnctsr 5 Fill in the blanks with the -s form of the verb in parentheses ( ).
Pay attention to the spelling rules. Then pronounce each
sentence. ,.
ExnNplrr A teacher triea to help students learn.

Arv)
1. A pilot an airplane.
Aa)
2. A dishwasher dishes.
3. A babysitter children.
(wat.ch)
48 Lesson T\vo
A soldier an officer.
(obey)
A citizen taxes.
(paa)
A mechanic machines.
A student
A student homework.
(do)
A homemaker a home.
(manage)
A secretary a computer.
(use)
A teacher students.
(teaclt)
Exencrss 5 Write at least three sentences to tell about your professicn

(former, present, or future). Tell what someone in this
profession does.
ExRt,tpr-t, A car mechanic tries to find the problem in a car. Then he fixes the problem.
A mechanic also changes parts; such as tires, oiI, and brakes.
:r, - ,,lI; Comparing Affirmative Statements with Be and 0ther Verbs
I am a student. You are right. We are immigrants.

I study English. You know the answer. We come from Guatemala.
They are kind. The teacher is American. He is busy.

They help people. She teaches grammar. He works hard.
Exsnclsr 7 A student is oomparing himself to his friend. Fill in the blanks

with the correct form of the underlineC verb.
Exlt-tpt-gs' My friend and I are very different.
I g"t ,rp at 7 o'clock. He qef,' up at 10.

'e;
I'm a good student. He"- a lazy student.
Simple Preseni Tense 49

1. I study every day. He only before a test.
2. I aiways get As on my tests. He C's.
o
o. I have a scholarship. He a government loan.
4. I'm a good student. He arl average student.
5. He lives in a dormitory. in an apartment.
6. He's from Japan. I from the Philippines.
7. He studies with the radio on. in a quiet room.
B. He watches a lot of TV. I TV only when I have free time.
9. He eats a lot of meat. I a lot of fish.
10. He uses a laptop computer. I a desktop computer.
Before You Read 1. Do you need a car in this city? Why or why not?
2. What are some interesting places to see in this city?
Read the following article. Pay special attention to the negative form of
verbs.
Meet Sara Harris

Sara Haruis is a single, thirty-year-old woman. She lives in Washington,
D.C. She works just a few blocks from the White House. She has a job with
the government.
Washington has a good subway, s0 Sara doesn't need a car. The subway
is clean and the trains are quiet. The subway trains run until midnight. Sara
50 Lesson T\vo
us€s the pubiic transportation system, but if she is late or in a hurry, she
takes a taxi. She doesn't take a taxi very often because it's too expensive.
Like many residents of Washington, Sara isn't a native of Washington.
She comes from Chicago, Illinois. Her parents don't live in Washington. They
Iive in Chicago.
Sara lives alone, but she has hvo cats. She also has a lot of friends. She
doesn't see her friends during the week because she is so busy. She sees
her friends on the weekends.
She works hard, so she doesn't have much time to visit the galleries
and museums. When friends and relatives from out of town come to visit
her, she gives them a tour of her city.
g.s Negative Statements with the Simple Present Tense
Sara lives in Washington. We use doesn't + the base form with

She doesn't live in Chicago. he, she, it, or a singular noun.
Her parents live in Chicago. We use d.on't t the base form with
They don't live in Washington. I, yo'u' we, th,ey, or a plural noun.
LnNcuncr Norr,s
1. Don't is the contraction for do not. Doeste't is the contraction for does
not.
2. Always use the base form atter don'f and doesn't.
o
J. American English and British English use different grammar to form
the negative of haue. Compare:
AtllpRtclN He doesn't haue a dictionary.
BRIttsu, He ltasn't a dictionary. oR He hasn't got a dictionary.
+-{n#ra1i_.-j.:.ir ., l
Exr,ncrsr 8 Fiil in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb.
, doean'L work
EXRtqptf Sara works in Washington. She in Chicago.
1. She sees her friends cn the weekend. She her

frien-chduring the week.
2. Her friends have jobs. They much free time.
3. Her paren*"s live in Chicago. They in Washing-

ton.
Simple Present Tense 5t

4. Her parents visit her in the spring. They her
in the winter.
5. Sara has time on the weekend. She time during
the week.
6. Sara lives alone. She with her parents.
7. She works for the government. She in aprivate
company.
8. She takes a taxi when she's in a hurry. She a
taxi everyday.
9. She has two cats. She a dog.

10. She visits museurns and galleries when friends come to visit.
She museums and galleries every day.
Exsncrsr 9 Tell if this school has or doesn't have the following items.
Ex.Rl,tpnst ESL courses
This school has ESI. courses.
classes for children
It doesn't have classes for children.
1. a library 5. a swimming pool 9. dormitories
2. a cafeteria 6. a gym 10. classes for children
3. copy machines 7. a student newspaper 11. a computer lab
4. a parking lot B. a theater 12. e-mail for students
ExrRclsr IO Uat<e an affirmative statement or a negative statement with the

words given to state fapts about the teacher. Use the correct
form of the verb.
ExRt,tplr, speak Arabic
The teacher speaks Arabic.
OR
The teacher doesn't speak Arabic.
1. talk fast 6. pronounce my name correctly

2. speak English well 7. wear glasses
3. speak my language 8. wear jeans to class
4. give a lot of homework 9. teach this class every day
5. give tests 10. watch the students during a test
52 Lesson Th'o
Exsscrse 11 Check (/)
the items that describe you and what you do.
Exchange your book with another student. Make statements
abcut the other student.
Exl:r r lgs, I have children.
Marta doesn't have children.
-
V I like cold weather,
I\{arta likes cold weather.
1. 6.
2. -IspeakChinese.
Ilivea]one. 7. -IIikesummer.
I Iike cold weather.
3. - I live near school. 8. -
4.
-- I walk to school. I use the Intemet.
9. -Ihaveacomputer.
5. - -
-IspeakSpanish ";ih;
underlined verh.
Exlt'lplfS: We study English grarnmar.
We
don'[ study American history.
The teacher speaks English in class.

doesn'L opeak
He/She another language in class.
1. The President lives in Washington, D.C.

He in New York.
2. The President serves for four years.
He for six yea.rs.
3. The U.S. Congress makes the laws.

The President the laws.
4. The President and lds family live in the White House.
The Vice President in the White House.

5. Tourists see many rooms in the White House.
They the President's private living area.
6. The Washington subn ay r"r-rns all day.
It after midnight.

r
l
7. People in Washington pay to ride the subway"
They to enter most museums.
8. Some people need a car.
Sara a car.
9. Some workers live in Washington.
Some workerb in Washington. They live near

Washington. -
10. We study American English.
We British English.
11. I need a grammar book in this course.
a history book.
t2. Sara lives in Washington. J
Her parents in Washington.

13. Sara and her friends go out on the weekend.
They out on weekdays.
t4. Washington, D.C., has a subway.
Miami a subway.
2..7 "Comparing
Negative Statements with Be and 0ther Verbs
I'm not from Mexico. They're not sure.

I don't speak Spanish. They don't know the answer.
You aren't sick. We aren't lost.
You don't need a doctor. We don't need help,
She isn't hungry. He's not cold.

She doesn't want dinner. He doesntt want a sweater.
Exrncrsr l3 Check (/) the items that describe you and what you do.
Exchange your b00k with another student. Make statements
about the other student.
ExRuptr' I'm an immigrant.
Margarita isn't an immigrant. She comes from Puerto Rico.
-
5rt Lesson T\vo

F. i \/: :
I have a computer.
I'Ia-rgadta has a cornputer.
1. I'm maruied. 7. I'm a firll-time student.

2. - I have children/a child. 8. -
3. 9. -Il"raveapet.l
I'm an immmigrant.
4. -Ihaveacomputer.
I'm an American citizen. 10. - I'rn happy in the U.S.
5. - I like this city. 11. -
6. - L2.-Ilikebaseball.
I understand Arnericart TV.
-Ihaveajob.
Exrncrsr 14 Choose one of the'items from the list below. Write sentences
telling what this person does 0r is. Include negative statements.
(You may work with a partner.) Read some of your sentences to
the class.
Exnuplr' a good teacher
A good teacher er?lains the lesson.
A good teacher doesn't get angry at students.
A good teacher doesn't walk away after ciass when students harre questions.
A good teachbr is patient.
1. a good friend 3. a good doctor

2. a good mother or father 4. a good adult son or daughter
Exsncrsr l5 Read each statement. Then make a negative statement with the
words in parentheses ( ).
ExRuplr' Sara works in Washington. (Chicago)

)he doeen't work in Chicago,
1. Colombians speak Spanish. (Brazilians)
lApel is ar arLimal that Iives in someone's house. Dogs and cats aie common pets

2. I speak Engiish in class. (my native ianguage)
3. A, E, I, '\), anC U are vowels. (8, C, and D)
4. I'm from . (the U.S.)

(Eour country)
5. Washington is a special goverrrment district. (a state)
6. The subway in Washington is clean. (dirby)
7. My brother works in Washington. (live in Washington)
8. Washington has an Air and Space Museum. (New York)
L 9. Sara is busy during the week. (on the weekend)
10. Sara is single. (ma:rried)
11. A taxi ride is expensive. (a bus ride)
E"& Yes/No Questions and Short Answers with the Simple Present
Tense
Does Sara live in Washington? Yes, We use do or does to form a yes/no

she dqgs. question. We always use the base
Do her parents live in Washington? form after do or does.
No, they don't. We can answer with a short answer.
Compare statements and questions:
Tourists visit the White House.

they visit the President's private rooms? No, they don't.
The President lives in the White House.
the Vice President live in the White House? No, he doesn't.
56 Lesson Two
Lexcunce Norrs
l. Use doas with hE, she, it, and singular subjects.
2^ Use do wittr /, Aou,. we, t:treE, arrd plural subjects.
3. We usually answer a yes/rw question with a short answer. The short
iuEwer uses a pronoun.
Do Sara's parents live in Washington? No, they don't.
4. The short answer usually uses a contraction in the negative.
5. American English and British English use different grarnmar to form
a question vmth haae. Compare:
AupnlceN: Does he haue a car? Yes, he does.
BnItsu: flas he a car? on Ilas he got a car? Yes, he ho,s.
Exrncrsr l6 Ask your teacher a question with "Do you . . ?" and the words
given. Your teacher will respond with a short answer.
Exlvpur: drive to school

A. Do you drive to school?
B. Yes, I do. oR No, I don't.
1. like your job

2. teach in the surnmer
3. have anotherjob
4. speak another language
5. teach English to Americans
6. lorow my language
7. like to read students'homework
8. live far from the school
9. have a fax machine
10. have trouble with English spelling
11. have an e-mail address
12. like soccer

ExrRctsr 17 fwo students are comparing teachers. Fill in the blanks to
complete this conversation.
like
A. Do you your English class?
(Euomple: like)
B. Yes, I
(1)
.I (2 haue)
a very good teacher. Her name IS
Ms. lopez.
A. Spanish?
(3)
B. No, she doesn't. She comes from the Philippines. She

(4 speak)
En$ish and Tagalog.
A. My teacher is very good too. But he fast, and sometimes

(5 talk)
him. He a lot of homework.
(6 rwt/uuler"stand) (7 gil)e)
a lot of homework?
(8)
B. Yes, she does. And she a test once a week.

(9 siue)
A. 1\{y teacher jeans to class. He's very informal.

(10 wear)
jeans to class?
. (11)
B. No, she doesn't. She always wears a dress.
Exp.ncrsr I 8 ReaO each statement. Then write a yes/no question about the
ExRvprrs: You lcrow the present tense. (the past tense)
Do you know the paet tenee? No, I don't.
The school has computer classes. (gym classes)
Doea it have qym claoeee? Yee, it does.
1. The teacher uses the chalkboard. (a map)
2. You bring your textbook to class. (your dictionary)
3. We need practice with grammar. (with spelling)
58 Lesson TVo
.1. The teacher speaks English. (another language)
5. I understand the teacher. (you)
6. The past tense has a lot of irregular verbs. (the present tense)
7. The teacher speaks English fluently. (the students)
8. Washington has a space museum. (a zoo) (ansuer: yes)
9. People pay to use the subway in Washington. (to enter the White
House) (ansuer: no)
10. The subway trains run all day. (after midnight) (answer: no)
:rl!aiv::
Exrncrsr l9 Put a check next t0 customs from your native country. Then
make an affirmative or negative statement about your country.
Ask another student if this is a custom in his/her native
country. (You may work with a partner.)
ExRvplr' v People take off their shoes before they enter a house.
A. Russians take off their shoes before they enter a house.
r\
Do Mexicans take off their shoes before they enter a house?
B. No, we don't.
1. People take off their shoes before they enter

a house.
-
2. People bou. when they say hello. bow
3. - People shake hands when they say hello.
4. - People bring a gift when they visit a friend's

house.
-
5. People eat u.ith chopsticks.
-
6. On the bus, younger people stand up to let
an older person sit down.
- 6\
7. Women cover their faces with a veil.
8. - People visit friends without calling flrst. W veil
9. - Men open doors for women.
10. - Men give flowers to women for their birthdays.
11. - People celebrate children's day.
L2. - High school students wear a uniforr."-.
-
2,ff ComparingYes/No Questions with Be and,0ther Verbs
Are you lost? No, I'm not. Am I right? Yes, you are.
Do you need help? No, I don't. Do I have the right answer? Yes, you do.
Are they from Haiti? Yes, they are. Is the teacher British? No, he isn't.
Do they speak French? Yes, they do. Does the teacher have an accent? No, he doesn't.
Exsncrsr 2O Read each statement. Then write a Aes/no question about the
words in parentheseq ( ). Write a short answer.
Exnupr.rs: Americans like baseball. (basketball) (yes)

Do Americana like baaketball? Yea, they do.
Baseball is popular in the U.S. (rugby) (no)
r in the U.5.? No, it ien't.
1. Americans shake hands when they meet. (Mexicans) (yes)
2. Children learn a language easily. (adults) (no)
3. Americans speak English. (Australians) (yes)
4. Hot dogs are popular in the U.S. (tacos) (yes)
5. You understand American English. (British English)
50 Lesson T\uo
d. Japanese people eat rvith chopsticks. (American people) (no)
l. English has a lot of irregular verbs. (Spanish) (yes)
8. You are interested in the English language. (American history)
9. The subway in Washington is clean. (quiet) (yes)
10. Sara works from Monday to Friday. (on the weekend) (no)
G cft
Z.EU Or Questions
Do you study English or French? An or" question gives a choice of

I study English. answers. The first part of an o?'
question has rising intonation; the
Is Washington, D.C., on the east second part has falling intonation.
coast or the west coast? Listen to your teacher pronounce
It's on the east coast. the examples to the left.
Exrncrsr 2l Circle the words that are true for you, and make a statement
about yourseH. Then ask a question. Another student will
answer.
ExRptplr' t annu@4t tua in the morning.

. A. I drink coffee in the morning.
Do you drink coffee or tea in the morning?
B. I drink coffee too.
1. I speak English / mA nati,ae Language at home.

2. I prefer classical m,usic/ popular music.
3. I'm o. resident of tlrc U.S. / a. uisitor'-
4. I'm marri,ed / single.
5. I live rn a house / an aytartnrcnt / a dormitory.
6. I write with my Ngltt hand / l,e.Jt lmnd.

7. I'm from a big ci,ty / a small town.
8. I prefer morning classes / euuning cktsses.
dB #c
€" gE [tr?i- Questions with the Simple Present Tense
My brother works in Washington.

Does he work for the government? No, he doesn't.
Where does he work?
Why doesn't he work for the government?
They have a ca.r.

Do they have an American car? Yes, they do.
What kind of car do they have?
LnNcuncE NorEs
The correct word order for wh- questions is:
Wh -word + do/does/d,on't/doesn't + Subject * Base Form of
Verb (* Complement)
Exrncrss 22 fn in the blanks with the missing word.

fixeg"tptrt Where
do you live? I live in Detroit.
1. Where your brother live? He lives in New York.
2. How children do you have? I have two children.
3. you study? I study in the library.
4. whv you study at home? I don't study at home because
it's too noisy.
5. Howmanylanguages yourteacher ? He speaks
two languages.
6. Where your sister ? she works downtown.
x."fi2 Wh- Qrestions with Prepositions
Where does your friend come from?

What floor do you live on?
62 Lesson T\vo
Lerucuncr Norrs
l. In formal writing, we put the preposition before a question word. In
conversation, we usuallyput the preposition atthe errd of the question.
Fontvter,, On what floor do you live?
Ixronul: What floor do you live oz?
2. We use wh,om after apreposition. We often tsewho when the preposi-
tion is at the end.
Fonuar: With whnm do you live?
INronml, Wo do you live with?
3. We carr talk about a person's country of origin with be or con'Le.
Where are yov from?
Where do you conl,e from?
ExsRcrse 23 est and answer questions \4'ith the words given. First ask a Aes/
question. Then use the words in parentheses
?40 ( ) to ask a
wh- question, if possible.
Exluptr' live near school (where)
A. Do you live near school?
B. Yes, I do.
A. Where do you live?
B. I live on Green and Main.
1. speak Spanish (what language)

2. need English in your country (why)
3. have American friends (horv many)
4. like this city (why)

5. live near the school (where)
6. plan to go back to your country (when) (why)
,, ,. live alone (with whom oR who .. . u,ith)

8. practice English outside of class (u'ith whom oR who . . . with)
9. bring your dictionary to class (why)
10. have a cell phone (why)
tt il t iR\#. )1,Y 5' J\A l;. t \
Exrncrss 24 n'irst ask the teacher a Aes/no question. After you get the
answer, use the words in parentheses ( ) to ask a wh- question,
if possible. Your teacher u.ill answer.
Exlrqprr,' teach sumnrer school (why)
A. Do you teach sunllll(rr school?

B. No, I don't.
A. Why don't you teach suflrmer.school?
B. Because I like to travel in the sununer.
1. have an offrce mate (what/your office mate/teach)

2. getpaid on the first of the month (when)
3. have a computer (what kind of computer)
4. speak another language (what language)
5. teach summer school (why)

6. work in another school (what other school . . . in)
7. correct the homework in school (where)
8. prefer evening classes (why)
9. drive to school (how . . get'to school)
10. like to teach English (why)
11. come frcim this city (what city . . . from)
12. have children (how many)
Exrnctss 25 ast and answer questions about another teacher with the words
given. First ask a Aes/no question. Then use the words in
parentheses ( ) to ask a u)h- question, if possible.
ExRuprg: speak your language (what languages)

A. Does your teacher speak your language?
B. No, he doesn't
A. What languages does he speak?
B. He speaks English and French.
l. give a lot of homework (why)

2. write on the chalkboard (when)
3. use a tape recorder in class (why)
4. come to class late (what time)
5. call you by your first name (why)
6. pronounce your name correctly (how)
7. use a textbook (what textbook)
8. wear jeans to class (what)
2Get means arrive.
64 Lesson T\vo
a
6
2.13 (hestions about Meaning, Spelling, and Cost
'E docs D.C. mean? It means District of Columbia.

h do you spell "district"? D-I-S-T-R-I-C-T
h do you say "district" in Spanish? "Distrito"
fuEnctr does yourbook cost? $20
Lnrucuncr Norrs
Mea:n, spell, say, arrd cost areverbs and should be in the verb position
of a question.
Exrncrse 25 Fill in the blBriks in the conversation below with the missing
words.
A. What
'a your name?
(eoampl.e)
B. My narne is Martha Gomez.
(1)
B. G-O-M-E - Z.It's a Spanish name.
A. Are yod Spain?
(2)
B. No, I'in
(3)
A. What coun@ you come
(4) (5)
B. I come from Guatemala.
:[. your family here?
(6)
B. No. My family is still in Guatemala. I call them once a week.
A. Isn't that expensive?
B. Yes, it
(7)
A. How much
(8)
B. A phone call to Guatemala costs about 25Q a minute. But we don't talk
for long. We just say hello:
A. How "hello" in Spanish?
(e)
Simple Present Tense t-\

B. We say "hola." Please excuse me now. I'm late for my class. Hasta luego
A What "hasta luego"
(10) (11)
B. lt means "see you later" in Spanish.
Exrxctsl 27 Read each statement. Then ask a u;h- question about the words
in parentheses ( ). Answer with a complete sentence.
Exluplrs' Mexico has thirty states. (the U.S.)
How many eLatea doea the U.9. have?
A.
B.
It haa 50 etatee.
Mexicans speak Spanish. (Americans)
What lanAuaqe do Americana e?eak?
o.
,. Americana epeak Enqliah.
1. The Mexican president lives in Mexico City. (the American President)

A
B.
2. Mexicans speak Spanish. (Canadians)

A.
B.
o
D. A college course costs a lot of money. (this course)
A.
B.
4. "D .C." means District of Columbia. ("L.A.")

A.
B.
5. You spell "I<nife" K-N-I-F-E. ("enough")

A.
R.
6. Ch ina has more than 1 billion people. (the U.S.) (answer: about 275
mi llion)
A.
B.
66 Lesson TWo
L
f-
7. Chinese people celebrate the New Year in February. (Americans)
A
B.
I don't know the word "large." ("large"/mean)
A.
B.
9. We say "book" in Elglish. ("book" in Spanish) (answer: "libro")
A.
B.
10. The teacher doesn't speak a foreign language in class. (why)

A.
11. Australia has cold weather in July. (when/the U.S.)

A.
B.
12. Medcans celebrate Labor Day in May. (Americans) (answer: Sep-
tember)
A.
B.
13. "FaIl" means autumn. ("autornobile")

A.
B.
14. Thb school year starts in September. (wheir/end)

A.
B.
2.14 Comparing Wh- Questions with Be and Other Verbs
Where are they from? How are you?

What language do they speak? How do you feel?
Where am I? Where are we?
What do I need? Where do we go now?
Who is she? What is a stamp?
Where does she live? What does "postage" mean?

ExrRcrsr 8 Read this conversation between two new students, Ricardo (R)
and Alexander (A). Fill in the bl,anks with the missing words.
R. Hi. My name '(e*ompl,e) Ricardo. What ?
(1)
A Alexander.
R. Nice to meet you, Alexander. Where

(2)
AI (3)
from Ulaaine.
R. Wh4t languages
(4)
A. I speak Ulaainian and Russian.
R. a new student?
(5)
A. Yes, I am. What about you? Where from?
(6)
R. I_- from Peru.
(7)
A. Where 2
(8)
R. It's in South America. We speak Spardsh in Peru. I want to learn English
and then go back to my country.
A. whv to go back to Peru?

(e)
R. Because my father h.as an export business there, and I want to work with
him.
A. What
(10)
.
R. "Export" means to sell your products in another country.
A. whv to lcrow English?

(1 1)
R. I netid to limow English because we have many American customers.

A. How many languages
(12)
R. My father speaks four languages: English, Ftench, German, and Spanish,
of course.
A. Tell me about your English class. your English
(13)
teacher?
R. Oh, yes. I like her very much.
A. Who your finglish teacher?
(14)
58 Lesson T\vo
R. Barbara Nowak.
A
(15)
R. N-O-W-A-K. It's a Polish narne.
A. How many students

(16)
R. It has about 35 students. The classroom is very big.
A. What floor
(17)
R. It'S on the second floor.
A. When your class

(18) (1e)
R. It begins at 6 o'clock. I'm late. See you later.

A. "see you later" in Spanish?
(20)
R. We say "hasta luego."
1. The simple present has two forms: the base form and the -s form:
I
You He
eat. eats.
We She
They It
(Plural noun) (Singular noun)
2. Simple present tense patterns with the -s form:

AFFIRMATI\TE: The President lives in Washington, D.C.
NEGATIVE: He doesn't live in New York.
YES/NO QUESTION: Does he live in the White House?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, he does.
wH- QUESTTON: Where does the Vice President live?
NEGATM QUESTION: Why doesn't the Vice President live in the
White House?
3. Simple present tense patterns with the base form:

AFFIRMAIME: We study English in class.
NEGATTVE: We don't study American history in class.
YES/NC QUESTTON: Do we study grammar?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, we do.
IVH- QUESTION: Why do we study grammar?
NEGATIVE QUESTION: Why don't we study history?

4. Present tense patterns with the verb be:
AFFIRMAIIVE: The teacher is absent.
NEGAIT\{E: She isn't here today.
YES/NO QUESTION: Is she sick?
SHORT ANSWER: No, she isn't.
WH- QUESTION: Where is she?
NEGATN'E QUESTION: Why isn't sl-re here?
5. We use the simple present tense with:
General truths and facts Washington, D.C., has over half a million
people.
Americars speak English.
Customs Japanese people take off their shoes when

they enter a house.
Americans don't visit friends without an
invitation.
Regular Activities He visits his parents every summer.
I play soccer once a week.
1. Don't forget to use the -s form when the subject is he, she, 'it, or a singular
noun.
a
He need^more money.
haa
This school he,+e a big library.
2. Use the base form after does and doesn't.

have
My father doesn't &e+a car.
-
Does your mother speak+ English rvell?
3. If you are living in the U.S., use the American form, not the British form,
with haue.
doesn't have
He hasn$ a car.
Do vou have
He#e#o" a cafl
4. Don't forget do/does in a question.

do
Where your parents live?
70 Lesson Two t,
l
Use conect word order in a question.
vou: i'r-cLher ltve
lVhere does lreyourbrrother?
dcee your father have
What kind of car hasyourfather?
don'L vou
Why you-dtirt't Iike pizza?
6. Don't use be with another verb to form the simple present tense.
I
Iht have 3 brothers.
Sheb lives in New York.

I don't
Ilffitot have a car.
7. Don't use be in a simple present tense question that uses another verb.
Doee
ls your college have a computer lab?
Do
ire you speak French?
Use correct spelling for the -s form.

aLudiee
She gudys in the library.
waf,ches
He watehs TV every evening.
Use the correct negative form.

doeen'L
He not know the answer.
don't
They no speak English.
, 10. Don't use an -ing form for simple present tense.

write
I Hritifrg a letter to my family once a week.
11. Fami,ly is a singular word. Use the -s form.

J6
My family live in Germany.
12. Use the same verb in a short answer as in a yes/no question.

am
fue you hungry? Yes, I do.
dc
Do you like baseball? Yes, I am.
Simple Present Tense 7t

13. Use the correct word order rvith questions about meaning, spelling. anc
cost.
doee "wonderful" mean
What mear*ronderfolt?
do bananaa coet
How much eostfufranas this week?
do you
How^ spell "opportunity"?
do you
How^ say '(opp0rtunity" in your language?
PART I Find the mistakes with the underlined words and correct them.
write C.
I dcn't
ExRuprs: I*++rot speak English well.
\\rhat does the teacher -g"t? C
1. My mother washes my clothes every Sunday.
2. I haven't a dictionary.
3. Where you live?
4. He no need help from you.
5. My sister talks a lot.
6. You aren't need a dictionary for the test.
-
7. My brother goes to a state university.
8. 4Ig yo, want to buy a new computer?
9. P9"r yo* apartment have a dishwasher? Yes, it is.
10. What kind of computers h_as this school?
11. How qdl, "computer"?
L2. What Coes the teacher want?
13. Why you don't want to practice English at home?
72 Lesson lko
:{ H,:,rl- many children do your sister have?
15. Holr- much costs a stan-rp?
16. The teacher doesn't speak my language.
17. I'Iy mother worries a lot about me.
18. Miami don't have cold winters.
19. I'm not like to use public transporfation.
20. How say "potato" in your I'anguage?
21. My friend going to Puerto Rico every winter.
22. 'My family has a big house.
23. How many states does the U.S. have?
24. What means "a{ective"?
PART 2 Write the -s form of the following verbs. Use correct spelling.
takee
ExRtqptr' lakc
l. go- 5. play
2. carry 6. study
3. mix 7. catch
4. drink B. say
PART 3 Fill in the first blank with the affirmative form of the verb in
parentheses ( ). Then write the negative form of this verb.
lives
ExRttplrs' A monkey in a v,,arm cliniate.
(liue)
It
doesn't live
in a cold climate.
t5
Rrazil a big countrli
(be)
IIaiti
tan't
a big country.
1. The English language the Roman alphabet.

(use)
The Chinese language the Roman alphabet.
Sirnple Present Tense 73

2. We English in class.
(weak)
We our native languages in class.
3. March 31 days.
(haue)
February 31 days.
4. Mexico and Canada in North America.

(be)
Colombia and Ecuador in North America.

5. You the "k'in "bartk."
(prorwunne)
You the "k" in "kffe."
6. The teacher the English language.
(tea,ch)
He/She American history.
A green light "9o."

(mean)
A yellow light "9o."
I from another country.

(come)
from the U.S.

9. English hard for me.
(be)
My language hard for me.
PART 4 Write a Aes/no question about the words in parentheses ( ).

Write a short answer.
ExRprpus: January has 3l days. (Febmary) (answer: no)

Doea February have 31 daye? No, it doeen'L,
China is in Asia. (Korea) (ansrver: yes)
le Korea in Asia? Yee, it ie.
1. The U.S. has 50 states. (Mexico) (answer: no)
2. The post office sells stamps. (the bank) (answer: no)
3. San Ftancisco is in California. (,os Angeles) (answer: yes)
7+ Lesson TWo
{. McDonald's sells hamburgers. (Burger King) (answer: yes)
5. January and March have 31 days. (April and June) (answer: no)
6. The President lives in the White House. (the \rice President) (answer: no)
7. Americans speak English. (Canadians) (answer: yes)
8. We come to class on time. (the teacher)
PART 5 Read each statement. Then write a wh- question about the
words in parentheses ( ). You don't need to answer the
question.
Exnuprrs, February has 28 days. (March)

How many daye doee March have?
Mexico is in North America. (Venezuela)
Where ie Venezuela?
1. Mexicans speak Spanish. (Canadians)
2. The U.S. has 50 states. (Mexico)
3. The President lives in the White House. (the Vice President)
.i. Thanksgiving is in November. (Christmas)
5. You spell "occasion" O-C-C-A-S-I-O-N. ("tomorrow")
Simple Present Tense 7s

6, . "Occupation" means job or profession. ("occasion")
7. The President doesn't make the laws. (why)
8. Marek comes from Poland. (you)
PART 6 Read this interview. Fill in the blanks with the missing word.
are you
A. How old
(euotnpl.e)
B. I'm 30 years old.
A. married?
(1)
B. No. I'm single.
with your parents?

(2)
B. No, I don't live with my parents.
A. Why with your parents?

(3)
B. I don't live with my parents because they Iive in another city.
A Where
@)
B. They live in Chicago.
A. you \4rashington?
(5) (6)
B. Yes; I like it very much.
A. Why Washington?
(7)
B. I like it because it has so many interesting museums and galleries. But I don't
have time to visit these places very often. I work every day. When my parents
visit, we go to galleries and museums.
A. When
(8)
B. They visit me in the spring. They love Washington.
A. whv Washington?
(e)
7'6 Lesson T\vo .

t
B. They love it because it's a beautiful, interesthg city. .a^nd they love it because
I'm here.
d \\hat kind of job
(10)
B. I have a job with the government. I work in the Department of Commerce.
A. What
(1 t)
B. Commerce means business.
A. How
(12)
B. C-O-M-M.E-R-C-E.
A. your job?
(1s)
B. Yes. I like my job very much.
A.
(14)
B. I live a few blocks from the White House.
A. have a car?
(15)
B. No, I don't. I don't need a car.
A. How to work?
(16)
B. I go to work by subway. If I'm late, I take a taxi.
A. How much
(17)
B. A taxi ride from my house to work costs about $12.
A. clean?
(18)
- The subway is very clean.
B. Oh, yes.
A. all night?
(1e)
B. No, the trains don't run all night. They run until midnight.
A. ln my country we don't say "subway." We use a different word.
B. How "subway" in your country?
(20)
A. We say "metro."
C LASS ROOM l. Check all the items below that tell about you. Find a partnel and compare
ACTIVITI ES your list to your paftner's list. Write three sentences telling about differences
between you and your partner. (You may rea<l .your list l.o the cla.ss.)

a- have a cell phone. I play a musical instrument.
-I
b. J. - I sing well.
I live in an apartment. k. -
c. -Iownahome. I'm a good driver.
d. - exercise regularly. L - ['m a member of a hea]th club.
e. -I m. I like pizza.
f. -I'mavegetarian.
I like classical music. n. -
g. - I live with my parents. o. -Iuseapager.

I write with my left hand.
h. - -
-Ihavee-mail.
EXRt'lplf: I have a cell phone. Sylvia doesn't have a cell phone.
2. Game: One student thinks of the narne of a famous person and writes this
person's initials on the chalkboard. Other students ask questions to try to
guess the name of this person.
Sample Questions:
Is he an athlete?
Where does he come from?
Is he ta]l?
How old is he?
Game: One student comes to the front of the room. He or she thinks of an
animat and writes the name of this animal on a piece of paper. The other
students try to guess which animal it is by asking questions. The person
who guesses the animal is the next to come to the front of the room.
Ex.Rttplr: lion
Does this animal fly? No, it doesn't.
Does it live in water? No, it doesn't.
What does it eat? It eats meat.
Does this animal live in Africa? Yes, it does.
What color is this animal?
:
DISCUSSTON In a small group, discuss differences behveen classes and teachers in this school
and another school you larow.
EXlmptfS, In my college back home, students stand up when they speak. This class has
some older people. In my native country only young people study at college.
WRITING Write about a tourist attraction in your country (or in another country you lctow
something abqut).
INTERVIEW Interview an American about his or her favorite tourist place in the U.S. Why
does he/she like this place? What does this place have? What do tourists do
there?
78 Lesson TVo
hras Acivtrier
L'sing the Internet, find inforrr-ration about one of the following places:
ito*,
u-/t
Disneyland, the \4rhite House, the Holocaust l\{useum, Ellis Island, the Epcot
Center, the Alamo, or any other American tourist attraction that interests
you. Then answer these questions:
What is it?
Where is it?
When is it open?
What does it cost to enter?
What does it have?
2. Using the Internet, find information about a museum or place of special

interest in this city. Then answer these questions:
What is it?
Where is it?
When is it open?
What does it cost to enter?
What does it have?

G RAMMAR
Singular and Plural
Articles and Quantity Words
Thsre*Be*Noun
C ONTEXT
Americans and Where They Live
Finding an Apartment
Calling about an Apartment
LESSON FOCUS
Nouns can be singular or pluralt.
I have one brother. I have three si,sters.
We can use articles and quanti,ty uot'ds before nouns.
I have an annt in New York. I have son'te cousins in Boston.
We can introduce a noun with. there * a form of. be.
T'h,ere's an apple in the refrigerator.
There ore some peaches on the table.
rSome noturs have no plural form. These are noncount nouns. See l,esson l0 for information about noncounl
81
(
I
Before You Read 1. Do you know anyone who lives alone? (
2. Does your family own a house or rent an apartment? (
Read the following information. Pay special attention to plural nouns. I
(
(
t
Americans and Where They Live2 I
1. There ale about 270 million people in the United States.
t
2. 56oto of adult Americans are married.
t
3. Four million children (670) under 18 live with grandparents. I
4. 680/o of children live with two parents. t
5. 820/o of single parents are women. I
6. 25 million Americans (about 1070) Iive alone.
7. The average family has 3.19 people. I
8. 650/o of American families own their homes. t
9. People pay 25o/o of their income on home expenses. Renters pay I
more than owners. (Owners pay 2lo/o of their income. Renters pay
260/o.)
I
I
Characteristics of Home Buyers, 1997
I
price
t
Median purchase
First-time buyers
$t59,700
t
Repeat buyers
$135,400
$178,700
t
Average monthty mortgage payment ''$ ,r{,{{{ t
As percent of income 32.8% t
Average age (in years) t
First-time buyers 32.1 t
Repeat buyers 4'1.1
t
t
t
T
Living Arrangements of Children Under 18,1997
I
,,ru cniiiiBfiu$'ffifi'S$b'WffiS, 'b1-56* t
Livinq with:
I
:r:f'
ra.t
parent t
One 19,799
rr;(qffiffi.q;1 t
".tlloinrii;onty";:'$ft$#
Father only 3,059 t
Lues-ffiffi t
Nonrelatives only 815 t
t
2 Statistics are from 1997 census estimates. t
t
B2 Lesson Three
I
lifetime' Renters
10. Ttre average American moves 10 times in I-Lis or her
move more than owners' Young people move more than
older
people.
other
11. The most expensive homes are in san Francisco and Boston'
cities with expensive homes are san Diego, New York city, and
Washington, D.C.
12. The average number of rooms in a house is 5'4'
13. 25o/o of homeowners are over 65 years old'
-€ Regular Noun Plurals

-i* €
VoweI bee +S bees
banana bananas
pie pies
Consonant bed +S beds

pin pins
rnonth months
ss, sh, ch, x class +es classes
dish dishes
cirurch churches
box boxes
\rowel * y boy +S boys

day days
monkey nronkeys
Consonant * Y Iady l*ies Iadies
story stories
party parties
+S patios
Vowel + o patio
stereo stereos
radio radios
Consonant t o mosquito +es mosquitoes

tomato tomatoes
potato potatoes
avocados
Ext'utrtoxs: Pho toq pianos, solos, altos, sopranos, autos,
forfe knife f*ves knives
leaf leaves
cali calves
Ex(:nt,il<lNS: beliefs, chicfs, roofs, chefs
{ Singular anrl Plural; Articles and Quantity Wrrrds; Tlt,ere

+ Be * Nourt 83
-)
I
t
Exsncrsr 1 Write the plural form of each noun.
(
(
leaves
Exeuprrs: leal _ I
t,oye t
a
dish 17. mosquito I
country 18. lion a
I
half 19. fly
t
book 20. cow I
boy 21. shark a
girl 22. roach
I
a
bench 23. fox t
box 24. horse a
table 25. turkey
1
a
stereo 26. chicken e
knife 27. wolf e
12. story 28. dog e
13. sofa 29. squirrel
e
a
14. key 30. pony a
15. movie 31. duck t
16. bath 32. moth a
a
a
-Y f',t
I
\iat t ,- Pronunciation of Plural Nouns a
I
I
lip-lips I cab-cabs can-cans bus-buses I
cat-cats I lid-lids thing-things cause--{auses {
rock-rocks I bag-bags bill-bills class-classes (
cuff----cuffsI stove-stoves car--rars dish-dishes I
month-months I sum-sums. bee-bees beach-beaches I
garage-garages I
place-places (
tax-taxes (
(
(
84 Lesson Three t
LnNcuncr Norrs
t. We pronounce /s/ after voiceless sounds: /p, t, k, f, O/
2. We pronowrce /z/ after voiced sounds: /b, C, B, v, ffi, tr, U, l, r/ and all
vowels.
3. We pronowce /az/ after s, s€, ss, sh, clt, ge, ce, tr.
Exrncrsr 2 Go back to Exercise 1 and pronounce the plural form of each

word.
3.3 Irregular Noun Plurals
man men One man is here. Vowel change

l\.oman women Tlvo men are there.
mouse mice One woman is late.
tooth teeth Five women are on time.
foot feet
goose geese
sheep sheep One sheep is here.

fish fish Three sheep are there.
deer deer
children One person is late. Different word form

people (on Five people are absent.
persons)
palamas Your clothes are dirby. No singular form
clothes My glasses are broken.
pants/slacks
(eye)glasses
t scissors
LnNcuncs Norrs
1. People is more common than pet"sons.
F)ve people in my class speak Spanish.
2. Number words (h,undred, thousand, mi.Uion) use the singular form.
The U.S. has over 270 milli,on people.
T\tro hundred people live in my building.
o
rf. Listen to your teacher's pronunciation of u)omon (singular) and
wonlsn (plural). The difference is in the first syllable.
{ Singular and Plural; Articles and Quantity Words; There * .Be * Noun 85
.Q
a
a
Exrncrsr 3 The following nouns have an irregular plural form. Write the e
plural. a
;11en
a
ExRt',tptg: mat-t
t
1. foot 5. fish e
a
2. woman 6. mouse
t
o
.). policeman 7. sheep t
4. child 8. tooth t
a
Exrnctsr 4 Use the plural of each noun to ask, "How many . . . do you
a
have?" Another student will answer. For a zero answer, say, "I !
don't have any <plural form>." t
a
ExRuptr' sister t
A. How nrany sisters do you have?
B. I have two sisters. oR I don't have any sisters.
e
e
1. child 7. telephone T
2. brother 8. watch
I
e
3. sister 9. television I
4. niece 10. radio I
5. nephew 11. cousin a
6. aunt 12. computer
t
C
a
t
un
4-!
.il
! Making Generalizations a
a
a
A house is expensive. We can make generalizations about the
J
Houses are expensive. subject of the sentence two ways: !
. By using the indefinite articles (a or I
A child needs love. an) with a singular noun.
. By using the plural form of the noun a
Children need love. a
with no arlicle.
A family hers responsibilities. We are saying that something is true of I
Families have responsibilities. all members of a group. a
I like Anrerican houses. After the verb, we usually use the plural
a
I tlon't Iike big buildings. form with no article to make a a
generalization. a
I
a
86 Lesson Three I
Exrncrss 5 Change the subject from plural to singular. Make other
necessary changes. (Both singular and plural give a
generalization.)
Exlt',tplg' Students have to learn grammar.

A atudent hae to learn qrammar.
L Adults have a lot of responsibilities.
2. Children like to play.
3. Single parents have a hard job.
4. $romen live longer than men.
5. Cars are expensive.
6. Houses cost a lot of money.
Exrncrsr 6 Change the subject from singular to plural. Make other

necessary changes. (Both singular and plural give a
generalization.)
EXRmf'lf : , A student has many responsibilities.

Studente have man.y reo?onoibilities,
1. A child needs love.
2. An egg has protein.
3. A banana is yellow.
J Singular and Plural; Articles ancl Quantitv \\Iords; Th,ere i- Be + Noun 87

-)
a
4. A dog is intelligent.
5. A dolphin doesn't live on land.
o. A mouse is sma1l. dolphin
Exrncrsr 7 Use the plural form of the word in parentheses ( ) to make a

generalization. Remember, don't use an article with the plural
form to make a generalization. (You may work with a partner.)
Exlrqprrs, (child)
Children like Lo watch cartoona.
American (highway)
American highwaye are in qood condition,
1. (American)
2. American (child)
3. big (city) in the U.S.
4. (teacher) at this college
5. (student) at this college
6. American (doctor)
7. old (person) in the U.S.
8. American (woman)
88 Lesson Three
Ere.ross 8 Use the noun in parentheses ( ) to give general information
about your native country. Use the plural form with no article.
Euuptrt (woman)
Generally, women don't work outside the home in my native country.
1. (person) 5. (house)
2. old (person) 6. poor (person)
3. (woman) 7. (car)
4. (man) 8. (doctor)
Exr,ncrss 9 Add a plural subject to these sentences to make a

generalization.
ExRrqprr, Small children

need a iot of sleep.
l. make a lot of money.

2. have a hard life.
3. talk on the phone a lot.
4. are in good physical condition.
5. belie're in Santa Claus.
6. worry about children.
Exr,nctse IO Use the plural form of each noun to tell if you like or don't like
the following:
ExRupttt apple
I like apples. oR I don't like apples.
:
1. tomato 6. peach
2. orange 7. radish
3. strawberry 8. pear
4. grape 9. potato
5. banana 10. cherry
{ Singular and Plural; Articles and Quantity Words; There + Be + Noun 89

-2
e
a
ExsncrsE I 1 Ask "Do you like" * the plural form of the noun. Another a
student will answer. a
a
ExRmptrs' child
t
A. Do you like children?
B. Yes, I do, a
dog
a
A. Do you like dogs? ;
B. No, I don't. ;
a
l. cat 7. comic book a
2. dog 8. computer I
3. American doctor 9. computer game T
-
4. Anierican car 10. strict teacher
a
5. American movie 11. American supermarket ;
6. fashion magazine 12. American textbook a
a
Before You Read 1. Do you live in a house, an apartment, or a dorm?3 Do you live alone?
a
2. Do you like the place where you live? Why or why not? (,
I
I
l
J
I
;
I
t
tli,'"l ;i:.Io i to' aPPoint{enl1 t
'w kitChen and a
5 rooms,l bath' :.?:.;:-;.,ash- I
T
Read the following article. Pay special attention to th,ere * be followed t
by singular and plural nouns. !
t
t
a
a
t
[)rtrtrt is s]rot1 li,r drtrtrtilttrtl.:r lrrrilrlirrg rrlrcrr, slrtrlt'tt1.s Iivt'. t
a
(
?c Lcssott 'l'!tret:
Finding an Apartment
There are several ways to find an apartment. Onelvay is to look in the
newspaper. There is an "Apartments for Rent" section in the back of the
nervspaper. There are many ads for apartments. There are also ads for
houses for rent and houses for sale.
Another way to find an apartment is by looking at the buildings in the
neighborhood where you want to live. There are often "For Rent" signs on
the front of the buildings. There is usually a phone number on the sign. You
can call and ask for information about the apartment that you are interested
in. You can ask:
How much is the rent?

Is heat included?
What floor is the apartment on?
Is there an elevator?
How many bedrooms are there in the apartment?
How many closets are there in the apartment?
Is the apartment availablea now?
If an apartment interests you, you can make an appointment to see it.

When you go to see the apartment, you should ask some more questions,
such as the following:
Is there a lease?s How long is the lease?

Is there a janitor or manager?
Is there a parking space for each tenant? Is it free, or do I have to pay
extra?
Are there smoke detectors? (ln many places, the law says that the
landlord must put a smoke detector in each apartment and in the
halls.)
Is there a laundry room in the building? Where is it?
The landlord may ask you a few questions, such as:
Did you know...? How many people are there in your family?
Do you have any pets?
The most expen-
sive apartments You should check over the apartment carefully before you sign the lease.
in the U.S. are in If there &re some problems, you should talk to the landlord to see if he will
San Francisco. take care of them before you move in.
l Arailabla nrcans ready to usc no$,.

'A /r,o.sc is a contract lletweetr lhe ou'irer (larrdlord or lmdlady) an<l lhc r(.nlrr (l('n:rnt). It tclls ltow tnuch
tlr('rcnt is, horv long the l('nirnl ('an slay in llr,,al)allnlcnt, and otht'r nrlcs.
I Singular and Plural; Articles and Quantity Words; Tlrcre + f)c + Noun 91
3
t
J
Using There * Be e
a
a
a
e
There is janitor t
There is
a
one dryer
in my building.
in the basement.
t
There isn't a back door in my apartment.
e
There is no back door . in my apartment. a
I
a
e
t
J
There are numbers on the doors of the apartments. e
There are several windows in the bedroom. e
There are many Americans in my building. e
There are some children in my building. a
There
There
are
aren't
two
any
closets in the hall.
on the windows.
t
shades C
There are no shades on the windows. a
a
Lnrucunce Norrs
a
t
l. * is to introduce a singular subject into a conversation.
We use th,ere a
We use there * are to introduce a plural subject.o a
We can nrake a contraction for there i,s -+ there's. We don't write a
2.
contraction for there are.
a
3. A sentence that begins wit}:. ther'e often shows a place or a time. a
.There's a good movie at the Garden Theater. a
4.
There's a good movie at 8 o'clock.
If two nouns follow there, use a singular verb (is) if the first noun
I
is singular. Use a plural verb (are) if the first noun is plural.
C
There's o closet in the bedroom and two closets in the hall. t
There are tuto closets in the hall and one closet in the bedroom. a
There tis a washer and a dryer in the basement. a
a
a
a
" In rxnvt.rsation, you will sometinres hear /Irrr:is *'ith plural nouns. a
INnrnuet.: There's a lot of empty aparl.ments in nry building.
Folotlt,: There arc a lot of enrpty aparl,rnents in my building. I
a
a
92 Lesson Three
:
There never introduces a specific noun. Don't use a noun with a
definite article (the) after thsre.
WRoNc: There's the Eiffel Tower in Paris.
Rtcsr The Eiffel Tower is in Faris.
Exrncrsr 12 Use the words given to make a statement about the place where
you live (house or apartment). If you live in a dorm, use
Exercise 13 instead.
Exnupus: carpet/in the living room

There's a carpet in the living room.
OR
There isn't a carpet in the living room.
trees/in front of the building
There are two trees in front of the building.
OR
There are no trees in front of the building.
1. closet/in the tiving room

2. blinds/on the windows
3. door/in every room
4. windodin every room blinds
5. lease
6 porch
7. number/on the door of the apartment
8. overhead light/in every room
9. microwave oven/in the kitchen
10. back door ffiI
bl#
11. fireplace
12. smoke detector
HgH
fireplace
ExrRcrsr 13 nnate a statement about your dorm and dorm room with the
words given. (If you live in an apartment or house, skip this
exercise.)
ExRptptrs' windodin the room

There's a window in the room.
curtains/on the window
There are no cur[ains on the window.
There are shades.
mshada
J Singular and Plural; futicles and Quantity Words; There * Be * Noun 93

:)
1. closet/in the room 6. snack machines/in the dorrn
2. two beds/in the room 7. noisy students/in the dorm
3. private bath/for every room 8. numbers/on the doors of the rooms
4. men and women/in the dorm 9. elevator(s)/in the dorm
5. cafeteria/in the dorm 10. laundry room/in the dorm
3.6 Questions with There
Is there a laundry room in your building? No, there isn't.

Are there any cabinets in the kitchen? Yes, there are.
Are there any empty apartments in your building? Yes, there are.
How many closets are there in your apartment? There are three.
How many apartments are there in your building? There are ten.
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. We usually use any to introduce a plural noun in a yes/no question.
Are there any empty apartments in your building?
2. Do not make a contraction for a short g/es answer.
Is there an elevator in your building?
Yes, there is. NOT: Yes, there's.
Exrncrsr l4 Ask and answer questions with there and the words given to
find out about another student's apartment and building. (lf you
a
live in a dorm, use Exercise 15 instead.)
a
ExRt{pLes: a microwave oven/in your apartment a
A. Is there a microwave oven in your apartment? a
B. No, there isn't.
a
closets/in the bedroom a
A. Are there any closets in the bedroom? a
B. Yes. There's one closet in the bedroom.
a
1. children/in your building J
2. a dishwasher/in the kitchen J
J
a
94 Lesson Three !
?
3. a yard/in front of your building
4. trees/in front of your building
5. a basement/in the building
6. a laundry room/in the basement
7. a janitor/in the building
8. noisy neighbors/in the building
9. nosyT neighbors/in the building
10. an elevator/in the building
11. parking spaces/for the tenants
12. a lot of closets/in the apartment
13. how many apartments/in your building
14. how many parking spaces/in front of your building
Exrncrsr 15 Ask and answer questions with there and the words given to
find out about another student's dorm. (If you live in an
apartment or house, skip this exercise.)
ExRtrpr.r: a bicycle room/in your dorm
A. Is there a bicycle room in your dorm?
B. No, there isn't.
1. married students 7. graduate students

2. private rooms 8. a quiet place to study
3. a bicycle room 9. an air conditioner/in your room
4. a computer room 10. a parking lot/for your dorm
5. an elevator 11. how many rooms/in your dorm
6. a bulletin board 12. how many floors/in your dorm
Exsncrsr 16 Use the words given to ask the teacher a question about his or
her office. Your teacher will answer.
ExRt,tplgs: pencil sharpener
A. Is there a pencil sharpener in your office?
B. No, there isn't.
i A rio.sy Jrcrcon is a pcmon who u'ants to know cveryone's business.
Singular and Plural; futicles and Quantity Words; There * Be * Noun 95

I
(
books
A. Are there any books in your office?
(
B. Yes. There are a lot of books in my office. (
1. phone 6. windows
I
t:
I lr----l (
2. ansrvering machine 7. calendar
llE_] I
I
3. photos of your
4. radio
family 8. bookshelves
9. plants
@
file cabine
a
I
5. copy machine 10. file cabinet
a
17 l,
I
Exrnctsr student is calling about an apartment for rent. Fill in the I
blanks with there is, there are, 'is there, are there, and other
related words to complete this phone conversation between the
t
a
student (S) and the landlady (L).
t
S. I'm calling about an apartment for rent on Grover Street. I
There'g
L. We have two apartments available. a four-room a
(etantple)
apartment on the first floor and a three-room apartment on the fourth
a
floor. Which one are you interested,in? a
C
S. I prefer the smaller apartment.
(1)
an elevator in the
C
building? C
L. Yes, there is. How many people in your family? a
(2)
S. It's just for me. I live alone. I'm a student. I need a quiet apartment. I
Is this a quiet building? I
L. Oh, yes. kids in the building.
(
(3) (
S. I have a car. parking spaces?
I
(4)
L. Yes. 20 spaces in back of the building.
(
(5) (
S. HoW apartilents in the building? I
(6) (7)
L. 30 apartments.
(
(8)
I
S. TWenty parking spaces for 30 apartments? Then (
(e)
enough spaces for all the tenants. (
L. Don't worry. Not everyone has a car. Parking is on a first-come, first- (

(
sen'ed basis.s And plenty ofe spaces on the street.
(10) (
(
8 Afirst-cone.Jit'sl-serted basis nrta.ns that people rvho arrive fir"t v[ill get -.;omething hrst (parking spaces.
theater tickets, classes at registration). (
e
Plentg o/means a lot of.
I
96 Lesson Three
S. a laundry room in the building?
(1 1)
L. Yes. There are washers and dryers in the basement.

S. How much is the rent?
L. It's $650 a month.
S. When can I see the apartment?
L. How about tomorrow at six o'clock?

S. That'll be fine. Thanks.
3"7 There Ys. ThW and 0ther Pronouns
There's an empty apartment on the first floor. It's available now.

There's a janitor in the building. ' He's in the basement now.
There are a lot of parking spaces. They're for the tenants.
There are two wa-"hing machines. They're in the basement.
Lnrucuncr Norrs
1. We use there * be to introduce a new noun. When we refer to the
same noun again, we use it, they, or other pronouns.
2. We pronowtce tha'e and they're exactly the same. Listen to your
teacher pronounce the sentences from the box above.
ExrRcrsr l8 f in in the blanks with there's, there o,re, ,it's or they're.

There's
Exrprpr.r: a small apartment for rent in my building.
lt's on the fourth floor.
1. two apartments for rent. not on the same

floor.
2. a laundry room in the building. in the base-

ment.
3. The parking spaces are in the back of the building. fcr

the tenants with cars.
Singular and Plural; futicles and Quantity Words; There * Be * NourL 97

-
4. The parking spaces don't cost extra. free for the tenants.
!
I
5. The apartment is small. on the fourth floor. T
I
6. The building has 30 apartments. a big building. I
r
7. The student wants to see the apartment. on Grover Street.
r
8. The building is quiet because no kids in the building. rrl
9. How much is the rent? $650 a month.
-
;
10. Is the rent high? No, not high.
a
I
I 9 Ast a question about this school using there and the words -
ExrRctsr
given. Another student will answer. If the answer is "yes," ask a a
question with where. J
J
Exltqptrs' a cafeteria a
A. Is there a cafeteria at this school?
J
B. Yes, there is.
A. Where is it? a
B. It's on the first floor. a,
J
lockers J
A. Are there any lockers at this school?
B. Yes, there are. a
A. \\rhere are they? a
B. They're near the gym. a
a
1. a library 8. tennis courts a
2. r,ending machines 9. dormitories a
3. public telephones 10. a parking lot
a
;
4. a computer room 11. a bookstore a
5. a cafeteria 12. copy machines I
6. a gym 13. a student lounge
a
;
7. a swirnn'ring pool 14. a fax machine t
a
Before You Read Does your neighborhood have more apartment buildings or houses?
a
1.
) Do you prefer to live alone, with a roommate, or with your family? a
whv'? a
a
1
98 Lesson Three
f
t)
Read the following phone conversation between a student (S) and the
manager (N{) of a building. Pay special attention to the definite article
(the) , the indefinite articles (a, an) , and indefinite quantity words (sonze,
any)?
Calling about an Apartment

S. Hello? I want to speak with the landlord.
M. I'm the manager of the building. Can I help you?
S. I need to find a new apaftment.
M. Where do you live now?
S. I live in a big apartment on Wright Street. I have a roomnlate, but
he's graduating, and I need a srnaller aparlment. Are there any small
apar[ments for rent in your building?
M. There's one.
S. What floor is it on?
M. It's on the third floor.
S. Does it have a bedroom?
lvr. :: rt'o a studio apartment. It has a living roolll and a kitchen.
S. Is the living rourr. -^!i
M. So-so.
S. Does the kitchen have a stove and a refrigerator?
M. Yes. The refrigerator is old, but it -works well. The stove is pretty
new.
S. When can I see the apartment?
,r. '..'''',
^r.u J.-.ruv. -.iil errvvv ru iv ic- l-- -^ryrtrtr/ at 9 a.m.
3.8 futicles and Quantity Words
I live in a big building. The building is near the We introduce a singular noun u'ith the
college. indefinite articles (a or on). When we refer
There's a janitor in the The janitor lives on the to this noun again, we use the clefinite
building. first floor. article llie.
May I speak to the We use //ic before a singular noun if this

landlord? noun is the only olle or if the speaker and
He lives on the Iistener share an experience and are
floor. referring to lhe sanle one. (In this case,
l,hey are talking about the same building.)
The basenrent is tlirtv
(cotrl itructl)
Singular and Plural; Articles antl Quanl,ilv \\'orclsl Tltere * Bs * Noun 99

a
a
I
a
My building has The washing machines Sre introduce a plural noun with some,
a
(some) washing are in the basement. anA, or no afticle. When we refer to this a
machines. noun again, we use the definite art\cle the. a
Are tl'rere (any) Where are the dryers? a
dryers?
a
The tenants are allgry. We use llte before a plural noun if the a
The washing machines speaker and the listener share the same
don't u,ork. experience. (In this case, they are talking e
about the same building.) a
a
a
ExrRctsr 20 fnese are conversations between two students. Fill in the a
blanks with the, a, an, sonl,e) or anA. a
Conversation 1
a
a
a
A. Is there(e-tanple) copy machine in our library? a
B. Yes. There are several copy machines in library.
e
(1) a
A. Are copy machines free? a
(2)
e
B. No. You need to use nickelto for
(4)
copy ma- J
chines. a
Conversation 2
I
a
A. Is there (1)
cafeteria at this school? a
B. Yes, there is.
a
a
A. Where's cafeteria? a
a
B. It's on first floor.
a
A. Are there snack machines in cafeteria? a
(4) (5)
{
B. Yes, there are. a
A. I want to buy soft drink. t
(0) a
B.
(7)
soft-drink machine is out of order today. t
I
t" \ ttit'Acl is rr fir'r'-r'r.rrl coirt
(
I
(
l0O Lesson Three I
Conversation 3
A. Is there (1)
bookstore for this college?
B. Yes, there is.
A. Where is bookstore?
(2)
B. It's on Green Street.
A. I need to buy dictionary.
(3)
B. Today is
(+)
holiday.
(5)
bookstore is closed today.
1. Singular and PIuraI

boy-boys
box-boxes
story-stories
(Exceptions: men, women, people, children, feet, teeth)
Tlrcre * be
There's an empty apartment in my building.
There are two washing machines in the basement.
Are there any parking spaces?
:1. Ar[icles
To make a generalization:
Singular A dog has good hearing.
Plural Dogs have good hearing.
I like dogs.
To introduce a new noun into the conversation:

Singular Ihaveadog.
Plural I have (some) turtles.
I don't have (any) birds.
To talk about a previously mentioned noun:

Singular I have a dog. The dog barks when the letter ca.rrier arrives.
Plural I have some turtles. I keep the turtles in the bathroom.
To talk about specific items or people from our experience:
Singular The janitor cleans the basement once a week.
Plural The tenants have to take out their own garbage.
To talk about the only one:
The President lives in Washington, D.C.
The Statue of Liberty is in New York.
Singular and Plural; futicles and Quantity Worrls; There * Be + Noun I 0l

f
!
i
!
t. People is a plural noun. Use a plttral verb form. t
are !
People in my country is very poor. !
2. Don't use f/ze with a generalizatiou.
I
l
D
The-dogs are friendly animals. !
J
D. Don't confuse tlrcre wilh tltey're.
t
I
Thev're
have two brothels. Thd+e- in Florida. !
I
4. Don't forget to use thet'e f- is/at'e to introduce a new subject.
Lhere are
I
In my class five students from Haiti. !
!
r,r.
Don't confuse zll's and there's. J
There'a !
I$]s a closet in my bedroom. !
Don't confuse haue and tlwe. I
6.
There's t
He+e a closet in my bedroom. !
7. Don't use the * a unique noun after tltere. t
Tie J
There's the Golden Gate Bridge in California. T
t
8. Don't use flze with the first mention of a noun when you and the listener
do not share a common experience u,itl'r this noun.
t
t
I
a
have the new watch. t
t
9. Don't use an apostrophe for a plural ending.
t
brothera
She has three brethe*s.
a
t
I
t
a
a
a
a
I
a
(
lO2 Lesson Three I
I
PAI.T 1 A woman is showing her new apartment to her friend. Find the
mistakes with the underlined words in this conversation and
correct them. If the sentence is correct, write C.
A" Let me show you around my new aparLment.
B. It's a big apartment. C
There
A. It's big enough for my family. ryre are four bedrooms and two bathrooms.
Has each bedroom a large closet. Let me show you my kitchen too.
(1)
B. Oh. It's a new dishwasher in your kitchen.
(r)
A. It's wonderful. You lcrow how I hate to wash dishes.
(3)
B. Is there a microwa'.re oven?
(+)
A. No, there isn't, unfortunately.
(5)
B. Are any washers and dryers for clothes?
(6)
A. Oh, yes. They're in the basement. In the laundry room are five washers and
(7) (8)
five dryers. I never have to wait.
B. There are a lot of people in your building?
(e)
A. In my building thirty apartments.
(10)
B. Is a janitor in your building?
(11)
A. Yes. There's a very good janitor. He keeps the building very clean.
o2)
B. I suppose this apartment costs a lot.
A. WeIl, yes. The rent is high. But I share the apartment with my cousins.
(13)
PART 2 Write the plural form for each noun.

lrrx boxeg
month child
card match desk
foot shelf key

potato radio story
\\'oman mouse bus
Singular and Plural; Articles and Quantity Words; Tlme * 8e * Noun 103
J
a
PART 3 Fill in the blanks with there, is, are, i,t, or they 0ra a
combination of more than one of these words.
J
A. itre t.here - any museums in Chicago? f
B.
(eramp\e)
a lot of museums in Chicago.
t
Yes,
(1) a
a history museum in Chicago? I
(2)
a
B. Yes,
(3) I
A. Where the history museum? J
(4)
a
B.
(5)
near downtown.
t
A. any muflunies in this museum? I
(6)
I
B. Yes, there are.
(7)
from Egypt. a
A. a dinosaur in this museum? I
(8) I
B. Yes, there is. on the first floor. a
A. Hov,- many floors in this museum? I
(10) a
B.
(1 1)
two floors and a basement. J
A. a parking lot near this museum? -
(12) I
B.
(13)
, but
(14)
not very big. a
l
PART 4 Fill in the blanks with the, a, a,n, some, afrU, orX for n0 article. I
Do you like your apartment?
I
A.
I
B. No, I don't. r
Why not? T
A.
There are many reasons. Firct, I don't like janitor. He's impolite. r
B.
(esample) t
A. Anything else?
r
B. I want to get dog. !
A. So?
(1)
!
a
B. It's not permitted. landlord says that
(3)
dogs make t
a lot of noise. a
a
Can you get
(4)
cat?
a
a
a
104 Lesson Three 3
e
B. Yes, but I don't like
(5)
cats.
A Is your building quiet?
B. No. There are children in building. When I try to

(6) (7)
study, I can hear children in the next apartment. They watch
(8)
TV atl the time.
A You need to find new apartment.

(e)
B. I think you're right.
C LAS S RO OM 1. Make a list of things you have, things you don't have but would like to have,
ACTIVITIES and things you don't need. Choose from the list below and add any other
items you can think of. Then flnd a partner and compare lists.
a computer a house a credit card

a VCR a diamond ring a speakerphone
a digital camera a scale a cell phone
an encyclopedia an electric can opener an orange juice squeezer
a paSer a microwave oven a letter opener
an electric toothbrush a waterbed a blow dryer
a CD player
Discuss your chart with a partner. Tell why you need or don't need some
things. Tell why you want some things that you don't have.
People often use the newspaper to look for an apartment. The Sunday
newspaper has the most ads. Bring in a copy of the Sunday newspaper.
Look at the section of the newspaper that has apartments for rent. Ask the
teacher to help you understand the abbreviations.
What other sections are there in the Sunday newspaper? Work with a partner
and make a list of everything you can find in the Sunday paper.
Singular and Plural; futicles and Quantity Words; There * .Brz * Noun 105
T
t
ExRupLr' There's a TV schedule for this week's prograrns.
There are a lot of ads and coupons.
t
There's a cross\\,ord puzzle. J
4.
t
Look at the information about ts,o apartments for rent below. What are some
of the advantages and disadvantages of each one? Discuss your answers with
f
a partner or with the entire class. t
T
t
a view of a park on a busy street t
rent : $750 rent : $650 J
fifth floor (an elevator in the third floor walk-up e
building) a
a new kitchen with a dishwasher old appliances in the kitchen J
pets not allowed pets allowed
I
hardwood floors
the janitor lives in the building
a ca4let in the living room
the owrrer lives in the build:ng on
J
the first floor e
management controls the heat the tenant controls the heat a
no air conditioners air conditioners in the bedroom and J
living room r
faces north only faces east, south, and west J
a one-year Iease no Iease
e
a large building-50 apartments
washers and dryers on each floor
a small building-6 apartments
a laundry room in the ba.sement
a
pa.rking spaces on first-come, first- a parking space for each tenant
J
served basis J
J
J
5. Do you have a picture of your house, apartment, or apartment building? l
Bring it to class and tell about it.
J
6. Find a partner and pretend that one of you is looking for an apartment and J
the other person is the landlady, landlord, or manager. Ask and answer J
questions about the apartment, the building, parking, laundry, and rent.
Write your conversation. Then read it to the class.
J
a
7. One student thinks of the narne of a place (a zoo, a museurn, downtown, t
the school cafeteria, a parking lot, a park, the public library, etc.) He or
she writes the name of this place on a piece of paper. Other students try
a
to guess this place by asking questions. You get ten guesses. J
J
Sample Questions: a
fue there a lot of people in this place?
a
fue there any pictures in this place? a
Is it indoors or outdoors? T
a
a
l06 Lesson Three I
t
8. A student thinks of a word or phrase and writes blanks for each letter on
the chalkboard. The other students try to ggess the word by asking: "Is
there a(n) in this word?" If someone guesses a correct letter, the
student at the chalkboard fiIls in the blank. The object of the game is to
- or phrase.
guess the word
DISCUSSIONS In a small group or with the entire class, discuss the following:
1. How do people rent apartments in your hometown? Is rent higli? Is heat

usually included in the rent? Does the landlord usually live in the building?
2. What are scme differences between a typical apartrnent in this city and a
typical apartment in your hometown?
WRITING 1. Write a description of a room or place that you like very much. (Review
prepositions in Lesson One.)
Exlt,tptg: My favorite place is my lir,ing room. There are many pictures on

the walls. There's a picture of my grandparents behind the sofa. There
are a lot of pictures of my children on the wall next to the sofa.
There's a TV in the corner. Under the TV there is a VCR. There's
a box of videocassettes next to the VCR. . . .
2. Write a comparison of your apartment in this city and your apartment or

house in your hometown.
Ex,rt',tplr: There are many differences between my apartn'rent here and my apart-
ment in Kiev, Ukraine. In my Kiev apartment, there is a door on every
room. In my apaftment here, only the bedrooms have doors. In my
Kiev apartment, there is a small window inside each large window. In
the winter, I can open this small rvindow to get some fresh air. My
apartment here doesn't have this snlall window. I have to open the
whole window to get air. Sometimes the room becomes too cold.
Internet Activity
: Use the Internet to look for apartments for rent and houses for sale in this city
(or nearby suburbs). What parts of this city or the suburbs have the highest
rents and housing prices?
Singular and Plural; Articles and Quantity Words; Tlrcre + Be * Noun lO7
G RAMMAR
Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense
Prepositions of Time
C ONTEXT
Three Special Days
LESSON FOCUS
FYequency words, such as ahoays, usually, neuet', tell
how often we repeat an activity.
I usually drink coffee vzith breakfast.
I neuer drinl< coffee at night.
Prepositions of time, such as in, on, at, tell when an

activity takes place.
I work orc Saturday.
My birthday is in June.
109
T
I
Before You Read 1. What is your favorite holiday? When is it? I
2.
o
Do you celebrate Mother's Day? When?
Do you send cards for special occasions?
t
t-).
a
a
I
I
t
t
a
Read the following article. Pay special attention to the frequency words. a
t
a
Three Special Days

Valentine's Day is a day of love. It is always on Februar,' 14. 0n this
day, men often give flowers or candy to their wives or girlfriends. Candy
manuiacturers make candy or candy boxes in the shape of a heart. Sweet-
hearts ofben give each other gifts. People sometimes send cards, called
valentines, to close friends and relatives. A valentine usually has a red heart
and a message of love. It often has a picture of Cupid, a symbol of romantic
Iove. Young children usually have a party at school and exchange cards.
Another special day is Saint Patrick's Day. It is always on March 17. It
is really an Irish holiday, but many Americans like St. Patrick's Day even if
they are not Irish. We sometimes say that on St. Patrick's Day everybody is
Irish. In New York City, there is always a parade on St. Patrick's Day. People
ofrten wear green clothes on this day. One symbol of St. Patrick's Day is the
shamrock.
Businesses are never closed for Valentine's Day or St. Patrick's Da1'.
Did you know...? People never take a day offfrom work for these days. Schools and government
officesare always open (except if these days fall on a Sunday).
Valentine's Day Another special day is Mother's Day. It is always in May, but it isn't
began in ancient always on the same date. It is always on the second Sunday in May. People
Rome to honor usually buy presents for their mothers and grandmothers or send special
]uno, the Roman cards. Families often have dinner in a restaurant.
goddess of People enjoy these holidays. Greeting card companies also enjoy these
women and holidays. They alwai,,s sell a lot of cards and make a lot of mgney at these
marriage. times.
a
a
I
a
a
I lo t
/
+.7 Ftequency Words with thd Simple Present Tense
_trEE 10070 Mother's Day is always in May.

L-sEtr-r I usually take my mother out to dinner.
Cterr People often wear green on St. Patrick's Day.
Sonedmes I sometimes watch the parade.
P.arel1-Seldom
\e\-er
I We rarely give flowers to children.
Businesses are never closed for Valentine's Day.
U/o
Exrncrsr I Choose the correct word to fill in the blanks.

often
Ex.quprr, Husbands $ve flowers or candy to their wives on Valen-
(neuer, seldnm, oJten)
tine's Day.
1. Valentine's Day is on February 14.

(alway s, sometimcs, n euer)
2. People
(rarcly, oftzn,
send valentine cards to their sweethearis.
neuer)
3. A valentine card has a red heart and a message of

(rwusti mrely, usuolly)
love. --
4. Young children have a Valentine's Day party at
(usually, always, nmer)
school.
- 5. Saint Patrick's Day i9 on March 17.

(dutay s, sometimes, neuer)
6. A St. Patrick's Day card(alway s, usuallg, neuer) has a red heart.

z. In New york ciw, ther. i, parade on Saint
a^*r,r"**,n*nla
Patrick's Day.
8' card companie" a lot of business before holidays'

c'*"n, **or', u*d-,o
9' Businesses a^re for St' Patrick's Day and
T*oar,
*,,*uy, n*n)closed
Valentine's Day.
Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tensel Prepositions of Time t I I

a
in May.
e
10. Mother's Day is
( aLu ag s, usu ally, neuer) J
11. Mother's Day is on a Saturday in the U.S. e
( alw ay s, neu er, s o metime s)
e
e
4"2. Position of Frequency Words C
t
e
- a card for my mother. e
the day off for St. Patrick's Day.
J
J
e
a
closed for St. Patrick's Day. t
a
t
J
J
LnNcuncr Norrs e
L. Frequency words come after the verb be but before other main verbs.
J
The following words can also come at the beginning of a sentence: C
2.
usually, often, someti,mes. t
Stores are usuall,y open on Mother's Day. J
Usually stores are open on IViother's Day.
J
A valentine often has a red heart.
OJten a valentine has a red heart. t
J
a
Exrncrsr 2 Add a frequency word to each sentence to make a true a
statement about yourself. a
Ex.RuPLg: I eat fish. a
I usually eat fish on FYidays. J
a
i. I cook the meals in my house. a
2. I stay home on Sundays.
a
a
3. I buy the Sunday newspaper. a
4. I read the newspaper in English. a
a
5. I use public transportation. a
6. I'm tired in class. I
a
a
I l2 Lesson Four 3
t
t. I use my dictionary to check my spelling.
& I buy greeting cards.
Earcrss 3 Add a verb (phrase) to make a true statement about people

from your country or cultural group.
Ex.lt*.tplrr people/often
Ruaeian people often 0o to the foreet on the weekende to pick
muahrooma,
1. people/often
2. people/seldom
3. women/usually
4. women/rarely
men/usually
6. men/rarely
Exgncrsr 4 Add a verb phrase to make a frue statement about yourself.
Ex,nuplr,: ' I/never

I never qo to bed afLer 11 o'clock.
OR
l'm never in a 7ood mood in the morninq,
l. I/never
2. I/always/in the morning
Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time I l3

J
3. I/usually/on Sunday
I
!
I
4. I/often/on the weekend J
I
5. I/seldom
t
I
I
6. I/sometimes/inclass !
t
t
Exrnctss 5 Use the words given below to write a sentence about your
I
impressions of Americans. Discuss your answers in a small
!
group or with the entire class.
I
J
1. Americans/rarely I
a
2. Americans/often
a
I
a
a
4.3 Yes/No Questions with Euer I
J
a
Do you ever celebrate Mother's Day? Yes, I always do. !
Does your father ever cook the meals? No, he never does. J
t
a
Is Mother's Day ever on a Sunday? Yes, it always is. a
Are you : ever bored in class? No, I never am. a
J
T
LnNcuncr Norss t
1. We use eaer in a yes/no question when we want an answer that has
t
a frequency word.
t
2. In a short answer, the frequency word comes between the subject a
and the verb. !
3. The verb after neaqr is affirmative. We do not put two negatives a
together.
Is Mother's Day ever on a Saturday?
t
No, it never is. I
a
I l4
I
Lesson Four ,
I
4- We can give a shor[ Aes or ?eo answer with just the frequency word.
Do you euer buy your mother a present for Mother's Day?
Yes, ahaays.
Is St. Patrick's Day eua'on a Sunday?
Yes, son1,eti,mes.
Exrncrsr 5 Add euer to ask these questions. Another student will answer.
Exnmpres, Do you eat in a restaurant?
A Do you ever eat in a restaurant?
B. Yes, I often do. oR Yes, often.
Are you bored in class?

A. Are you ever bored in class?
B No, I never arn. oR No, never.
l. Do you use public transportation? 7. Are you late to class?
2. Do you drink coffee at night? 8. Do you ask for directions
on the street?
3. Do you drink tea in the morning?
9. Are you homesick?
4. Do you speak English at home?
10. Are you lazy on Saturdays?
5. Do you watch TV at night?
11. Does it snow in March?
6. Do you rent videos?
Exencrsr 7 Add wer to these questions to ask about Americans. Another

student will answer.
Exlrqpus, Do Americans eat fast food?
A. Do Americans ever eat fast food?
B. Yes, they sometimes do.
Are Americans friendly to you?

A. Are Americans ever friendly to you?
B. Yes, they usually are.
1. Do Americans eat with chopsticks?

2. Do Americans carry radios?
3. Do Americans say "Have a nice day"?
4- Do Americans kiss when they meet?
5. Do Americans shake hands when they meet?
6. Are Americans impolite to you?
Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time I I 5

!
Do Americans pronounce your name incomectly?
t
7.
t
8. Do Americans ask you what country you're from?
t
o Are Americans curious about your country? ;
I
Exrncrsr, 8 Fill in the blanks with a frequency word to make a statement t
about yourself. Then ask a question with eaer, Another student ;
will answer. t
never t
Exnupls: I jog in the morning.
A. Do you ever jog in the morning?
t
B. No, I never do. t
I
1. I ride a bike in the summer. r
2. I visit relatives on Sunday. r
o
I go to sleep before 9 p.m.
!
t).
t
4. (Women: Do A. Men: Do B.) ;
A. I wear high heels. r
B. I \ rea.r a suit and tie. I
I
5. I --- do exercises.
;
6. eat meat. I
7. drink colas. t
8. buy the Sunday newspaper.
f
!
9. put sugar in my coffee. J
10. take a nap in the afternoon. !
11. I eat in a restaurant. t
!
12. use a fax machine. t
13.
-- bake bread. t
14. use cologne or perfume. a
t
15. take a bubble bath. bubble bath
t
t
t
a
a
I
I
t
(
tt6 Lesson Four t
I
+.4 Ftequency Expressions and Questions with How Often
Hovr often do you visit your mother? Once a week.

How often does the mail come? Every day.
LnucuncE NorEs
1. We ask a question withh,ow ofteruwhenwe want to lorow the frequency
of an activity.
2. Expressions that show frequency are these:
every day (week, month, yeax)
every other day (week, month, yeax)
from time to time
once in a while
3. Frequency expressions can come at the beginning of a sentence or
at the end of a sentence.
I learn more about Americans euery day.
Eaery day I learn more about Americans.
From time to ti,me,I look up words in my dictionary.
I look up words in my dictionary from time to time.
Exsncrsr 9 Ask a question with "How often do you . . ?" and the words
given. Another student will answer.
Exlt'rplgt get a haircut

A. How often do you get a haircut?
B. I get a haircut every other month.
1. come to class 6. use public transpor[ation

2. shop for groceries. 7. renew your driver's license
3. wash your clothes 8. buy the newspaper
4. caII long distance to your 9. go to the movies
country
5. go out to dinner
Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time I l7

ExEncrsr 1O linAa has a list to remind her of the things she has to do on a
regular basis. Write questions and answers about her actMties.
. drive daughter to ballet lessons - TU, Th
o pick up son at baseball practice - Mon, Wed
r shop for groceries - Sat
. take the dog for a haircut - 3'd day of every month
. go to the beauty salon - 5tr' day of every month
r visit Mom - Fti
. go to the Sn:n - I\Ion, Wed, Fri moming
. prepare the kids' lunches - I\{on to Fri
r chan€ie oil in car'- Jan, April, July, Oct
ExRptpr.s'
How often doea ahe drive her dauqhf,er to ballef, practice?
)he drivee her dauqhter to ballet practice twice a week.
1.
2.
o
o.
4.
5.
b.
a
a
7. J
a
a
8.
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
J
(
118 Lesson Four
Ercrcrss 1 1 Write a few sentences about a member of your family or
another person you know. Use frequency words.
Exlt-lptr, My eie-"er never helpe with f,he houeework.
5he alwaya qete good gradee.
5he aometimea leavee dirf,y drahea in the aink.
Exsncrsr 12 Use the words in parentheses ( ) to complete this conversation.

Put the words in the correct order. Use the correct form of the
verb.
A. Let's go to a movie tonight.
B. I can't. My mothe,( alwaYe makea
dirurer for me on FYidays.
erample : make/alw ay s )
If I don't visit her, she . And if I don't call her,
(1
she worries.
""*pt"lr/"""rAA
A. her?
(2 hotu/often/y ou /call)
B. -
(3 l/euery dny/call h,er)
A. Why do you call her so often?
B. She's old now, and she Ionely.

(4 oJten/be)
A Well, invite your mother to go to the movies.
B. Thanks, but she has a favorite TV show on Friday nights.

She it.
(5 wabh/dways)
A. go out?
(6 ner/shc)
B. She She prefers to stay home.\=- ;

st'.e rikes ,{X{:Hrt, and watch rv. @ffi
A. Is she a good cook? knit
Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 119
-.
I
B. Not really. She the same thing every week:
a
(8 usually/cook) e
chicken on Friday, fish on Saturday, meatloaf on Sunday. . Her t
routine . Only Mother's Day is different. a
(9 cha,nge/neuer)
a
A. What on Mother's Day? !
(10 you/do/usuaila)
B. My sister and I her flowers and take her to

t
(11 usually/buy) I
a restaurant. t
A. Does she like that? t
B. Not really. She , "Don't waste your money.
t
(12 usually/say) I
Flowers
(13 die/always)
in a day or two. And my cooking is t
better than restaurant food."
a
!
A.
(14 be/she/ahuaEs)
hard to please? !
B. Yes, she is.
e
e
A.
(15 be/slw/eaa')
satisfied? T
B. Not usually. She "I don't want Mother's Day J
(16 altaays/say) t
once a year. I want it every day." t
t
Exsncrsr l3 Read this student's composition about his teacher. Find the t
mistakes with the underlined words and correct them. Add the t
verb be where necessary. If the underlined words are correct, t
write C. t
ie teaches
My English teacher Barbara Nowak. She teaeh grarnrnar and composi-
a
t
tion at City College. She very nice, but she's very strict. She give a lot of t
homework, and we take a lot of tests. If I pass the test, I very happy. t
English's hard for me.
t
t
Every day, at the beginning of the class, she takes attendance and we t
hand in our homework. Theit she's explains the grammar. We do exercises I
in the book. The book have a lot of exercises. Most exercises is easy, but I
a
some are hard. Sometimes we says the answers out loud, but sometimes
I
we write the answers. Sometimes the teacher asks a student to write the I
answers on the chalkboard. I
I
(
l2O Lesson Four \
i
The students like Barbara because she make the class interesting.
She brings often songs to class, and we learn the words. Sometimes we
watch a movie in class. Always I er\ioy her lessons.
After class I sometimes going to her offrce if I want more help. She
very kind and always try to help me.
Barbara dresses very informally. Sometimes she wears a skirt, but
she wears usually jeans. She about 35 years old, but she's looks like a
teenager. CIn my country never a teacher wea.r jeans.)
I very happy with my teacher. She understand the problems of a

foreigner because she's also a foreigner. She's comes from Poland, but
she speaks English very weII. She lcrow it's hard to learn another language.
AE ce.J["- Prepositions of Time
On: days and dates When do you go to church?

0n Sundays.
When do Americans celebrate Independence
Day?
On July 4.
When do Americans celebrate Mother's Day?

In May.
When do Americans vote for President?

In 2000, 2004,2008, and so on.
At: specific time of day What time do you eat lunch?
At noon.
What time does the class start?
At 8 o'clock.
What time do you go to bed?
At midnight.
In tJ:,'e morning When do you work?
In the afternoon In the morning.
In the evening When do you go to school?
In the evening.
When do you call your family?
At night.
(continued)
a Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time l2l
J
d
.t
.a
When do we have vacation? et
In the surnmer. ar{
. to: a beginning -
Forom . .
and ending time
What hours do they work?
From nine to five. .t
d
et
Exsncrss l4 Answer these questions. Use the correct preposition. .t
.t
1. When do you get up in the morning? d
2. What time does your English class begin? J
3. What
It
days does your Ehgtish class meet?
d
a
4. When is your birthday?
5. What time do you go to bed?
ei
J,
6. When do Americans celebrate Labor Day? I.l
7. When do students in your country have vacation?
q
8. When is Valentine's Day? a
t
9. When is Mother's Day in the U.S.?
a
10. When is Mother's Day in your country? a
a
a
a
1.
a
Frequency Words:
a
Most Frequent
a
always
usually
l$U/o
J
1 often a
I
sometimes
I I
J
Least Fqgquent
rarely/seldom
never t
U/o
t
2. The Position of FYequency Words:
a
T
Arrpn rHU vERB ss: He is always late.
t
a
Bpnonn A MAIN vnns: I usually walk to work. a
a
122 Lesson Four
I
3. The Position of FYequency Expressions:
Every day I rvatch TV.
I watch TV every day.
4. FYequency Questions and Answers:

Do you ever wear a suit and tie? I seldom do. -
fue you ever bored in class? Yes, sometimes.
How often do you go to the library? About once a month.
Review prepositions of time on pages l2l-I22. Review the simple present

tense in Lessons 1 and 2.
1. Put the frequency u,ord in the correct place.

anil never
I never-*m bored in class.
I alwava
AJna*4s+ drink coffee in the morning.
2. Don't separate the subject and the verb with a frequency phrase.
once in a while
She enee*ra-+hile visits her grandmother.
Every oLher day we
@ write a composition.
Don't use a negative verb with neue?'.
do
Do you ever take the bus to school? No, I never don*.
We never don+ eat in class.
4. Use euet" in questions. Answer the question with a frequency word.

gomeLimea
Do you ever listen to the radio in the morning? Yes, I erer do.
PART I Find the mistakes with the underlined words, and correct them
(including mistakes with word order). Not every sentence has a
mistake. If the sentence is correct, write C.
EXRtqptfS, Do you ever drink <:offce? No, I nevt'r' .*]h.

I never eal spaghetti. (l
Frequency Words rvith the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 123
I
1. Always I girre my mother a present for Mother's Day'.
I
I
2. I rarely go downtorvn. t
3.
I
They never are on time.
I
4. It snows seldom in April. I
I
5. Do you ever take the bus? Yes, I never do. I
6. Are you ever late to class? Yes, always I am. I
I
7. Do you ever use chonsticks? Yes, I ever do. I
a
8. What often do you go to the library? I go to the library twice a month.
I
9. I once in a while eat in a restaurant. I
a
10. Every other day she cooks chicken.
I
PART 2 This is a conversation between two students. Fill in the blanks I
to complete the conversation. I
a
A. Who
(eranryle)
your English teacher? t
B. His name
(1)
David. t
a
(2)
David? I
B. Yes. I like him very much. I
I
A.
(3)
he wear a suit to class?
I
B. No, he He always Jeans
I
(4) (5) (
and running shoes.
t
A.
(6) I
B. He about 60 years old. I
I
A. your language? (
(8)
(
B. No, he doesn't speak Spanish, but he Polish and
(e) (
Russian. And English, of course. (
A. does your class meet? (

(10)
(
B. It meets three days a week: Monday, Wednesday, and Friday. (
A. My class two days a week: T\resday and Thursclal'. (

(11)
I
124 Lesson Four

B. TeIl me about your English teacher. ,
A. Her name Dr. Misko. She never

(12) (13)
jeans to class. She wears a dress or suit.
(14)
She my language. She only
(15)
English.
(16)
B. Do you like her?
A Yes, but she a lot of homework and tests.

(17)
B. does she give a test?
(18)
A. Once a week. She gives a test every Friday. I like
(1e)
tests.
B. My teacher sometimes teaches us American songs.

(20)
your teacher youAmeri-
(21) (22)
can songs?
A. No, she never

(23)
B. What book
(2+)
A. My class uses Grammar in Contert.
B. What
(25)
A. "Corltext" means the words that help you understand a new word or idea.
B. How
(26)
A. C-O-N-T-E.X-T
PART 3 Fill in the blanks with the correct preposition.
Exluplr: Many people go to church Sundays.
1. We have classes the evening.
2. Valentine's Day is February.
3. Valentine's Day is February 14..
4. A news program begins 6 o'clock.
5. I watch TV night.
-
6. We have vacation the summer'.
7. Many Americans rvork 9 5 o'clock.

--
8. I drink coffee the morning.
9. I study the afternoon.
CLASSROOM 1. Find a partner. Interview your partner about one of his or her teachers,
ACTIVITIES friends, or relatives. Ask about this person's usual activities.
ExRuptr' A. What's your math teacher's name?

B. Her name is Kathy Carlson.
A. Does she give a lot of homework?
B. No, she doesn't.
A. What does she usually rvear to class?
B. She usually wears a skirt and blouse.
A. Does she ever wear jeans to class?
B. No, she never does.
2. In a small group or with the entire class, use frequency words to talk about
the activities of a famous person (the President, a singer, an actor, etc.).
Ex.euplr, The President of the U.S. often meets with leaders of other countries.
o. Find a partner. Talk about a special holiday that you and your family cele-
brate. Ask your partner questions about the date of the holiday, food, cloth-
ing, preparations, activities, and so on.
ExRuptrt A. We celebrate the Lunar New Year.

B. Do you wear special clothes?
A. Yes, we do.
B. What kind of clothes do you wear?
4. Look at the list of Linda's aclivities on page 118. Write a list to remind
yourself of things you do on a regular basis. Find a partner. Compare your
list to your par-Lner's list.
5. In the left column on the next page is a list of popular cusloms in the U.S.
Do people in your native country or cultural group have similar customs'J
If so, put a check (/) in Column A. If not, put a check in Column B. Discuss
your answers in a group.
126 Lesson Four

t. -tmericans oftensay, uHave anice day."
2. Shen someone sneezes, Americans
usualty say, uGod bless you."
3. Americans often as\ "How are you?"
People usually reply, "I'm fine, thanks.
How are you?"
4. Americans rarely visit their friends
rvithout calling trrst.
5. Americans are often in a hurry. They
rarely have free time.
6. Americans often eat popcorn in a
movie theater.
7. Americans often eat in fast-food
restaurants.
8. Americans often say "OK."
9. Americans often wear shorts and
sandals in the summer.
10. Americans often listen to a personal
stereo.
11. When eating, Americans usually hold a
fork in the right hand and a larife in
the Ieft hand.
L2, Banks in the U.S. often have a time/
temperature sign.
13. American restaurants usually have salt
and pepper strakers on the table.
14. When a radio or TV breaks down,
Americans often buy a new one. They
rarely W to repair it.
15. Americans often send greeting cards to
close friends and relatives for
birthdays, armiversaries, holidays, and
illnesses.
16. The Sundaynewspaper often has store
coupons. .
17. There is a special day for sweethearts,
Iike Valentine's Day.
WRITING 1. Write about one of your teachers. Describe your teacher and tell about his
or her classroom behavior and activities.
2. Write about a holiday that you celebrate. Tell how you celebrate this holiday
or write about how you celebrate your birthday or another special day.
OUTSI DE 1. Ask an American to do Exercise 5. See how your answers compare to an

ACTIVITY American's answers. Report the American's answers to the class.
q
I
a
2. Go to a drug store, supermarket, or card store. Is there a special holida3- a:
this time (for example, Father's Day, Thanksgling, Christmas, Chanukahj? d
Read the messages in a few cards. Make a card for someone you knorr-. !
Write your own message. J
Internet Activities
I
!
a
1^ Find a greeting card site on the Internet. Send an electronic greeting card
to someone you lorow.
a
l
2. Using the lnternet, find the answers to these questions: C
a. When is Father's Day in the
t
U.S.?
e
b. What is the origin of Mother's Day? e
a
c. When is Thanksgiving?
e
e
a
e
e
a
t
a
t
I
I
e
a
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
(
(
128 Lesson Four

:::-:==i=:.:::=
: :::::.::::=;j.::=:
G RAMMAR
Possession
0bject Pronouns
CONTEXT
Names
William Madison's Name
r EC(oN FOCUS
Nouns have a possessluc lur'r.
Mari,lyn's house is beautiful.
My parenf.s'car is new.
We can also use possessi,ue adjectiues to show
possession or relationship.
.FIer house is beautiful.
Their car is new.
We can use object pronourls to substitute for object
nouns.
Do you live near yotlr parents?
Yes, I live near thsnx.
129
a
a
Before You Read 1. What is your complete name? What do your friends call you? a
2. Do you like your name?
t
Read the following article. Pay special attention to possessive forms.
I
a
t
a
a
Names a
e
Americans usually have three names: a first name, a middle name, and
a last name (or surname). For example: Marilyn Sue Ellis or Edward David
t
0rleans, Some people use an initial when they sign their names: Marilyn S.
a
Ellis, Edward D. 0rleans. Not everyone has a middle name. a
American women often change their last names when they get married. I
For example, if Marilyn EIIis marries Edward Orleans, her name becomes. a
Did you know-..? Marilyr 0rleans. Not all women follor,,' this c.ustonn. Sometimes a woman t
keeps her maiden rramer anti adds her husbandts name, with or without a t
The five most hyphen (-): For example, Marilyn Ellis-Orleans or Marilyn Ellis Orleans.
Sometimes a woman does not use her husbandts name at all. In this case,
t
common last
names in the U.S. if the couple has children, they have to decide if their children will use
t
are Smith, lohn- their father's name, their mother's name, or both. A man does not usually t
son, Williams, change his name when he gets married. t
]ones, and Some people have their mother's last name as a middle name: John t
Brown. Fitzgerald Kennedy, Franklin Delano Roosevelt.z I
I
I
t
I
5.1 Possessive Form of Nouns I
(
I
Singular noun: Add apostrophe * s I use my father's last name. I
father I don't use my mother's last name. (
rnother (
(
Plural noun ending in -s: Add apostrophe only My parents'names are Ethel and Herman.
parents Ted and Mike are boys'narnes. (
boys (
(
(continued)
(
(
I A ntnidr:tt ttutttt, is a wonlan's fanrily name before she ge(-s married
r (
Thcst' are the nanres of t*'o Alrerican presidenls.
I
130 Lesson Five

Add apostrophe * s What are your children's names?
Marilyrr and Sandra are women's names.
l.-.--=*. that end in s: Add apostrophe only Do you lcrow- Charles"ivife?

1.1:. Harris OR OR
,--.harles Add apostrophe * s Do you know Charles's wife?
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. We use the possessive form for people and other living things.
My bt'other's name is Joe.
My dog's narne is PeeWee.
2. For inanimate objects, we usually use "the of
The door of the classroo'm, is closed.
Washington College is the nanxe of mA school.
- -."
Exrncrsr I Fill in the blanks with the possessive form of a noun to make a
true statement.
father'a
ExRrqprr: I use my last narne.
1. I use my last name.
2. I don't use my last name.
3. An American married woman often uses her last

name.
4. A married woman in my native culture uses her

last name.
5. An American single woman usually uses her last

nalne.
6. An American man rarely uses his last name.
7. John Kennedy had his maiden name as a rniddle

narne. -
--
l)ossession; Ohject I'ronouns 131
!
J
Exrncrsr 2 Some of the following sentences can show possession with 's ;
or '. Rewrite these sentences. Write "no change" for the others. T
Exlt,tplrs,
!
The teacher }crows the names of the students.
The teacher knows the atudenLe' namea.
I
I
The door of the classroom is usually closed. r
No chan1e. r
I
1. The teacher always corrects the homework of the students.
!
!
2. The name of the textbook is Grammar i,n Contert. !
I
3. job of the teacher is to explain the grammar. r
The
a
!
4. What are the names of your parents? a
r
5. The color of the book is blue. -
a
6. Do you use the last name of your father?
a
(,
a
7. What is the narne of your dog? a
I
8. The names of my children are Jason and Jessica.
r
T
I
T
m.2 Possessive Adjectives !
t
t
t
I my l like my name. e
you your You're a new student. What's your name? t
he his Ile likes his name. e
she her S?re doesn't like her name. a
it its Is this your dog? Is it friendly? What's its name? t
we our We use our niclorames. a
they their They are my friends. Their last name is Jackson. t
a
(
132 Lesson Five \
rl
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. Be careful not to confrrse h.i,s and her.
J J
)l,Iy m,other lles in Chicago. Her brother lives in Las Vegas.
My uncle speaks English well. fles wife is American.

2. We can use a possessive a{iective and a possessive noun together.
We can use two (or more) possessive nouns together.
My sister's'name is Marilyn.
My sister's ltusband's name is Edward.
Exrncrsr 3 Fill in the blanks with the possessive adjective that relates to
the subject.
my
ExRptplr' I like teacher.
1. He loves mother.
2. She loves father.
3. A dog loves master.
4. Many American women change names when they get
married.
5. Sometimes a woman keeps maiden narne and adds
husband's name.
6. American men don't usually change narnes when they get
married.
7. Do you use father's last name?
8. I bring book to class.
9. We use books in class.
10. The teacher brings book to class.
11. Some students do homework in the library.
5 .3 Questions with Whose
llrhose narne do you use? I use my father's last name.

![rhose pen does she need? She needs your pen.
Whose book is that? It's Bob,s book.
lVhose glasses are those? They're my glasses.
Possession; Object Pronouns 135

(
(
Exsncrsr 4 Write a question with whose and the words given. Answer uith (
the words in parentheses ( ). (
(
ExRvptgs' wife/that (Robeft)
t
Whoee wife ie that? That'a Robert'e wife. (
(
children/these (Robert)
(
Whoee children are theee? Theee are Roberf,'a children. (
(
1. office/this (the dean) I
(
(
2. offices/those (the teachers) (
(
(
3. dictionary/that (the teacher) t
(
t
4. books/those (the students)
t
I
(
5. carllhat (my parents) (
(
(
6. house/this (my cousin)
(
(
(
7. papers/those (Mr. Ross)
(
(
(
diskettes/these (the programmer)
(
5.+ Possessive Pronouns
You don't know my name. I lsrow ]'ours. Yottt's - ?Jour ?tenle

Your name is easy for Americans. Mine is l-rard. Mit'te =. m?J ttente
134 Lesson Five

LlNcuncE NorEs
l. When we use a possessive pronoun, we omit the noun. Cotrtpenp:
Her children have American n€unes.
My childrm have Spanish narnes. oR Mine have Spanish
names.
2. Compare these three forms:
I my fiune
you your yours;
he his his
she her hers
it its
we our ours
they their theirs
who rvhose whose
3. After a possessive noun, we can omit the noun.

Robert's wife speaks English, brfi Peter's doesn't.
(Peter's : Peter's wife)
Exsncrse 5 In each sentence below, replace the underlined words with a

possessive pronoun.
Exluprs: Your book is new. My book is old.

Your book is new. Iffie is old.
1. His name is Charles. Her name is Paula.

a,
a/. My car is old. Your car is new.
3. I like my English teacher. Does your brother like his English teacher?
4. I have my dictionary today. Do you have your dictiona.ry?

tr Please let me use your book. I don't have my book today.
6. Whose sweater is this? Whose sweater is that?
7. My parents' apartment is big. Our apartment is small.
8. My teacher comes from Houston. Paula's teacher comes from El Paso.
Possession; Object Pronouns t35

I
(
The Subject and the 0bject
I
svo The subject (S) comes before the verb (V).

I
I
Bob likes Mary, The object (O) comes after the verb. The object
We like movies. is a person or a thing. I
(
s v o sv o (
Bob likes *fl 4""1."
$e
helps him.
t
(
SVOSVO
Ia+ta
like movies because they entertain me. t
r 4 | (
I
I
(
Before You Read 1. What are common American names?
2. What is a very common first name in your country or native culture? (
What is a very common last name? Is your narne common in your (
country or native culture?
I
Read the following conversation. Pay special attention to object pronouns.
t
(
t
r William Madison's Name

A. I have many questions about American names. Can you answer them for
(
a
I
(
(
me?
B. 0f course. (
A. Tell me about your name. (
B. My name is William, but my friends call me Bill. (
A. Why'do they call you Bill? (
B. Bill is a common nickname for William.
A. Is William your first name? I
(
B. Yes.
A. What's your full name? (
B. William Michael Madison. (
A. Do you ever use your middle name? (
B. I only use it for very formal occasions. I sign my name William M. Madison, (
Jr. (junior).
I
A. What does "junior" mean?
(
B. It means that I have the same name as my father. His name is William
(
Madison, Sr. (senior).
(
136 Lesson Five

A. What's your wife's name?
B. Anna Marie Simms-Madison. I call her Annie.
A. Why does she have two last names?
B. Simms is her father's last name, and lVladison is mine. She uses both
names with a hyphen (-) between them.
A. Do you have any children?
B. Yes. We have a son and a daughter. Our son's name is Richard, but we
call him Dick. Our daughter's name is Elizabeth, but everybody calls her
Lizzy.
A. What do your children call you?
B. They call us Mommy and Daddy, of course.
5"6
Ime You love me.

you you I love you.
he him She loves him.
she her He loves her.
it it We love it.
we us They love us.
they them We love them.
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. We can use an object pronoun to substitute for an object noun.
I have a middle narle.I use il when I sign my name.
Richnrd is my son's name. We call him Dick.
I have some questiorts. Can you answer tlwm for rne?
My mothm lives near me. I vtsit h,er once a week.
2. We use th,e'm for plural people and things.
I have two brothers. You lorow them.
I need my books. I use the"rru in class.
An object pronoun can follow a preposition.
I have two last narnes. I use both o/ th,eflL.
My sister has a son. She always taf,ks about him.
Possession; 0bject Pronottns 137

a
a
ExrncrsE 6 Fill in the blanks. Substitute the underlined words with an I
object pronoun. a
him, a
Exluprr: I look like my father, but my brother doesn't look like
I
My brother's narne is William, but we call
J
1. BiIl.
a
2. I understand the teacher, and the teacher understands a
o
J. I use my dictionary when I write, but I don't use when I -
speak. a
a
4. I like this ciW. Do you like too?
t
5. I talk to Americans, but I don't always understand rI
6. We listen to the teacher, and we talk to
i
7. When we make a rnistake, the teacher corrects J
8. The President has advisors. They help make decisions. a
I understand
a
9. You understand me, and
a
10. My friends sometimes visit me, and I sometimes visit a
a
Exsncrss 7 Tho students are talking. Fill in the blanks with an appropriate
I
object pronoun. I
J
A. How do you like Ms. Miller, your new English teacher? !
her , but she gtves a lot of homework. This week we
B. I like (eramplc) I
i
have to write a composition, and she says we have to &u , C
May I borrow your typewriter? a
A. I never use
a
any more. I have a computer. You can come
(2) J
to my house and use if you like. !
(s)
!
B. But I don't liarow how. a
A. I'll teach a
(+)
a
B. It's going to be hard. I don't lonow anything about computers a
A. Don't worry. You just need to Imow a few basic commands. You can a
learn in less than an hour.
I
(5) a
a
a
lI8 Lesson Five t
B. I don't want to bother
(6)
A. You're not bothering I'm glad to help Come
(7) (8)
to my house tomorrow.
B. Can I bring my brother too? You can teach both of
(e)
at the
same time.
A Do I know youtb.oihett
B. Of course. You sit next to
(10)
in math class.
A. Do you mean Roberto?

B. Yes. He's my brother.
Of Oursef He looks.iust like (1 1)

. Sure. Bring
(12)
I'll be happy to teach botr, sf at the same time.
B. Thanks a lot. I'll see tomorrow.

(14)
Exr,ncrsr, S Fill in the blanks with I, I'rn, m,U, m,ine, or rne,

l'm
Ex.rl,tptp' a foreign student. come from Japan.
My mine
roommate's parents live in the U.S., but live in
Japan.
My parents write to
me twice a month.
1. 20 years old.
2. poretrts don't live in the U.S.
3. study at the University of Wisconsin.

4. major is engineering.
5. have a roommate.
6. roommate's name is Kelly. is Yuki.
7. roommate helps with my English.
Exrncrss 9 Fill in the blanks with he, he,'s, his, or hint.

Hia He'e
Exltqptrt I have a good friend. narne is Paul. Puerto
He him
Rican. lives in Nelv York. I like
l. married.
Possession; Object Pronouns t39

a
2. works in an office. t
o
a
d. an accountant. a
4. son helps business. a
37 years old. wife is
i
5. 35.
t
6. My wife and wife are friends. a
7. My wife is a doctor. is a computer programrner. t
a
a
Exrncrsr I O f iU in the blanks with she, she's, her, or hers, I
ExRmpl"rr I have afriend. name's Diane.
the'a American a
5he Hers t
Iives in Boston. My native Ianguage is Korean. - -:'"'1-- is
I
English.
J
I. an interesting person. J
I like
J
2. very much.
J
o
d. married. J
4. has two children.
a
a
5. My children go to Dewey School. go to King School. t
b. a nurse. Iikes job. a
husband is a teacher.
a
7.
I
t
Exrncrss I I Fiil in the blanks with theA, they're, their, theirs, or them. I
Exlrqpu: Diane and Richard are my friends.
They
live in Boston.
Their a
a
house is beautifur. They're happy. I see
Lhem
on the weekerrds. !
t
1. Americans. t
2. both work. t
a)
D. have two children.
a
a
4. children go to public school. t
5. My apartment is small. is big. a
a
6. interested in art. a
al-
I talk to once a week. t
a
a
140 Lesson Five
t
a
Exrncrsr 12 fm in the blanks about a cat. Use fd it's, or i,ts.
ExnuptE,
It'a an independent anim a. lt always Iands on
its
- feet.
l. Iikes to eat fish.
2. a small animal.
3. fur is soft.
4. catches mice.
5. claws are sharp.
6. a clean animal.
7. Do you see that cat? Yes, I see
Exsnclsr 13 frU in the blanks with u)e, u)e're, ou,r, xu,rs, ot'u,s.
We We're
Exnuptrt study English. foreign students.
Our UA
teacher is American. He helps
l. come from different countries.

2. in class now.
3. classroom is comfortable.
4. The teacher asks a lot of questions.
5. The teacher's textbook has the answers. don't have the
answers.
6. interested in English.
Exsncrsr 14 fiU in the blanks with Aou, Aou're, yor.r,r, or Ao?trs.

Exlupu, You're
a good teacher. Students like You . My other teacher's
name is hard to pronounce.
Youra is easy to pronounce.
l. exlplain the grammar well.

2. We all understand
3. Our prcnunciation is sometimes hard to understand. IS
clear.
4. a kind teacher.
5. class is very interesting.
6. have a lot of experience with foreign students.
Possession; 0bject Pronouns l4l

a
a
Questions about the Subject or about the Complement a
-' a
Compare these statements and related questions about ttte complement: a
a
a
Susan needs something. e
she need? a
She needs a new TV. I
My parents live
e
your parents live?
a
They live in Colombia.
a
e
Your sister someone. a
she
her boyfriend
t
She
a
a
Compare these statements and related questions about the subject: a
e
a
my book. a
my book? Tom does. a
help. a
help? I do. a
a
a
a
LnNcuncr Norr,s a
1. Most tr.r/z- questions in the present tense use do or does. These ques- a
tions ask about the complement. I
f----------f I
Ile lives in Peta. Wm"e does he live? a
a
I
J a
I see sorezeone. Wo(m) do you see? a
NorB: Informally, Americans often sty wli,o instead of wltorn.
2. Some ruh- questions ask about the subject. I
a
I
Sotneone needs help.

J
Wio needs help?
I
(
J
(
I
S ont, e. t.l fi,ng is lvrong. Wtal is wrong? a

(
t+2 Lesson Five t
(
3. Notice that we use the -s foim of the verb to ask a present tense
question about the subject. The answer can be singular or plural.
Who has a new car?
Jake has a new car.
Bill and Arn haae a new car.
::i.:, ..
Exrncrsr 15 fam about some jobs in your house. Ask another student,
'Who s in your house?" The other student will
answer.
Exlt,tPlfS: take out the garbage

A Who takes out the garbage in your house?
B. My brother does.
vacuurn the carpet
A. Who vacuums the carpet in your house?
B. Nobody does. We don't have carpets.
1. cook the meals
2. make your bed
3. pay the bills
4. wash the dishes
5. shop for groceries
6. wash the clothes
7. vacurun the carpet
8. dust the furniture
9. sweep the floor
:#i,ufl
Exrncrsp l5 fiU in the blanks with who, whom, u)hl's, or whlse.

Who
ExRuplr: speaks Japanese? Ibko does.
:]. has the textbook? The teacher does.
2. your English teacher? Bob Marks is.
3. There's a dictionary on the floor. dictionary is it?
4. do you see on the weekends? I see my friends.
Exrncrsr l7 Circle the correct word to complete this conversation between

two students.
ExRuptr' A. (Who,
@ Whose, Whom) your English teacher?
B. (My, Mine, Me) teacher's narne is Charles Flynn.

a
A. ([{y, Mine, Me) is Marianne Peters. She's Mr. Flynn's wifc. I
a
B. Oh, really? His last name is different from (she, irer, trers).
I
A. Yes. She uses (her, hers, his, he's) father's last name, not her (l-rus- I
band's, husbands', husbands, husband). I
B. Do they have children? I
A. Yes.
I
B.
I
(Whose, Who's, Who, Whom) narne do the children use?
I
A. (They, They're, Their, Theirs) children use both last names. I
B. How do you lcrow so much about (you, you'rb, your, yours) teacher t
and (she, she's, her, hers) children? (
A. We talk about (we, us, our, ours) narnes in class. We also talk about
(
American customs. She explains her customs, and we explain (our, (
ours, us). a
B. Mr. Flynn doesn't talk about (her, his, he's, hers) family in class. (
A. Do you call (her, his, him, he) "mister"?
t
a
B. Of course. (He, He's, His) the teacher. We show respect.
I
A. But we call Marianne by (her, hers, she) first narne. (She, She's, Her) I
prefers that. (
B. I prefer to call (our; us, ours) teachers by (they, they're, their, theirs) (
last names. That's the way we do it in my country. (
A. And in (me, my, mine) too. But (we, we're, us) in the U.S. now. There's (
an expression: Wlren in Rome, do as the Romans do.3 (
1. Pronouns and Possessive Forms

(
I me my mlne
I
you you your yours

he him his his I
she her her hers
it it its
we US our ours :
they them their theirs

who whom whose whose
)This expression means that you should follou, the custons of the country you are in
t+4 Lesson Five

Subject I come from Cuba. They come from
Korea.
l
Object The teachers helps The teacher helps

me. them.
Possessive Adective My name is Rosa. Their narnes are Kim
and Park.
Possessive Pronoun Your country is big. Your country is big.
Mine is small. Theirs is small.
Subject Who has a new car?

Object Srith whom do you live? (nonrmL)
Who do you live with? (INnonml)
Possessive A{ective I have my book. Whose book is that?
Possessive Pronoun This is my dictionary. Whose is that?
2. Possessive Forms of Nouns

Jack's car is old.
His parents'car is new.
The children's toys are on the floor.
What's the name of our tertbook?
1. Don't confuse yo'u're (you are) and your'(possessive fornl).

You're
Y+ur a good person.
vour
Where's yeurr€ book?
2. Don't confuse he's (he is) and laris (possessive form).

Hie
Heh name is Paul.
He'6
His a good student.
3. Don't confuse ir's (it is) and ils (possessive form).

It'a
Its a beautiful day today.
il;e
A monkey uses ith tail to climb trees.

(
(
4. Don't coufuse /us (masculir,e) ancl /zer'(femirrine).
(
tia
I\'ly brother loves her daugliter. (
her l
My sister loves his son. (
5. Don't confuse nl?J and m.itte. I

mv
(
I don't have mine book today. I
b. Don't confuse theg't'e and tlzeii:
I
(
Their
I have hvo American friends. Theytre names are Bob and Sue. l
(
7. Use the correct pronoun (subject or object). (
her a
I have a daughter. I love she very much.
a
I
My father and me like to go fishing. I
I
B. Don't use th.e with a possessive form.
I
l\4
The my daughter's boyfriend is very tall. I
a
I need the your dictionary. t
9. Don't use do or does 'tn
a utlto question about the subject.
t
a
haE
Who dees-have a Spanish dictionary? a
a
10. Don't separate ulrcse fron'r the noun.
I
book
Whoseis this bsek?
I
(
11. Don't confuse whose and rtrlzo's. (
W'hose
Whe's coat is that?
I
I
12. Use the correct word order for possession.
(
My nei7hbor'e dog
(
Dsg-flly-fleighbei makes a lot of noise. (
(
13. Put the apostrophe in the right piace.
(
(
rutv ffi"d& car is new.
(
14. Don't use the possessive form for non-living objects. (
(
Gramnr,ar i,n Contert i, t[€'ffir'ujJ*^!r{{.r
(
(
146 Lesson Five

]f ii-, fl,rir
3:--1j,:,'.'
i,{r-i.1-+_f.i i j
'-l!:'. i-:r:
.Sir*':.;.;,
P^TT 1 Find the mistakes with the underlined words and correct them.
write C.
i\'i' ^.-- p
ExnuPtrs: {ilhob book is that?
Who's your best friend? C
1. Where does you're brother live?
2. Paul is in my English class but his not in my math class.
3. Its important to know a second language.
4. Whose name do you use, your father's or your mother's?
5. Who wants to leave early today? We all do.
6. I\{aria's son goes to a bilingual school. Her son's teaclier comes from Cuba.
7. I visit my girlfriend once a week. His son likes to play with mine.
8. The door of the classroom is open.
9. Do you lanow the first narne the teacher?
10. I have tlvo married brothers. My brother's wives are wonderful women.
11. Your always late to class.
12. My the brother's car is new.
13. Wrose is this umbrella?
14. She likes her mother-in-law because mother her husband always helps her.
15. Do they visit theirs parents often?
16. A dog wags (moves) {! tail when it's happy.
17. Susan ancl Linda are wo,rlcn's names.
18. Who does have a red pen?
19. My friend and me eat dinner together once a week.
20. Whose pen is this?
Possession; Object Pronouns t+7

I
(
PART 2 Choose the correct lvord to complete these sentences. (
ExRtqPtr, llost Alerican \l,orilen cl"range (
" llanres s,hen they get married 1----
lJ!r
not all do.
- I
a. her b. hers c. their d. theirs (
1. I have trvo I
a. sisters b. sister's c. sisters' d. sister I
t
2.
a. Tlieir
narnes are Marilyn and Charlotte.
b. Theirs c. Tl'rey're d. They e. Hers
I
I
both married. I
a. Tl-reir b. They're c. They d. Them e. There (
(
4. MarilS.rr uses
a. the last name her husband a
b. the last name of his husband I
c. her husband's last name (
d. his husband's last name
a
5. Charlotte uses father's last name. a
a. we b. our C, OUTS d. us I
6. I have one brother. married.
l
a. He's b. His c. He d.'Him a
t
7. wife is very nice. (
a. Him b. Her c. His d. He's (
8. first name is Sandra. I
a. My b. Mine c. I'm d. Me (
(
9. My friends call "Sandy." (
a. tlle b. my c. mine
(
10. I\{y sister often uses her middle name, but I rarely use (
a. my b. mine c. me d. I'm
11. You have a dog, but I don't know nanle.

a. it b. it's c. its
t2. your teacher?

a. \\ttom b. Who c. Whose d. Who's
13. TIte teacher's nanre is on

a. tl're door of l-rer office
b. her office's door
c. tlie iloor her office
d. l'rer the office's door
t+8 Lesson l'ive

14.
a. \\rho's is that office?
b. \Vl'rose is that office?
c. V,rho's office is that?
d. \\trose office is tl'rat?
15. Her names are Ricky and Edclie.

a. childs' b. children's c. childrens d. childrens'
16. has the newspaper?

a. Whom b. Whose c. Who d. Who's
17. Who more time witli the test?

a. need b. does need c. needs d. does needs
PART 3 Two women are talking about names. Fill in the blanks with
possessive forms, subject pronouns, 0r object pronouns. Some
blanks need an apostrophe 0r an apostrophe +s.
A. What's your last name?
B. It's Woods.
A. Wocrds sounds like an American name. Bfi Uou re Polish, aren't you?
(erample)
B. Yes, but Americans have trouble pronouncing name, so I use

(1)
the name "Woods."
A. What's real last name?

(2)
B. \{rodzianicki.
A. My name is hard for Americans too, but like my name, and I

(3)
don't want to change . I'm proud of it.
(4)
B. What's last name?
(5)
A. Lopez Hernandez.
B. Why do have two last names?

(6)
A. I conre from Mexico. Mexicans have two last names. Mexicans use both
parents names.
(7)
B. What happens when a woman gets married? Does she use
(8)
parent names and husband
(e) (10) (11)
too?
.r \ Possession; Object Pronouns 149

,)
11
A. No. \\-hen a \\,on1at1 gets marriccl, she usiiall5'drops

I
(12) a
mother Ilanre. Shc adds "of" (in Spanisir, "de") and e
( t3) ( 14)
C
husbar-rd name. 1\{y sister is marricd. name is t
(1{;) (16)
t
N{aria Lopez de Castillo. Lopez is
(17)
father
(18)
name
t
and Castillo is her l'rusband name. kids
t
(1e) (20) (2 1) !
last nane is Castillo Lopez.
t
B. That's confusing. Everybody in the family has-a different last name. C
t
A. It's not confusing for us. You understand your customs, and we under. C
t
stand
(22) t
B. Do your sister kids Iiave funerican first names?
t
(23) C
A. My sister gave Spanisli names, but friends gave C
(24)
them funerican names. Her daughter

(25)
t
nanle is Rosa, but C
(26)
(
(27)
friends call her Rose.
(28) (2e)
name ls
t
Eduardo, but friends call Eddie. Ricardo t
(30) (31)
t
is tlie youngest one. still a baby, but when he goes to t
(32)
t
school,
(ss)
friends will probably call
(s4)
Rick.
t
a
t
I
t
(
CLASSROOM 1. Find apartner. Compare yourself to yourpaftner. Compare piysical charac- t
ACTIVITIES teristics, clothes, family, home, job, car, etc. Report some interesting facts (
to the class. (
I
ExRtqpLr' ]1r' hair is slraight. Illark's is c.urly. I
Ilis t'ves are blur'. X{ine art, trrou,n. (
\11'I'anrilr, livt-s in lhis citr,. llarl<'s Izrnrily Iir-r,s irr llonrania.
(
(
(
r50 Lessort Fivr:

2. One student rvill ask these tolzo questions. Raise your hand if tltis is a fact
about you. The filst student rvill ansrver the question after he or she sees
raised hands.
Exnuptr: who has kids?

Ben, Maria, and Lidia have kids.
Who has a cell phone?
No one has a cell phone.
1. Who has kids?

2. Who likes cartoons?
3. Who plays soccer?
4. Who has a computer?
5. Who has an e-mail address?
6. Who likes to swim?
7. Who is a vegetarian?
8. Who wants a grammar test?
9. Who has American friends?
10. Who has a pet?
11. Who lives in a house?
t2. Who is over 6 feet tall?
13. Who watches TV in the morning?
14. W}ro is a sports fan?
15. Who gets a lot of junk mail?
16. Who exercises every day?
t7. Who has a motorcycle?
18. Who has a middle narne?
19. Who wants to become an American citizen?
20. V/ho plays a musical instrument?
3. Think of something unusual that you do or are. Write a sentence telling

what you do or are. Then ask a.question to find out who else does or is
this.
Exlupr,s: I have a pet snake. Who else has a pet snake?

: I play volleyball. Wlro else plays volleyball?
I am a Buddhist. Who else is a Buddhist?
ffariation: On a piece of paper, write something unusual that you do or

are. Give the papers to the teacher. The teacher reads a statement. Other
students-and the teacher-try to guess who wrote the paper. Example:
Someone has a pet snake. Who has a pet snake?)
IOKE A woman is outside of her house. A dog is near her. A man walks by and is
interested in the dog. He wants to pet the dog. He asks the woman, "Does your
dog bite?" The woman answers no. The man pets the dog and the dog bites him.
He says, "You told me that your dog doesn't bite." The woman answers, "This
is not my dog. Mine is in the house."

(
DI SCU SS I CN l)iscuss rlaming customs in your native culture. Do people have a middle namel I
Dcr fathers and sons ever have the same name? Tell about your name. Does it (
nrean sorllething?
(
OUTSIDE Ask an American to tell you about his or her name. Tell the class something I
ACTIVITY interesting you learned from this An'rerican. I
I
lnternet Activity I
Firrd a phone directory on the Internet. Look up your last name in a major I
Arnerican city, sucl-r as Neq'York City, or in the city where you live. How ntanl' I
people in this city have your Iast name?
I
(
t
t
a
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
t
a
I
I
I
t
(
I
I
(
I
(
152 Lessun l'ive

G RAMMAR
Present Continuous Tensel
CONTEXT
Student Life
In the School Cafeteria
LESSON FOCUS
We use the present continuous tense to talk about an
action in progress now.
We're studging Lesson Six now.
The teacher is erpla,i.ning the grammar now.
'Tlrt' prescnt continuous lcnse is sorllt,tirnt,s c:rllt'd lh0 pres('nt progrcssive l(,nse
r53
I
liefore You Read 1. $,Iirai are you studying this semester? a
2.
o
Hor,r, many credit hours are you taking? I
Besides English, are you lear"riing something
D.
ne$r?
t
t
Read the following letter. Pay special attention a
to the present continuous verbs. I
I
t
ffi Student Life t
t
Dear Family, a
I'nr *T iting )'0u this letter to tell you about my life at college in the U.S. t
Many nerv things are happening, and I rvant to tell you all about my life t
here. t
First of all, I'm lir{ng in a dormitory with an American roommate. His t
name is Ben Kaplan, and he's from California. He's mqioring in chemistry. T
You knolv, of course, I'm mqjoring in music. Ben and I are very different,
but rve get along2 very well. We speak English all the time, and because of
I
hiir.., my English is improving. He's not here right nou,because he's studying
t
for a big test with some friends. a
This semester I'm taking five courses (18 credit hours). It's hard, but a
I'm geffing good grades. I'm learning a new instrument-the guitar. It's a a
Iot of fun for me and not very difficult. I'm meeting a lot of new people in a
my classes, students from all over the world. t
There's one thing I'm not happy about. The food here in the dorm
cafeteria is not very good. It's greasy, and I'm gaining weight. Ben and I are
t
thinking about getting an apartment for next semester. We want to cook for t
ourselves and have more freedom. t
Thar:x ),ou for the sweater you sent me. I'm wearing it now. It's so cold a
this rveek. ln fact, it's snowing now. It's so strange to see snow. I'm looking I
3,o
ro*:,:_*..., out mywindon. Children are playlng in the snow. They're making a snowman t
For-ty-one per-
and throwing snowballs, I
cent ol college I have to finish this letter norv. I'm writing a term paper3 for my music I
theory ciass. Please write soon and tell me what is happening with all of
students in the
y0u.
t
U.S. are over 25
years old. [This I hope you are all well, I
includes part- Love,
I
tinre students.J l)an I
I
I
r \\'lrerr
lrcople qcl trlottq rlc1/, tlrt'v havc zr go<xl rt,lnlrotrship.
(
"Alr ntr1xt1x'risaI)irl)('r'tllatsllrdonlsurilt'forclirss.'flrt'strr(lenll'(,s(,ar('lrt'satopic., Itoftcnllkcsastltil,,,r:
I
a full st,tttt'slcr' ({)r' l('nll) to pro<ltrt e tlris papci.
I
(
154 Lessott Six
*. i The Present Corttinuous Tense-Forms
You reading.
We learning.
They practicing.
Jim and Sue writing. '
He eating.
She sitting.
It sleeping.
Jin'r standing.
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. We can make a contraction with the subject pronoun and a form of
be. Most nouns can also contract with is.a
Danl's writing a letter. We're studying verb tenses.
He's wearing a sweater. 1f's snowing.
2. To form the negative, put not after the verb am/is/are.
Dan isn't writing a composition. He's writing a letter.
The children at'sn't playrng inside. They're playrng in the snow.
Exrncrss 1 Fill in the missing part of each sentence.

ExRptpt ss' l'm writing a letter.
tn4
I'm look out my window
1. My roommate and his friend studying.
2. I'm learn- to play the guitar.
3. New things happening.
4. ['m meet- a lot of new people.
5. I maJor IN MUSIC.
6. My roommate is ng in chemistry.
{ Set' k'sson l, page I for cx<'cplit-rns.
Present Continuous Tense r55

t
7. I'nl a sweater now. I
a
8. Children are ing snorvballs. a
I
aii
The Present Continuous Tense-Uses r
a
r
Dan is writing a Ietter to his family To sho*,that an action is in progress -
Ilo\1'. no$,, at this nioment. I
It's snorving non.
t
Dan and lds roomnrate are gaining To shorv a long-term action that is J
weight. in progress. It may not be happening a
Dan is lr.riting a tetrr paper this at this exact moment.
a
semester.
He is majoring in music.
t
a
Ife is wearing a sweater. To describe a state or condition, t
I{e is sitting near the window.
i
using the follorving verbs: .sil, slnrrrl.
a
u)ear, sleep.
a
a
a
Lnxcuncr Ncrrs a
when the subject is doing two or more things, we don't repeat the verb a
be after artd. a
Children are making a snowman and tltr-oui,ng snowballs. a
a
Exr-p.ctsr.2 Answer the following questions with a complete sentence. a
a
ExRt'tplr: What's Dan niajoring in? I
IIe's majoring ir-r music.
a
1. Why's Dan's English improving?
a
a
2. What instrument is he learning to play? t
3. Hou, many courses is he taking this semester?
T
I
4. \trhy's Dan unhappy about the food? t
5. \Mtat are Dan and his roommate tliinking about doing? a
t
6. What's Dan wearing now? a
7. \\rhat are you r11;r jodng in? a
t
8. I{orv nrany r:redit irours are you taking/ a
1 ir6 Lesson Six
I
J
I
5"3 Spelling of the -ing Form
Add -i,ngto most verbs. eat eating

(Note: Do not drop the y of the base fonn.) go going
study studying
For a one-syllable verb that ends in a consonant plan planning

* vowel + consonant (CVC), double the final JJJ
consonant and, add -ing. CVC
stop stopping
JTJ
CVC
si t sitting
JJJ
CVC
Do not double a final u), r, or A. show showing

n-dx mixing
stay staying
For atwo-syllable verb that ends in CVC, double ref6r referring

the final consonant only if the last syllable is admit admitting
stressed.
begin beginning
When the last syllable of a two-syllable verb is listen listening

not stressed, do not double the final consonant. 6pen opening
6ffer offering
If the verb ends in a consonant * e, drop the Iive living

e before adding -i.ng. take taking
write writing
Exrncrsr 3 Write the -ing form of the \erb. (Two-syllable verbs that end in
CVC have accent marks to show which syllable is stressed.)
Exluprrs: play playing

makinq
make
1. plan 6. hdppen
2. open 7. stay
a)
d. sit 8. grow
4. begin 9. marry
5. hurry 10. grab
Present Continuous Tense 157

11. \\rrlte 16. drive
12. flx t7. u'ait
13. wipe 18. serve
t4. carry 19. risit
15. drink 20. prefer
Exrncrsr 4 Fill in the blanks with the present continuous tense of the verb
in parerrtheses ( ). Use correct spelling.
ExRt',tptg: Dan
ie wdting a letter.
fttite)
1. He in a dorm.
(li uc)
2. Dan and his roommate rveight.

(goitt)
o
D. Dan in chemistry.
(ttot/nrujor)
4. child ren outside a snowlnan and snowballs.
(noke) (lltrow)
5. Dan a term paper on music theory.
(rurite)
6. in the blanks with the correct verb fbrm.
(.fiu)
t- My teacher corrections.
(make)
8. We the textbook.
(ttse)
9. We reading now.
(rtot/study)
10. We Exercise 4.
(.finislt)
Exrncrsr 5 Make a true affirmative statement or negative statement about

your activities now with the words given.
Exnuprrs: wear a watch

I'm wearir-rg a watch (now).
drink coffee
I'nt not drinking coffee (now).
1. sit in the back of the room 6. look out thc rn indon-

2. speak my native language 7. look at the clialkboarri
3. pay attention 8. u'rite a compositior'.
4. ask quesliorls 9.
use n'ry textbool<
5. lcarn the present cor-rtilrtrous tense 10. u'ear.jeans
r58 Lesson Six

ExsnctsE 6 Make a true affirmative statement or negative statement about
yourself with the words given. Talk about a long-term action.
ExRtqptrs, look for a job

Im looking for a job.
live in a hotel
I'm not living in a hotel.
1. Iook for a new apartment 7. write a term paper

2. learn a lot of English 8. try to understand American customs
3. gain weight 9. meet Americans
4. lose weight 10. learn how to drive
5. spend a lot of money 11. live in a dorm
6. save my money 12. plan to return to my hometown
6 ' 4 Questions with the Present Continuous Tense
Dan is wearing a sweater.

Is Dan wearing a hat? No, he isn't.
What is Dan wearing?
Why isn't Dan wearing a hat?
Who is wearing
a hat?
Children are playing.

Are they playing inside? No, they aren't.
Where are they playing?
Why aren't they playing inside?
LnNcuncr Norrs
When the question is "What . . doing?" we usually answer with a different
verb. Compare these questions and answers.
What's he doing? He's utrtting aletten
What are the children doing? They're playi.ng in the snow.
What a?"e you doing? I'm studyi,ng verbs.
Present Continuous Terrse r59

t
J
ffi about what this class is I
doing now. Another student will ansu,er. t
ExRt,tplr: we/use the textbook now
t
A. Are we using the textbook norv? a
B. Yes, we are. I
J
1. the teacher/wear a sweater 9. we/practice the past e
2. the teacher/write on the chalkboard tense I
a)
o. the teacher/erase the chalkboard 10. we/review Lesson 5 t
4. tl're teacherAit at the desk 11. we/make mistakes J
5. the teacher/take attendance L2. what/the teacher/wear J
6. the teacher/explain the grammar 13. where/the teacher/stand t
7. the teacher/help the students
or sit a
8. we/practice the present continuous
14. what exercise/we/do J
tense 15. what/you/think about t
a
8 Ask a question about a long-term action with the words given.
J
Exrncrsr
Another student will answer.
J
a
Exeyprp: you/study math this semester a
A. Are you studying math this semester?
B. I
t
Yes, am. a
a
1. you/plan to buy a car 6. your English/improve a
2. you/study biology this semester 7. your vocabulary/grow
o
a
D. you/take other courses this
semester
8. the teacher/help you t
9. the students/make progress a
you/look for a new apartment
you/look for a job
10. you/learn about other students'
countries
I
a
a
Exrncrsr I fuk and answer questions about Dan's letter. I
a
ExRupu, Dan/lose weight
A. Is Dan losing weight? I
B. No, he isn't. He's gaining weight. (
I
1. Dan/live in an aoartment 5. Dan/wear a new s'*,eater a
2. he/major in art 6. he/take/lS credit hours I

3. he/study the guitar 7. q,hatlDan/mqior in (
4. Iiis roornmale/n-rajor in cl'remistry 8. how many courses/Dan/tak,,- (
(
(
160 Six
Y!.+;1S<'*;!* :l:=ir is='
EuncrsE 1 0 Read each sentence. Then ask a wh- question about the words
in parentheses ( ). Another student will answer.
Er-rupu: We're doing an exercise. flMhat exercise)
A What exercise are we doing?
B. We're doing Exercise 10.
1. We're practicing a tense. (What tense)
2. We're using a textbook. (What kind of book)
3. You're listening to the teacher. (S'hV)
4. The teacher's helping the students. (\['hV)
5. I'm answering a question. (Which question)

6. We're practicing questions. (What kind of questions)
7. Your English ability'is improving. (Why)
8. Your Iife is changing. (How)
9. You'te taking courses. (How many courses)
Exrncrsr II Read each Statement. Then write a question about the words in
parentheses ( ). Write an answer. Refer to Dan's letter 0n page
154.
ExRt,tplrt Dan is qnting a letter. (to whonr) oR (v,ho . . . to)

A. Who is he writing to? oR To whom is he writing?
B. He's writing to his family.
1. He 's learning a new instrument. (what instmment)
A.
B.
2. He's gaining weight. (why)
A.
B.
His roommate is studying. (who with) on (with whom)

4..
B.

I
4. He's wearing sometiring nern'. (what)
t
a
A.
I
B. I
5. His Englisir is improving. (why) I
A,
I
I
B.
I
6. He's taking courses. (how many courses) l
A. I
B.
I
{
7. He 's meeting new students. (what kind)
t
A. t
B. I
I
Expncrsr 12 f iU in the trlanks vith I'm or I'm nlt + the -ing form of the I
verb in parentheses ( ) to tell if you are doing these things now I
or at this general point in time. Then ask another student if he I
0r she is doing this activity now. The other student will answer. I
(You may work with a partner.)
(
l'm planning
I
Exnuplr,st (plan) to buy a computer. (
A. Are you planning to buy a computer? I
B. Yes, I am.
(
rt ^___, l'm not learninq
(.learTt_) to drive a car. (
A. Are you learning to drive a car? (
B. No, I'm not.
{
(wear) Jeans. I
(hold) a pencil.
I
(chew) gum.
(think) about the weekend.
(live) in a dorm.
(plan) to take a va.cation.
(lool<) for a.job.
(plan) to buy a computer.
(take) a computer class this semester.
(get) tired.
162 Lesson SLx

ii. (gain) rveight.
12. (leam) about the history of the Li.S.

13. (learn) how to drive.
Exrncrsr 13 A woman is calling her husband from a cell phone in her car.
Fill in the blanks t0 complete the conversation.
A. Hello?
B. Hi. It's Betty.
A. are you callinq
Oh, hi, Betty. This connection is so noisy. Where
(etatttltlc)
from?
B. I
(1)
from the car. I
(2)
the
cell phone.
A. home now?
(3)
B. No, I'm not. I'm driving to the airporl.
A. whv to the airport?
(4)
B. I'm going to pick up a client of nrine.
A. I can't hear you. There's so much noise.
B. Airplanes overhead. They're very low.
(5)
-
A. I can't hear you. Talk louder please.
B. as loud as I can. I to
(6)
the airport to pick up a client of mine. I'm late. Her plane
norv and I'rn stuckt in traffic. I'm getting
(8)
nervous. Cars aren't moving.
A. whv -. n'roving?
B. There's an accident on the highway.

A. I u,orry about you.
(10)
B. 01 course, I'm wearing my seat belt.
A. That's good.
B. What now?
(11)
\\'lrt'rt yott art' slut'k ir trafl'it', .\'()u ( an't rrrolt' lrt'r':ursr. otlrt r c'ars; ar('lt'l ruoving.

t
A. I the computer. I'rn c-.- t
(12)
information about cars on the Irrternet.
(ls)
1U^
I
a
B. What
(1+)
doing? t
A.
-
The kids? -
I can't hear you.
a
a
B. Yes, the kids. a
A. [,Ieg her a
homework.
(15) (16)
t
B. Why Meg doing her homework?
t
(17) a
A. She doesn't have any homework today. a
B. dinner for the kids?
t
(18) a
A. No, I'm not preparing dinner. I foryouto come t
home and prepare the dinner.
(1e)
t
a
B. Please don't wait for me. Oh. Ttaffic is linally moving. Talk to you J
Iater.
J
e
Before You Read 1. S/hat American behaviors are strange to you?
a
2. Is your behavior in the u.S. different from your behavior in your
country? t
e
Read the folio'*,ing letter. Pay special attention to verbs-simple present a
and present continuous.
t
I
a
a
t
a
a
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
(
(
(
I
t64 Lesson Six
a
a
In the School Cafeteria
Dear Family,
I'm sitting in the school cafeteria now. I'm writing this letter between
classes. I see many strange
behaviors and customs around me. You always
ask me about American customs, so I think you probably want to know
about life in the U.S.
I'm looking at a young couple at the nex[ table. The young man and
woman are touching, holding hands, and even kissing. It looks strange
because people never kiss in public in our country. At another table, a young
man and woman are sitting with a baby. The man is feeding the baby. Men
never feed the baby in our country. Why isn't the woman feeding the baby?
Two women are putting on make-up. I think this is bad public behavior.
These women are wearing shorts. In our country, women never wear shorts.
A group of stuCents is listening to the radio. The music is very loud.
Their music is bothering other people, but they don't care. I'm sitting far
from them, but I hear their music.
A young man is resting his feet on another chair. His friend is eating
a hamburger with his hands. Why isn't he using a fork and knife?
These kinds of behaviors look bad to me. I'm fying to understand them,
but I'm having a hard time. I still think many of these actions are rude.6
Your son,
Ali
6.5 Contrast of Present Continuous and Simple Present

Fonlr
He sometimes wears a suit. He is wearing jeans now.

He doesn't usually wear shorts. He isn't wearing a belt.
Does he ever wear a hat? Is he wearing a T-shirt?
Yes, he does. No, he isn't.
When does he wear a hat.? What is he wearing?
Who wears a hat? Who is wearing a T-shirt?
(continued)
" Rrrr/r, nt<':rns iuryxrlitt'
Present Continuous Tense r65

l'he Fresicient the Write Use tl..e siurple plesent tense to
House. talk :rbout a generzrl truth, a
We usually learn about American liabitual activitl,, or a custom.
life.
Americans eat hamburgers with
their hands.
Ali is writing to his family norv. Use the present continuous for an
He is looking at Americans in the action that is in progress at tl"ris
cafeteria. moment.
He is tryrng to understand Use the present continuous for a
American customs. longer action rhat is in progress al
He is learning more and more this general time.
about Americans all the time.
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. When we use Liueinthe simple present, we mean that this is a persorr's
home. In the present continuous, it shows a temporary, short-ternr
residence.
?s liuing in a dorm this semester.
Ali
His farnily Liues in Jordan.
2. "What do you do (for a living)?" asks about your job. "Shat are 1,or-r
doing?" asks about your activity at this moment.
What does she do for a living? She's a nurse.
What rs she doi,ng? She's waiting for the bus.
\R q,, :.t .1
l4
' 'i
ExrRclsr fwo students meet in the cafeteria and discuss American

customs and customs 0f their native country. Fill in the blanks
with the correct form of the verb in parentheses ( ). Practice
the simple present and the present continuous.
A. Hi. What are you doin^ here?

(erantplc: Aou/tlo)
B. I lunch. I always lunch at this
(1 eat) (2 cat)
time. But I American behavior and customs
(3 also/obsarue)
A. What do you mean?
B. Wt ll, look at that nlan over there. He an eal'nr]g.
(4 tt'r'ttr')
It looks so strange. Onlv wonten ea.rrulgs rr1 n]]

(5 rt,r'trr)
country.
166 Lesson Six

A. It es strange. And look at that woman. She three
(6 uear)
earrings in one ear!
B. Andshe running shoes with a dress. In my country
(7 wear)
people only running shoes for sports activities.
(8 use)
A. Look at that student over there. He a colored pen
(9 use)
to mark his textbook. In my country we never tn
(10 write)
our textbooks because they to the college, not to
(11 belottg)
the students.
B. Many college activities are different here. For example, my English
teacher usually at the desk in class. In my country,
(12 sit)
the teacher always in class. And the students al-
(13 stand)
ways when the teacher the

(14 stand, up) (15 enta)
room.
A. And college students always English or another
(16 study)
foreign language. Here, nobody lcrows another language. My Ameri-

can roommate five courses this semester, but no
(17 take)
foreign language.
B. By the way, how many classes this semester?
(18 you/take)
A. Four. In my country I usually (ts taka)
eight courses a
semester, but my adviser here says I can only take four.
B. I have to go now. My girlfriend forme at the library.
(20 utait)
&"6 Action vs. Nonaction Verbs
AIi is learning about American He knows American customs are

customs. different.
Ali is wearing a heavy coat. IIe hates winter.
Ali is buying his textbooks. The books cost $85.
Prcsent Continuous Tense t67

Larueuncr, Ncrrs
1. We do not usually use the present continuous tense with certain verbs,
called nonaction verbs. These verbs describe a state or condition,
not an action. We use the simple present tense, even when rve talk
about now. Nonaction action verbs are:
believe hrow owrr seem
cost like prefer understand
hate Iove remember want
hear need see
2. Hear and see are nonaction verbs. Listen and look are action verbs.
Some students are listening to the radio. Ali hears the music.
Ali is looking at students in the cafeteria. He sees some strange
behaviors.
Exrncrsr l5 Fiill in the blanks with the simple present or the present I
CO ntinuous tense of the verb in parentheses ( ).

(
I
underatand
ExRNpr-rs: I_ the explanation norv. I
(uttderstand)
(
am writin1
now.
(tor'ite) I
I
1. I English this semester. I
(studa)
(
2. We the textbook now.
(use) I
-- (
3. We a lot of practice with verb tenses.
(need) (
4. We action and nonaction verbs (
(compare)
(
5. I every grammar rule. I

(not/remetnber)
I
6. I the chalkboard. i
7, I at the clock now. I at

(not/look) (look) ,
my book. I
8. I my dictionary now.
(not/need)
9. We a composition now.
(not/tLttit.e)
10. We the students in the next room.

( ttot/ltcur)
l6t Lesson Six

11. We about nonaction rrerbs.
(leant)
12. We a lot of gramma.r.
1inow)
.F F E+i
,+J
\*€. S Think, Haue, and the Sense Perception Verbs
He is thinking about his family. IIe thinks that touching in public

is bad.
He is having lunch in the He has free time now.

cafeteria.
He is having new experiences in He has new American friends.
the U.S.
His friend has the flu now.
He is looking at a woman in This behavior looks bad to him.

shorts.
He is smelling the coffee. The coffee smells delicious.
LnNcuncE NorEs
ihink can be an action or a nonaction verb.
. When we think about something, th.irzk is an action verb.
. When thi,nk means to have an opinion about something, think is
a nonaction verb.
2. Haae can be an action or a nonaction verb.
. When haae shows possession, relationship, or illness, it is a nonac-
tion verb.
. When haae mearrs to experience something or to eat or drink
something, it is an action verb.
3. The sense perception verbs (look, taste, feel, smell) can be action or
nonaction verbs.
. When the sense perception verbs describe a state, they are nonac-
tion verbs.
. When they describe an action, they are action verbs.
Exencrsr l6 n'iUin the blanks with the simple present or the present
continuous tense of the verb in parentheses ( ).
ExRmprrs: r Jhi$nl
_1rn(tlcink) about my family.
t
think that life in the U.S. is not perfect.
(think)

(
She the flou,ers.
I
(smell) t
sF ''- The fl o\\'el-s
(sntall)
beautiful. I
I
They about tlieir childrer-r.
(tltink) t
They that their cl-rildren are wonderful. I
(tlti ttk)
I
a good tir-ne in the U.S. (
(ltot'c)
a lot of new friends. I
(ltarc) I
a lot of free tirne. I
(not/lruae)
(
I\{y friend a cold now and he can't go out
(lruue) I
today, so I lunch alone now. I
(lurue)
0
I
He at a car now.
(look) I
10. The car new. I
( loctk)
I
I
Exrnclsr 17 fiU in the blanks with the simple present or the present I
continuous of the verb in parentheses ( ). Use the simple {
present for regular activity and v'rith nonaction verbs. I
(
ExRxpr.Es, Ali wantg to understand American behavior.
(vattt) I
He
ie looking at some Americans in the cafeteria now.
(
(loctk)
1. Ali a letter now.

0rtrite)
2. He in the school cafeteria now.
(sit)
3. He a couple with a baby.
(see)
4. He often to the cafeteria between classes.

Go)
5. He to his family once a week.
(write)
6. He that his family to
(tltittk) ftLtarfi)
knou, about American customs.
7. He at a young man and woman.
(look)
They hands.
(hold)
170 Lesson Six

8. This behavior bad in his country.
(look)
9. He about American custonts now.

(tlLink)
10. Some women shorts now.
(toear)
11. Women in Ali's country never shor[s.

(tttear")
12. American customs strange to him.

(seem)
Exrncrsr l8 Read each sentence. Write the negative form of the underlined
word, using the word(s) in parentheses ( ).
Exauplrs: Ali is looking at Americans. (people from his country)
He ien't lookinq at people from hia country,
He knows about Arab customs. (American customs)

He doean't know about American cuatome.
1. The father is feeding the baby. (the mother)
2. AIi's sitting in the cafeteria. (in class)
3. He understands Arab customs. (American customs)
4. American men and women sometimes kiss in public. (Arab men and
women)
Americans use their hands to eat a hamburger. (to eat spaghetti)
6. A man is wearing an earring in one ear. (in both ears)
7. Americans seem strange to him. (Arabs)
8. An'rerican men like to take care of a baby. (Ali)
Present Continuous Tens€' 171

9. American women often \,vear shorts in the summer'. (i\losic:ii \\-(riiii.l
never)
ExrRctss 1 9 nead each sentence. Then write a Aes/no question about the
Exluple s, Alnerican women sometimes wear earrings. (American men/ever)
Do American men ever wear an earrinq? Yee, t.hey do.
The women are wearing shorLs. (the men)

Are the men wearinq ehorte? No, they aren't.
1. Ali is writing. (his homework)
2. He's watching people. (American people)
3. He understands Arab customs. (Anrerican customs)
4. American men wear shorts in the sumrner. (American women)
5. The man is eating. (a hot dog)
Exrncrsr 20 Read each statement. Then write a wh- question about the
words in parentheses ( ). An answer is not necessary.
ExRvplrs' A young man is resting his feet on a chair. (why)
Why ie he reetinq hie feet on a chair?
Ali lives in the U.S. (where/his family)

Where doee hie family live?
1. Ali is writing a letter. (to whom) on (who to)
2. Ali r,l,ants to know about American customs. (why)
r'7 2 Lesson Six

3. Tko women are putting on make-up. (where)
4. American men and women touch and hold hands in public. (why)
5. Ali writes to his family. (how often)
6. The man isn't using a fork. (why/not)
7. Women don't weax shor[s in some countries. (why)
8. Americans often wea^r blue jeans. (why)
9. "Custom" means tradition or habit. (what/"behavior")
Uses of Tenses
General truths Americans speak English.

Oranges grow in Florida.
Regular activity, habit I always speak English in class.

I sometimes eat in the cafeteria.
I visit my parents every FYiday.
Americans shake hands.

Japanese people bow.
Place of origin Miguel comes from El Salvador.

Marek comes from Poland.
With nonaction verbs She has a new car.

I like the U.S.
You look great today.

We are reviewing now.
I am looking at page 174 now.
A long action in progress Dan is learning how to play the

at this general time
He is gaining weight.
A descriptive state She is wearing shorts.

He is sitting near the door.
The teacher is standing.
1. lnclude be with a coni.inuous tense.

ie
He^working now.
2. Use the conect word order in a question.

are you
Where )€u+e going?
dont vou
WhV puadn+ like New York?
Don't use the present continuous with a nonaction verb.

haa
She is*aving her own computer.
4. Use the -s form when the subject is he, sh,e, or i,t.

has 6
He ha#e a new car. He like to drive.
Don't use be with a simple present tense verb.

I\r need a new computer.
Use do or does in a simple present ter:se question.
doea live
Where lives your mother?
l7 * Lesson Six
7- Don't use the -s form after does.
Where does he takes the bus?
Review the Editing Advice for the simple present tense on pages 7V72.
PART 1 Find the mistakes with the underlined words and correct them.
write C.
own9
ExRuPtgs: sheb.oi g a new bike now.
I'm not studying math this semester.
1. Why you
__:-a^ren't listening to me?
2. Usually I'm go home a.fter class.
3. I think that he's having trouble with this lesson.
4. She's thinking about her family now.
5. Does she needs help with her homework?
6. What kind of car do you have?
7. What he's studying now?
8. Does he has any children?
9. He's wearing jeans now.
10. My teacher speak English well.
11. I'm speak my native language at home.
L2. The baby sleeping now.
13. r,Vhen begins summer?
14. Where does your family lives?
19 Present Continuous Tense

' - 175
.,
't
PART 2 This is a conversation between two students, Alicia (A) and
Teresa (T), who meet in the school library. Fill in the blanks
with the simple present or the present continuous of the verb
in parentheses ( ).
T. Hi, Alicia.
A. Hi, Teresa. *ou, are You doino here?
(e:rampl.e: you/do)
T. I for a book on American geography. What about you?

(1 Look)
A. I
(2 return)
a book. to go for a cup of coffee?
(3 you/want)
T. I can't. I for my friend. We
(4 wait) (5 work)
on a geography project together, and we to finish
(6 need)
it by next week.
A. your geography class?
(7 Aou/li.ke)
T. Yes. I especially the teacher, Bob. He's ahandsome
(8 tike)
young man. He's very casual. He always jeans and
(9 wear)
a T-shirt to class. He an earring in one ear.
(10 haue)
A. That very strange to me. I
(11 see.n) (12 thirtk)
that teachers in the U.S. are very informal. How
the class? By lecturing?
(13 Bob/teach)
a
I
T. No. We
(14 usually/tLtork)
in small groups, and he i
us by walking around the classroom. i
(15 twtp)
I
A.
(16 h,e/giue)
hard tests? I
T. No. He in tests.
T
(17 not/belie,ue) I
A. whv
(18 hc/twt/beLieae)
in tests? I
T. He that students get too nervous during a test.
I
(19 think) I
He
(20 saa)
it's better to work on projects. This week i
we on city maps.
I
(21 work)
-
A. That interesting. a
T. whv
(22 sound)
me so many questions about my teacher?

a
(23 you/osk) (,
a
17 6 Lesson Six
4
\
\
A about taking a geog raphy course next semeste
Ier.
(24 tltink)
T Bob's very popular. Be sure to register early because his classes al-
ways quickly. Oh. I my

(25 fiLt) (26 see)
friend now. She toward us. I have to go now.
(27 utalk)
A. Good luck on your project.
T. Thanks. Bye.
PART 3 Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined
word.
ion'f,
EXlUplf : Teresa is in the library. She at home.
1. Alicia wants to go for a cup of coffee. Teresa to

go for a cup of coffee.
2. Teresa is looking for a book. Alicia for a book.
3. They are talking about school. They about the

news.
4. They have time to talk now. They time for a cup

of coffee.
5. Students in the geography class work in small groups. They
alone.
6. Alicia's teacher gives tests. Teresa's teacher
7. Teresa is waiting for a friend. Alicia for a friend.
8. The teacher seems strange to Alicia. He strange

to Teresa.
9. Alicia is returning a book. Teresa a book.

--
PART 4 Read each sentence. Then write a Aes/no question about the
ExRmptrt for a book. (a geography book)

Teresa is looking
le ohe lookinq for a qeoqraphy book? Yes, ehe is,
l. Bob likes projects. (tests)
Present Continuous Tense t77

2. Alicia has time now" (feresa)
3. They are tatking about their classes. (their teachers)
4. Bob wears jeans to class. (ever/a suit)
5. Alicia wants to go for coffee. (feresa)
6. American teachers seem strange to Alicia. (to Teresa)
7. Teresa is working on a geography project. (Alicia)
PART 5 Read each sentence. Then write a question with the words in
parentheses ( ). An answer is not necessary.
ExRuptgt Bob is popular. (WhV)

Why ie he VoVular?
1. Bob sounds interesting. (Why)
2. Bob doesnrt like tests. (WhV)
3. Teresa and her friend are working on a project. (What kind of project)
4. Teresa studies in the library. (How often)
5. Tbresa is looking for a book. (What kind)
6. Teresa is waiting for her friend. (Why)
7. Her classmates aren't miting a term paper. (Wtw)
178 Lesson Six

-I
CI.ASSROOM L Think of a place (cafeteria, airport, train stdtion, bus, playground, church,
ACTIVITIES oper4 movie theater, laundromat, office at this school, kindergarten class-
room, restaurant, department store, etc.) Pretend you are at this place. Write
three or four sentences to tell wllat people in this place are doing. Other
students-will guess where you are.
ExRuplr: People are walking fast.

People are carrying suitcases.
People are standing in long lines.
They're buymg tickets.
Guess: Are you at the airporb?
Pretend you axe calling from your cell phone. You are telling your family
where you are. FiU in the blanks to tell what you and other people are
doing. Then find aparhrer dnd see how many of your sentences match your
parhrer's sentences.
a. I'm at the supermarket. I'm Do you need any-

thing while I'm here?
b. I'm in my car. I'm

c. I'm in the school library. I'm . People
me to be quiet because I'm

to you on my cell phone.
d. I'm in a taxi. I'm on my way home. I'm you to

Iet you lorow that
e. I'm at the bus stop. I for the bus, but it's late.
I don't want you to worry.
f. I'm at a shoe store. I
8- I'm at the playground with the. kids. The kids
h. ['m at church. The pastor is but nobody is listening.

Some people
i I'm at the movies. I can't ta]k now because the movie
j. I'm in the bedroom. I have to talk softly because my husband
k. I'm in class now. I can't talk. The teacher

DI SCU SS ION In a small group or with the entire class, discuss behaviors that are strange to
you. What American behaviors are not polite in your native culture?
OUTSIDE Go to the school cafeteria, student union, or other crowded place. Sit there for
ACTIVITY a while and look for unusual behaviors. Write down some of the unusual things
you see. Report back to the class.
Internet Activity
Find the web site of a college in this city. Answer the following questions:
1. Where is it?
2. What's the tuition?
3. Does this college have evening classes?
4. Does this college have more than one location?
5. Does it have a graduate program?
6. Does it have dormitories?
7. Does it have ESL classes?
8. When is the next registration?
Jl
a
a
t
a
a
I 80 Lesson Six
I
t
\
G RAMMAR
Future Tenses-Wi,ll and Be Going To
Comparison of Tenses
C ON TEXT
Registering for Wedding Gifts
Jason and Katie-Starting a Married Life
LESSON FOCUS
We have two ways of talking about the future. We
can either tse will or be goi,rzg [o plrrs a base form to
talk about the future.
We ui,LL study the future tense.
The teacher i,s goi,ng to erplai,n the grammar.
r8r
Before You Read 1. When you go to a wedding, what kind of gift do you buy?
2. Do you ever give money as a gift?
Read the following conversation. Pay special attention to future tense

verbs.
Registering for Gifts

A. I have an invitation to my cousin's wedding.
B. Are you going to go?
A. 0f course. [t's going to be in a beautiful hotel. Two hundred fifty people
will be there.
B. What is the tradition about buyrng gifts in the U.S.?
A. Some people give money.
B. Money? Is that a good gift?
A. Yes. They're a young couple. They'll need a lot of money to start their
new home. But I'm not going to $ve money. I'm going to buy something
for their new home.
B. What are you going to buy?
A. I don't know yet. I'm going to go to the department store and check the
"bridal registry."
B. What's that?
A. When a couple is planning a wedding, they often register for gifts at a
Did you know...? store. That means they choose gifts that they want to receive. When I go
to the store, I'll look at the list and see what they want.
ln the U.S., the B. Is this an American custom?
average wedding A. Yes. I think it's a good idea. This way, my cousin and his new wife will
for 250 guests get exactly what they need. They won't have five toasters and six food
costs $ 15,000. processors.
182 Lesson Seven
-' --._.----.
B. I'm really shocked. In my country, we give the gifts that we want to give.
Ttre newlywedsr appreciate the gift even if they receive five of the same
thing.
A Well, our customs are dilferent.
B. Are your cousin and his bride going to open the gifts at the wedding?
A. Probably not. They'll open them at home. Then they're going to send
thank-you cards to the guests a few weeks later.
B. Aren't they going to thank the guests at the wedding?
A They rrilt if they can. But many guests will leave before the bride and
groom have a chance to thank them.
B. I'll never understand American customs.
A 0f course, you will. Maybe you wontt like them, but I'm sure you'll
understand them.
Future wlth Will
a gift.
money.
250 people at the wedding.
LaNcuncr Norrs
l. We use will vurth all persons to form the future tense. !V'iU doesn't
have an -s form.
I uill leaae. She will leaae.
2. We can make a contraction with the subject pronoun and wi,ll.
I will : I'11 It will : It'II
\aou will : You'll We will : We'll
He will : He'll They will : They'll
She will : She'll
3. Plat not after ui,U to form the negative. The contraction for will not
is uton't.
They u)on't open the gifts at the wedding.
You can put a frequency word between wi,ll and the main verb.
She will neuer understand American customs.
I Nanlyweds are the bride and groom soon after they get married.
Future Tenses; Comparison of Tenses 183

l
Exsncrsr I Fill in the blanks with an appropriate verb in the future tense.
Use wi,ll.
Exluptrt will be
The wedding in a church.
1. T\vo hundred guests at the wedding.

, Some people money as a gift.
3. Other people a present at a store.
4. Some people the list in the store to see what the
bride and groom want.
5. The newlyweds their presents at home.
7.2 Future with Be Goi,ng To
zun going to send a gift.

are going to take a gift to the wedding.
axe going to be musicians at the wedding.
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. In informal speech, going fo before another verb often sounds like
"gonna." We don't write "gonna." Listen to your teacher's pronuncia-
tion of going to in the following sentences:
He's going to buy dishes.
They're going to get married in a month.
Notr: We often use the preposition in. with the future to mean after.
2. We often shorten going to go to goi,ng.
He zs goi.ng to go to the wedding. : He is going to,.the wedding.
3. Wd don't pronounce "gonna" before a noun.
He's going to the wedding. (Pronounce: going to)
Exrncrsr 2 Fill in the blanks with an appropriate verb in the future tense.
Use ba going to.
Exluplr, *., are 7oinq to thank the guests at the wedd.ing.
1. The newlyweds thank-you cards to all the

guests.
2. They the gifts at home.
184 Lesson Seven

n
ir. something useful for their new home.
4. After the wedding in the church, the guests

to a restaurant for dinner.
5. There a lot of people at the wedding.
-"?
€=
A GIF Will and Be Goi,ng ?o-Uses
Prediction The newlSnveds wiII be very happy The newl;,weds are going to be very
together. happy together.
Fact Some people will give money. Some people are going to give money.
PlarL They are going to get married on

March 6.
I am going to buy a gift.
Promise I wilf always love you.
Offer to help A. firis gift box is heavy.
B. I'U carry it for you.
LnNcuncr Norss
1. Use either ui,Ll or be going to for facts about the future and for
predictions.
2. When we have a plan to do something, we usually use be going to.
3. When we make a promise or offer to help, we usually use will.
Exencrsr 3 Tell if you have plans to do these things 0r not. Use be goi,ng to.
Exnuptr' meet a friend after class
I'm (not) going to meet a friend after class.
1. get something to eat after class

2. watch TV tonight
3. eat dinner at home tonight
4. go to the library this week
5. go shopping for groceries this week
6. stay home this weekend
Future Tenses; Comparison of Tenses r85

7. take a vaeation this year
,
il 8. move (to a different apartment) this year

i
i 9. buy a car this year
.:
I
I
I
I
Exrncrsr 4 Teil if you predict that these things are going to happen 0r not
i in this class. Use ba goi,ng to.
tI
i
t+ EXnupl,f: we/finish this lesson today
We are going to finish this lesson today.
il
1. the teacher/give a test soon 7. we/frnish this book by the end
2. the test/be hard of the semester
3. most students/pass the test 8. the next test /cover the future
tense
4. I/pass the test
9. weftrave a parff at the end of
5. the teacher/give everyone anA the semester
6. my English/irnprove
Exrncrsr,S Fiil in the blanks to complete these statements. Use be goi,ng

to.
Exlurts' I don't understand the meaning of a word. I

'm goinq to look it up in
my dictionary.
1. It's hot in here. I a window.
2. It's too noisy in this house. I can't study. I the

.library.
3. She's hungry. She dinner now.

4. My mother in Poland always worries about me. I
to tell her that I'm fine.
5. We don't have any milk in the house. When I go out shopping,
some milk.
She plans to be a doctor. She medical school
next year.
7. I'm not happy with my job. and look for
another one.
8. next week. Here's my new address.
9. My parents miss me very much. They next
month to visit for three weeks.
186 Lesson Seven

10. There's a great new movie at the Garden Theater. My friends and
I tomorrow night. Do you want to go with us?
=S,+F-+!i+"rss:r:i ; : . i
[xrcrsr 5 Tell if you predict that these things will happen 0r not in the
next 50 years. Use usi,ll. You may work with a partner or in a
small group.
Exlptptg, people/have more free time
I think people won't have more free tin're. They will spend more time at their
jobs and less time with their families.
1. there/another world war

2. the economy of the U.S./get worse
3. people in the U.S./have fewer children
4. Americans/live longer
5. health carelimprove
6. cars/use solar energy2
7. divorce/increase
8. crime/get worse
9. people/get tired of computers
10. technology/continue to grow
Exncrsr 7 Some friends of yours are going to have a birthday soon, and
you want to buy them a present 0r d0 something special for
them. What will you buy or do for these people?
EHHTLT: Maria's birthday is in the winter.

{'ll buy her a sweater. oR I'Il take her skiing.
1. Bill loves to go fishing.
2. Tina loves to eat in restaurants.
3. Carl needs a new radio.
4. Jim has a new CD player.
5. Lisa loves the beach in the summer.
6. Tom loves movies.
'Solor atergy cornes fronr l.ltr. srrrr.
a Future Tenses; Comparison of Tenses 187

a
I
(
Exsnctsr 8 A man is proposing marriage to a woman. He is making (
promises. Fill in the blanks to complete these statements. (
will be I
Exeuptg' I a good husband to you.
I
1. I love you very much. I (always) you. (
I
2. I want to make you happy. I everything I can
to make you happy. {
a
3. I don't have a lot of money, but I and try to
a
make money.
4. We children, and I
good father to them.
I
5. We old together.
6. We best friends and take care of each other.
7. You are the only woman for me. I (not)
another woman.
Exrncrss 9 Offer to help in these situations using will + an appropriate

verb.
ExRuptrt A. I have to move next Sirnday. It's so much work.

B.
Don't worry. l'll help you pack.
1. A. My hands are full. I need to open the door.

B. I
{
2. I need stamps, but I have no time to go to the post office. (
B. I'm going to the post office. (
a
A.-I cook every night. I'm tired of cooking.
{
B. Take abreak. tonight. a
(
4. A. I don't have experience with computers. I have to write my compo- (
sition on the computer.
I
B. Come to my house after class.
5. A. I always drive when we go to the country. I'm tired.

B. No problem. this time.
6. A. Let's go out to dinner tonigfrt.
188 Lesson Seven

B. I can't. I don't have any money.
A. No problem.
7. A. I can't pay my phone bill. I'm not working now and don't have
much money.
B. Don't worry. . You can pay rne back
next month.
8. A. The phone's ringing and I'm eating a sandwich. My mouth is full.
B. Finish your lunch.
T"€ Questions with Be Goi,ng To and, Wi,ll
Compare statements and questions with be going to.
They going to leave soon.

Are they going to leave tomorrow? No, they aren't.
\\hen are they going to leave?
\\hy arentt they going to leave tomorrow?
Who ls going to leave?
Compare statements and questions with u.rilJ:
She will eat lunch.

wix she eat a sandwich? Yes, she will.
\\hat wiU she eat for lunch?
\\hy wontt she eat a salad?
Who will eat lunch?
lilirlli:r ti i'
ExsRcrse l0 ast another student a Aes/no question with are Alu going to
about a later time today. Then ask a wh- question with the
words in parentheses ( ) whenever possible.
Exnuptrt listen to the radio (when)
A. Are )/ou going to listen to the radio tonight?
B. Yes, I am.
A. When are you going to listen to the radio?
B. After dinner.

1. watch TV (what show)
2. listen to the radio (when)
3. read the newspaper (what newspaper) I
4. eat dinner (with whom) oR (who . . . with)

I
5. take a shower (when) I
6. go shopping (why) (
(
7. call someone (w-hom)
(
8. use a computer (why) (
9. do your homework (when) (
(
(
Exrncrss II Ask another student a yes/no question with be going fo and the
words given. Then ask a uh- question with the words in I
parentheses ( ) whenever possible.
(
a
ExRuptgt study another English course after this one (which course)
A. Are you going to study another English course after this one?
B. Yes, I am.
A. Which course are you going to study?
B. I'm going to study level 4.
1. go back to your country (when) (why)
2. study something new (what)

3. look for a,job (when) I
I
4. get an A in this course (what grade)
I
5. transfer to another school (why) (which school) (
6. visit other American cities (which cities) !
(
7. buy a computer (why) (what kind) (
(
Exsncrsr l2 A l3-year-old girl is thinking about her grown sister and her
own future. She is asking herself these questions. Fill in the
blanks to complete the questions.
ExRuPle: My sister is married. Will I get married?
1. My sister has a wonderful husband. Will

wonderful husband?
2. My sister has two children. How many children
190 Lesson Seven

3. My sister is serious now that she has children. I'm not serious.
serious someday?
4. My sister has a college education. College is so exlpensive now.

Who my education?
5. My sister is a computer programmer. \Vhat

when I grow up?
6. I'm short now. I alrn ays
short or tall like my

sister?
l. My sister lives in Boston now. Where 2
8. There are a lot of job opportunities in Boston now.
a lot of job opportunities there when I grow up?
7.5 Future Tense + Time/If Clauses
When I go to the store, I wiU look at the list of gifts.

If the newlyweds need dishes, I \Mill buy dishes for them.
I will go to the wedding if I get an invitation.

She will thank the guests before they leave.
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. The sentences in the chart have two clauses. We use the future tense
only in the inain clause; we use the simple present tense in the time
clause/i/ clause.
2. If the time or z/clause comes first, we separate the two clauses with
a comma.
,tA c/arr.se is a group of words that has a subject antl a verb. Some senten<'es have nrore than otrt' clause.

Exsncrsr l3 tnis is an old fable.a It's the story of a young lady. She is
carrying a pail of milk to the market. As she walks there, she
thinic about what she will do with the money that the milk witl
bring. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb to
complete this story.
ExRt'tplrt When I uu"
a,ell
this milk, I
will buy
some eggs.
(seU) (buu)
1. Whenthe eggs
(h.etph)
,I
(haue)
manychickens.
2. I the chickens when they big.
3. When I the chickens, I

(sett) (haue)
to buy a preff new dress.
4. I to a party when I
(haoe)
my new
dres.s.
5. All the young men

(rwtice)
me when I
the dress.
6. When the men how pretty I am, they
(want)
to marry me.
Suddenly the young woman drops the milk pail and all the milk spills.
What lesson does this.story W to teach us?
Exrncrss 14 Complete each statement.

Exnuptgst when this class is over, l'll 0o home'
When this class is over,

1',11- qoin7 to qet eomethinq to eat.
1. When this semester is over,
2. When this class is over,
3. When I get home today,
4. When I graduate (or finish my courses at this school),
5. When I return to my country/become a citizen,

6. Whei I retire,
7. When I speak English better,
4
AJa.bl.e is an old story. It usually teaches us a lesson, called a moral.
192 Lesson Seven

Ererqsr 15 Complete each statement.
Extxpiist If I ddnk too much coffee, I won't eleep tonight.
If I drink too much coffee, l'm going to feel nervouo,
1. If I practice English,
2. If I don't study,
3. If I don't pay my rent,
4. If I pass this course,
5. If rve have a test next week,
6. If the teacher is absent tomorow,
7. If I find a good job, -

r*?r
Exrncrss 16 On the first day of class, a teacher is explaining the course to

the students. Fill in the blanls to complete this conversation
between a teacher (T) and his students (S).
t In this course, you are qoin7 f,o etudy English grammar.
(eaample: study)
You a few short compositions. Tomorrow, I

(l wri,tp)
you a list of assignments. Do you have any ques-

(2 sioe)
tions about this course?
.S:
Yes. How many tests
(3 haue)
t You will have 13 tests, one for each lesson in the book. If you're absent
from a test, you can make it up.6 If you the test,

(4 not ta,l@)
you an F on that test.

(5 get)
S: us about the tests ahead of time?

(6 tpu)
6
If you are absent on the day of a test, the teacher expects you to take it at a later time.

t Oh, yes. I'11 always tell you about a test a few days before.
S: the midterm exam?

(7 gi,ae)
t I'm going to give you the midterm exarn in April.

S: very hard?
(8 be)
{
T If you it won't be hard.
I (9 stuna)
i
S: What in this course?
I (10 stttd.u)
il
T: You'll study verb tenses, count and noncount nouns, and comparison of
a{iectives.
S: everything in this book?

(11 Jinish)
t Yes, I think we'll finish everything.
S: over?
(12 be)
T: The semester will be over6 in June. Tomorrow I
(13 giue)
you a course outline with all this information.
Exr,ncrse l7 tfrite two questions to ask your teacher about this course.
EHMprgs, Witt there be a teet on thio lesson?

When will you qive ua the next teat?
Extncrss l8 A young woman (A) is going to leave her country t0 go to the

U.S. Her fpiend (B) is asking her questions. Fill in the blanks to
complete this conversation.
A. I'm so happy! I'm going to the U.S. a

are you 0oin0 to leave? a
B. When
(euampl,e: kaue) (
A. I'm going to leave next month. t(
B. So soon? anything before you (
(1 buu) (2 lzaoe)
(
o
To be oosr means to be finished. (
a
(
194 Lesson. Seven (
(
A Yes. I'm going to buy warrn clothes for the winter. I hear the winter
there is very cold.
B. Where
(3 be)
A. I',ll be in Ann Arbor, Michigan.
B. Where ?
(4 tiae)
A. I'm not sure. When I there, I

(5 get) (6 decide)
where to live.
B. in the U.S.?
(7 uork)
A. No, I'm not going to work. I have a scholarship. I'm going to study
at the University of Michigan
B. What
(8 studA)
A. I'm go ing to study to be a computer analyst.
B. When to our country?

(9 retutn)
A. when I
(10 return) (11 graduate)
B. When
(12 you/graduate)
A. In four years.
B. That's a long time! me?

(13 miss)
A. Of course, I'11 miss you.
B. to me?
(14 urite)
A. Of course. I to you when I

(15 wtitc) (16 find)
a place to live.
rlf,l:n'i[
Exrncrsr l9 A young woman is planning to get married. Her friend is asking

her questions about her plans. Fill in the blanks to complete
this conversation.
A. I'm getting married!
B. That's wonderful! Congratulations.

Are you qoinq to have
(etamplc: lt.aue)
big wedding?

A. No, we're going to have a small wedding. We
(1iruite)
about 50 people.
B. Where
(p be)
A. It'll be at St. Peter's Church. We a reception?

(3 hnue)
at a Korean restaurant after the wedding.
B. a wedding dress?
(4 bua)
A. No, I my sister's dress for the wedding. Then, for

I (5 use)
the reception, I a traditional Korean dress.

(6 wear)
B. Where after you get married?

(7li.oe)
A. For a few years, we with Kim's parenLs. When

(8 liae)
Kim college and a job,

(9 Jinish) (10 set)
our own apartment.

(11 set)
B. You're going to live with your in-laws? I can't believe it

A. h my country, it'S common. My in-laws are very nice. I'm sure it
a problem. We children
(12 not/be) (13 rwt/lmue)
right away.
B. here for the wedding?

(14 come)
A No, my pa.fents aren't going to come. But a month after the wedding,
a trip to Kore4 and Kim can meet my

' (15 tnl@)
parents there.
B. married?
(16 set)
A. On May 15. I hope you'll be able to attend. We

(17 smd)
you an invitation.
B. I glad to attend.
(18 be)
7
A receptimt is a party.
196 Lesson Seven

Before You Read 1. Do you think life is hard for newlyweds? In what way?
, In your community, do parents help their children after they get
ma.ried?
Read the following article. Pay special attention to verb tenses: simple
present, present continuous, and future.
Jason and Katie-Starting a Married Life

Jason and Ifutie are newlyweds. The wedding is over, the honeymoon
was great, the gifts are opened, and their life as a married couple isbeginning.
fitey are learning that they have many responsibilities as a married couple.
Ifutie works as a nurse full time. She doesn't work in a hospital. She
goes to people's homes and helps them there. Jason isn't working now. He's
still attending college. He's in his last year. He's studying to be a lawyer.
After classes every day, he studies at home 0r goes to the law library at his
college. He's going to graduate next June. When he gfaduates, he will have
to take a special exam for lawyers. If he passes it, he'll get a good job and
make good money. But when he starts to work, he'll have to pay back
student loans. For now, they're both living on Katie's salary.
Katie and Jason are saving money little by little. They're planning to
buy a house some day. They are also thinking about having two children in
the future. But they want to be financially stable before they have children.
Their parents offer to help them, but they don't want to depend on their
parents, Because Jason is so busy with his studies and Ifutie is so busy with
her job, they rarely go out. Staying at home helps them save money.

7 "
6 Comparison of renses
Stvrpr,p Pnnsnur TnNsn
Jason studies law. r With facts

He doesn't study medicine. Law school costs a lot of money.
Does he study every day? o With customs
Yes, he does. Grown children don't like to depend on their
Where does he study? parents.
Why doesn't he study medicine?
o With habits and regular activities
Who studies medicine? Jason goes to the library almost every day.
Pnpsgl.ir CotrunfiJous TpNsn
They are saving money to buy a house. o With an action in progress now, at this moment
They aren't saving to buy a new ca.r. We are reviewing verb tenses now.
Are they saving for a vacation? o With a long-term action that is in progress. It may
No, they &ren't. not be happening at this exact moment.
How are they saving money? They are saving money.
Why aren't they saving to buy a car?
Who is saving money?
FUTURE
Jason will graduate next year. . With predictions

He won't gladuate this year. I think they will be happy together.
Will he graduate in January? o With facts
q
No, he won't. The law exarn will be in March.
a
When will he graduate? o With plans d
Why won't he graduate in January? They will buy a house. a
Who will gtaduate in January? o With promises a
"I'll always love you, Katie," says Jason. a
o With an offer to help a
"I'll help you in the kitchen." a
(contittued) a
a
(
a
a
Lesson Seven a
(
hry rre golng to bry a house. o With predictions
ffi aren't going to buy a new car. I think they are going to have a wonderful life.
tre &ey going to buy a house in the . With facts
([I? They are going to receive bills for student loans.
5o. the5- aren't. r With plans
Blere are they going to buy a house? Jason is going to look for ajob next year.
TlihS- aren't they going to buy a house
in the ciW?
$iho is going to buy a house?
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. Don't use the future in i/ or time clauses.
When Jason graduates, he ui.U look for a job.
If they have children, they wi,ll need a bigger house.
2. Don't use the present continuous with nonaction verbs.
They hnue a lot of responsibilities now.
Exrnclsr 2O fiU in the blanks with the correct tense and form of the verb in
parentheses ( ).
Exluptrt Jason
ia qoing to qraduate next year.
(grod,uatc)
1. He a good job when he

(hnue) (graduate)
2. He in the library.
(often/stttdy)
3. Jason and Katie out.

(rarely/go)
4. They ' about buyrng a house.

Ahink)
5. They
(saue)
their money now.
Exsncrsr 2l Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb.
Exlt'rpr-gt They are young. They aren L old,.
1. They have an apartment now. They a house.
2. They want children, but they children right

now.
Future Tensesl Comparison of Tenses t99

3.
4. on their
parents.
5. Jason will graduate in June. He in January.
Exrxctsn 22 Read each statement. Then write a ges/no question with the
Ex.nuprr' Katie y91!q as a nurse. (in a hospital)
Doee ehe work in" a hoepital? No, she doeen't.
1. Jason is a student. (Ibtie)
2. They are thinking about buyrng a horrse. (about having chilfuen)
3. Jason will have a job. (a good job)
Jason is attending college now. (Katie)
5. They are going to have children. (five children)
Exsncrsr 23 Read each statement.'Then write a wh- question about the

words in parentheses ( ).An answer is not necessary.
ExRuplr: Katie works as a nurse. (Where)
Where doea ahe work as a nuree?
1. They are saving their money. (why)
2. They don't want to depend on their parents. (why)
3. Jason will make good money. (when)
2OO Lesson Seven

4. Jason wants to be a lawyer. (why)
5. Katie isn't going to work when her children are small. (why)
6. Jason will pay back his student loans. (when)
7. They don't go out very much. (why)
8. Jason is attending college. (what college)
9. He is going to graduate. (when)
10. Jason isn't earning money now. (who)
11. Someone wants to help them. (who)
12. They g{g_lgg11mg about responsibilities. (how)
1. Future patterns u'ith will.

AFFIRMATTVE: He will buy a car.
NEGATME: He won't buy a Japanese car.
YES/NO QUESTTON: Will he buy an American car?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, he will.
WH- QUESTION: When will he buy a car?
NEGATTVE QUESTION: Why won't he buy a Japanese car?
SUBJECT QUESTION: Who will buy a car?
Future I'enses; Comparison of Tenses 2Ol

I
Future patterns with be going to.

AFFIRMAIfVE:$' ' '- He is going to buy a cax.
I
NEGATME: He isn't going to buy a Japanese car. I
YES/NO QUESTION: Is he going to buy an American car? i
SHORT ANSWER: heis. Yes,

I4lH- QIIESTION: When is he going to buy a car?
NEGATME QUESTION: Why isn't he going to buy a Japanese car? I
SURIECT QUESTION: Who is going to buy a car? I
3. Uses of be going to and will. (
You will become rich and famous. You are going to become rich and famous. (
(
The sun will set at 6:32 p.m. The sun is going to set at 6:32 p.m.
tonight. tonight. I
I'm going to buy a new car next month. I

(
I will help you. I
A I can't open the door. I
B. I'll open it for you. I

(
4. Review the simple present tense and the present continuous tense on pages
I
t73-t74. I
t. Don't use be with a future verb.
I will be go.
2. You need be in a future sentence that has no other verb.

'be
He wilt angry.
be
There *i\, party soon.
Don't combine will and be going tn.
ie
He rrill going to leave. Or He will leave.'
4. Don't use the present tense for a future action.

'il
I'm going horrre now. I^see you later,
2O2 Lesson Seven

Don't use tlrt. t\rlrrrt. lense allet ii;iwp or ij-
When thoy will go home, they will $atch T\'.

Use a form r.rl'lrr' tr-ith goirtg to.
ie
He^goinil l1 llslp L,..
7. Use to aftet' tl,rjrir/.
I'm going.slu(l), ou Saturday.
Use correct t'rtrtl (lI.(ler for questions.

_ arc."'1 1. r11
Why lotr tr.i.n\, going to eat lunch?
PART 1 Find the mistttktrs u,ith the underlined words and correct them.
Not every sent(\uc(r has a mistake. If the sentence is correct,
write C.
2rT1
Exnuprss: I Yd* going to trt\r rr llr\\.spilper.
If you're too tirtrl trr 1.1111\. I'll do it. C
l. When yg5lll rr.ritt, ),our composition?
2. We will be trr\r il ll(\\\. (.ar sooll.
3. Will you goirq_trr- cnt dinner tonight?

4. When he n'ill k.it\.t.. ht, rvill tum off the light.
5. t going to trr\i' tl vll(.iltion soon.
6. Is he going t.)
_rlfl tlrt, cornputer?
7. They're goirq: gurtkurle soon.
8. I will happ.r n"l\t'll I 5'ill knou,more English.
9. I'm going \\n tit\.illi()1. I rvill going to lear-e next f-nday-

10. I'll write !'tlu rt lt'ltt'r rvhen I arrive.
11. There -!l * i(\st s()()n.
12. I'Il help ),(r\t lr)ll.rt)l.l.t)\y.
Future Tenses: Comlrarison ol' Tenses

203
PART 2 Fili in the blan'ks withlil,itl-or"a form of be + goi,ng to.ln
some cases, both answers are possible.
Exauplrs' Ibelievethenextpres'o"n, will be or' ie qoinq to

be a Democrat.
You can't move your piano alone. I ll help you do it.
1. We eat in a new restaurant tomomow. Do you want to go with

us?
2. My friend is planning her wedding. She invite 150 guests to

her wedding.
3. I promise I clean my room tomorrow.
4. If you come to work late every day, you lose yourjob.
5. You don't limow anything about computers? Come to my house. I

teach you.
b. The teacher give a test next Fliday.
7 Next week we begrn Lesson Eight.
8. Mother: Please call me when you a:rive.
Daughter: Don't wony, Mom. I call you as soon as I a:rive.
9. We're planning a picnic, but I think it rain tomorrow.
PART 3 Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined
w0rd.
EXnUplf: She will get married in church. won't 6et

She married at home.
1. She is going to invite all her relatives. She allherfriends.
2. He,will wear a new suit. He old clothes.
3. I am going to buy a gift. I dishes.
4. I'll help you tornorrow. I you today.
5. You are going to meet my parents. You my brothers.
PART 4 Read each statement. Then write a ues/no question about the
Exnmplg' She will v,'rite a letter. (a postcard) (no)

Will ahe wrne a poatcard? No, ehe won't.
204 Lesson Seven

l. They will send a grft- (money) (no)
2. Yo,..g gor.g!9jotit" your frientls' (relatives) (yes)
They are going to receive gifts' (open the

gifts) (yes)
3.
bathroom) (yes)
4. They wiII need things for their kitchen. (for their
There will be a party after the wedding' (food

at the parW) Oes)
5.
Read each statement. Then write a

question with the words in
PAR.T 5
parentheses ( ).No answer is necessary'
Exnuptr: I'm goirrg to buy something' (WhaO

What a,e Wu 4oinq to buY?
1. They will use the money' (How)
2. rg-gog€-jg se$ a gift. (What kind of gift)
3. TheY will thank us. (When)
4. They're going to get married' (Where)
(WhV)
5. They aren't going to open the gifts at the wedding'
(How many people)

6. There will be a lot of people at the wedding'
7. Some people will give mcney' (Wn-o)
Future Tenses; Comparison of Tenses

205
d
.d)
PART I Read the following letter. Fill in the blanks with the simple
present, the present continuous, or the future tenses.
Dear Judy,
rarely nave time to sit and
!
Please excuse me for not writing sooner. I

{lwue)
write a let[er. My husbanO on his car now, and the babY -
,, *r* ,u**,
So now I a few free moments
(3 hm:e)
a student now. I to Kennedy College twice a
(4 be) (5 so)
week. The school a few blocks from my house. I usually -----:-,------::-.

(6 be) (7 watk)
to school, but sometimes I . My mother usually the

(8 d.rioe) (9 watrh)
baby when I'm in school. This semester I English and rnath. Next
(10 studE)
semester I
(11 tahe)
-- I
a computer course.
(12 ttdnk)
lcrowledge about
computers me find a good job.

(13 hetp)
When the semester over, we to Canada for vaca-

(14 be) (15 so)
tion. We my husband's sister. She in Montreal.

(16 ai.sit) (17 liue)
We Christmas with her family this year. When we

(18 spend.) - (19 get)
Montreal, I you a postcard.

(20 send)
Please write and tell me what is happening in your life.
Love,
Barbara
PART 2 Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb.
iEn'l;
EXlUPtf , Barbara's a student. She a teacher.
1. She's writing a letter now. She a composition.
2. Her mother sometimes takes care of her baby. Her father care
of her baby.
J. They're going to visit her husband's sister. They her mother.

-
4. Sl-re goes to Kennedy College. She to Tfuman College.
206 Lesson Seven

-
5. Barbara and her husband live in the U.S. They in Canada.
6. Her family will go to Montreal. They to Toronto.
PAR.T 3 Read each statement. Then write a Aes/no question with the
words in parentheses ( ). Write a short answer, based on the
Ietter.
ExlNprr: Barbara's studying English. (math)

le ehe atudying math? Yea, ohe te.
1. The baby's sleeping. (her husband)
2. She sometimes drives to school. (ever/walk to school)
3. She's going to take a computer course next semester. (a math class)
4. She'Il go to Canada. (l\4ontreal)
5. She's going to send Judy a postcard. (a letter)
6. She sometimes writes letters. (write a letter/now)
7. Her sister-in-law lives in Canada. (in Toronto)
PART 4 Read each statement. Then write a wh- question with the words
in parentheses ( ). Write an answer, based on the letter.
Exaupu: She goesto college. (Where)
o Where does ehe go to college?
the goee tc Kennedy College.
1. Her baby's sleeping. (What/her husband/do)

A.
Future Tenses; Comparison of Tenses 2O7

She's.taking'two courses tNs semester. (What courses)
A
B.
3. Someone watches her baby. (Who)
A.
B.
4. She's going to take a course next semester. (What course)

A.
B.
Theyll go on vacation for Christmas. (lMhere)

A.
B.
Her husband's sister lives in another city. (Where/she)

A
7. She doesn't usually drive to school. (Wtw)

A.
B.
CLASSROOM 1. Check (/)

the activities that you plan to do soon. Find a parhrer. Ask your
ACTIVITIES parhrer for information about the items he or she checked off. Report
something interesting to the class about your partner's plans.
Exluplr,: nmove
When are you going to move?
Why are you going to move?
Are your friends going to hetp you?
Are you going to rent a truck?
Where are you going to move to?
a. get married
b. - go back to my country
c. - spend a lot of money
d. - write a letter
-
208 Lesson Seven
e. buy something (a computer,,a VCR, a TV, an.answering machine,
etc.)
-
f. go to a party
ct
b' - have ajob interview
h. - transfer to another college
i. - become a citizen
j. - eat in a restaurant
-
2. Role play the following characters. Practice the future tense.
a. Fortune teller and young woman. The woman wants to lorow her future.
b. Man proposing marriage to a woman. The man is making promises.
c. Teenager and parents. The teenager wants to go to a parby on Saturday
night.
d. Politician and voter. The politician wants votes.

e. Landlord and a person who wants to rent an apartment. (The person
wants to lcrow what the landlord will do to fix up the apartment.)
3. What are your concerns and plans for the future? Write two sentences
(statements or questions) for each of the categories in the box below. Then
find a partner. Discuss your concerns and plans with your partner.
Job/Career Where will I work if I lose my preoent

job?
Money
Learning English
Home
Family and children
Health
F\m and recreation
Other
Future Tenses: Comparison of Tenses 2O9

Imagine- that 5roq arg going to buy a gift for someone in the following
circumstances.'What gift would you buy? Find a partner and compare your
list of gifts to your partner's list.
a. a friend in the hospitai after surgery
b. a couple with a new baby
c. a nephew for high school graduation
d. a friend getting ma;nied for the first time
e. a friend getting maried for the second time
f. a friend moving into a new apartment
g. a family that invites you to dinner at their house
DtscussloN 1. In a small group or with the entire class, talk about gift giving customs in
your native culture. What kind of gifts do people give for weddings? How
much money do they spend? Do newlyweds open presents at the wedding?
Do they send thank-you cards? What kind of gifts do people give for other
occasions?
In your native culture, does a woman ever support a man?
OUTSiDE Use the third classroom activity on the previous page to interview an American
ACTIVITY about his or her concerns about the future. What is he or she worried about?
Internet Activity
Find a bridal or wedding registry on the Internet. What kind of gifts can a couple
register for? What are the prices?
2lO Lesson Seven

G RAMMAR
The Simple Past Tense
CONTEXT
The Wriglrt Brothers
Charles Lindbergh and Amelia Earhart
Robert Goddard
LESSON FOCUS
We use the simple past tense to talk about an action
that is completely in the past.
World War II started, in 1939.
Many people Jos[ their lives during the war.
It ended in 1945.
It uas a very tragic time.
2tt
I
a
Before You Read 1. Do you like to travel by airplane? Why or why not? a
2. What are the narnes of some famous inventors?
a
a
a
I
a
I
a
t
The Wright Brothers and
an assistant with their
a
first plane at Kitty Hawk C
Wilbur \Vright
1867-19 t2
I
Orville Wright a
187 t-19+8 a
a
Read the following article. Pay special attention to simple past
verbs.
tense
I
t
a
I
The Wright Brothers-Men with a Vision a
C
Wilbur Wright was born in 1867 and his brother 0rville was born in a
1871. In 1878, they received a paper flnng toy from their father. From that
time, they dreamed about flpng. They played with
I
kites and studied everything they couid about glider I
planes. I
When they were older, they started a bicycle (
business in Da;'ton, 0hio. They used the bicycle shop (
to design their airplanes. They studied three aspects I
of flying: lift, control, and power. In l8gg, they con- (
structed their first flyrng machine-a kite made of (
wood, lvire, and cloth. It had no pilot. Because of
wind, it was difficult to control. They continued to
I
study aerodpramics.' Finally Wilbur designed a small
(
machine with a gasoline engine. Wilbur tried to fly (
tlte machine, but it crashed. They fixed it and flew (
it for the first time on December 17, 1903, with 0rville as the pilot. The (
airplane remained in the air for 12 seconds. It traveled a distance of 120 (
(
I (
Aexxltlnun.ic.s is tht' brant:h of nre<'hlnics thal d^nls witll the nrotion of air and ils effect on tlrings.
I
(
212 Lesson Eight I
(
llid you know-..? feet. It was over 600 pounds. This historic flight ehanged 'uhe world. Llowever,
only four newspapers in the U.S. re-
The Wright ported this historic moment.
Brothers never The Wright Brothers offered their
rnarried. Their invention to the U.S. government, but
only love was the government rejectedz their offer
aviation.
at first. The government didn't believe
that these men invented a flying ma-
chine. Finally, President Theodore Roosevelt investigated their claims and
offered the inventors a contract to build airplanes for the U.S fumy.
s.€ The Simple Past Tense of Regular Verbs
The Wright Brothers dreamed about For regular verbs, the simple past
flyrng. tense ends in -ed.
They started a bicycle buSiness. Besp Fonu PasrFonvr
They invented the airplane. clream dreamed
start started
invent invented
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. The past form is the same for all persons.
I worked.
He worked.
They.worked.
You worked.
2. The verb ofter to does not use the past form.
The Wright Brothers wanted to flA.
3. We often use ogo with sentences about the past.
The Wright Brothers inasnted the airplane about 100 years ogo.
We studi,ed the future tense aweek o,go.
We l.earned about the Wright Brothers a few minutes ogo.
z
Ecftrecl means not accept.
Tire Simple Past Tense 213

(
(
G.g Spelling of the Past Tense of Regular Verbs
(
(
(
Ldd -ed to most regular verbs.
(
a
When the base form ends in e, add -d
only. a
{
When the base form ends in a consonant
i
E, change E to C and add, -ed.
t
a
When the base form ends in a vowel * {
y,add, -ed. Do not change the y. (
When a one-syllable verb ends in a (
consonant-vowel-consonan!, double the
a
final consonant and add,-ed.
Do not double final to or r. I

a
Wh.en a two-syllable verb ends in a I occfr_ occurred {
consonant-vowel-consonant, doublethe I permit permitted a
final consonant and add -ed only if the
last syllable is stressed. {
{
When the last syllable of a two-syllable
a
verb is not stressed, do not double the
final consonant. a
(
(
(
Exrncrsr I Write the past tense of these regular verbs. (Accent marks show
(
you where a word is stressed.)
(
Exlprplrs: learned clapped (
learn clap
love
loved listened (
Iisten
(
1. play 8. stop (
2. study 9. h6ppen (
(
3. decide 10. catry
(
4. want 11. eryoy
(
5. like t2. drag (
6. show 13. drop I
7. look 14. start
214 Lesson Eight

15. follow 18. mlx
16. pref6r 19. admit
17. like 20. dev6lop
f=B=
+S=
= s=-s Pronunciation of. +d Past Forms
jump-jumped rub-rubbed wait-waited

cook-cooked drag--dragged hate-hated
cough-coughed love-loved want--wanted
kiss-*kissed bathe-bathed add-added
wash-washed use-used decide-decided
watch-watched massage-massaged
charge-charged
name-named
learn-Iearned
bang-banged
call---called
care-cared
free-freed
Lmrcuncr Norus
1. We pronounce /t/ afier voiceless sounds: /p, k, f, s, 5, d/
2. We pronounce /d/ after voiced sounds: lb, g, Y, d, z, Z, j, m, n, 13, l, r/
and all vowtils.
3. We pronounce ledl after ldl or ltl sounds.
Exrncrse 2 Go back to Exercise 1 and pronounce the base form and past
form.
Exrncrsr 3 Fill in the blanks with the past tense of the verb in parentheses
( ). Use the correct spelling.
Exluptr, The wright Brothers received a fllrng toy from their father.
(receiue)
1. They about flyrng.

(d,ream)
2. They everything they could about flyrng.

(studa)
3. They a bicycie business.
4. They the bicycle shop to design airplanes.

(we)
\, The Simple Past Tense 215

J
5. Tl'rey to fly their first plane in 1899.
(tra)
t). ln 1903, their plane in the air for 12 seconds.
(staY)
7. They their invention to the U.S. governrnent.

@Jfer)
8. The government to offer them a contract.

(decide)
9. \Vilbur \\rr-ight in 1912.

(die)
10. Orville Wright for many more years.

(liue)
11. Their invention the world.
Before You Read 1. When u,as the first time you traveled by airplane?
2. Do you recognize the people in these photos?
a
a
ilny-dffi
#iui$" -
a
a
I
r
r
r
I
I
Charles Lindbergh Amelia Earhart t
1902-1974 t 897 -1937 I
I
Read the following article. Pay special attention to the past forms of be.
I
r
I
T
Charles Lindbergh and Amelia Earhart I
Charles Lindbergh loved to fly. He was born in 1902, one year before
t
the Wright Brothers' historic flight. In 1927, a man offered a $25,000 reward
t
for the first person to fly from New York to Paris nonstop, Lindbergh wa,s e I
pilot for the United States Mail Service at that time. He wanted to win the t
prize. He became famous because he was the first person to fly alone across I
t
(
216 Lesson Eight
\
t
the Atlantic 0cean. His plane was in the air for 33 hours. The distance of
the flight was 3,600 miles, Thcre were thousands of people in New York to
rvelcome him home. He was an American hero. He was only 25 years old.
Another thmous American aviators was Amelia Earhart. She was the first
woman to fly across the Atlantic Ocean alone. She rvanted to land in Paris,
but her flight was difficult and she had to land in Ireland. She was 34 years
old. Americans were in love with Earhart. In 1937, however, she was 0n a
flight around the world when her plane disappeared somewhere in the Pacific
Ocean. No one really knows what happened to Earhart.
8.€ Past Tense of Be
ArrmN.hrrvs SrerrnanNts
I
Charles
He
Amelia
She
The airplane
It
in Neu'York.
NecATrvE SrxrsivleN'rs
Charles and Amelia were not inventors.
Earhart w&s not alone.
Laucuncr Norrs
t. The verb be uses two forms in rhe past: zoas and utere.
2. To nrake a negative statement,ptttnot. after tons or rcere. The contrac-
tion for uas not is wasn't. The contraction for utere not is'wet"ert't.
"..{t'iolor means pilot.
'Ihe Sinrple Pasl Tense 217

a
(
Exrncrsr 4
Fi[ in the blanks with u)as $ were.
a
Ex,quptg: Lindbergh and Earira^t - were very famous.
1. The Wright Brothers the inventors of the airplane.

2. The first airplane in the air for 12 seconds.
3. Lindbergh and Earhart aviators.
4. There thousands of people in New York to welcome Lind-
bergh home.
5. Earhart the first woman to fly across the Atlantic Ocean.
6. I interested in the story about Earha.rt and Lindbergh.
7. you surprised that Earhart was a wornan?
8. Lindbergh in Paris.
9. We in school last week.
8.5
Lindbergh w&s an aviator.
Lindbergh was brave. .
Lindbergh was in Paris.
Earhart was from I(ansas. Place of origin of the subject
She was born in 1897.
There were thousands of people in New

York to welcome Lindbergh.
Exsncrse 5 Read each statement. Then write a negative statement with the
words in parentheses ( ).
ExRmpls: The Wright Brothers were inventors. (Earhart and Lindbergh)
Earhaft and Lindber4h weren't invenf,ora.
1. The train was common transportation in the early 1900s. (the airptane) (
I
I
i
2t8 Lesson Eight I
(
2. Earhart was frorr. Kansas. (Lindbergh_;
3. Lindbergh's last flight was successful. (Earhart's last flight)
4. Lindbergh's plane u,as in the air for many hours. (the Wright brothers'
first plane)
5. The Wright brothers were inventors. (Earhart)
6. There were a lot of trains 100 years ago. (planes)
7. Lindbergh was born in the twentieth century. (the Wright brothers)
s"& Questions with Was/Were
Compare statements and questions with ua,s and were.
Americans were in love with Lindbergh.

Were Americans in love with Earhart? Yes, they were.
\\hy were Americans in love with them?
Earhart w&sntt alone.
\\try wasn't she alone?
Someone was with Earhart.
Who was with Earhart?
Exsncrsr 6 Read each statement. Then write a Aes/no question with the
words in parentheses ( ). Give a short answer.
ExRt',tptg, The Wright Brothers were inventors. (Lindbergh)

Wae Lindberqh an inventor? No, he waon't.
1. The airplane was an important invention. (the telephone)
2. Thomas Edison was an inventor. (the Wright brothers)
The Simple Past Tense 219

*uliu Earhart was Arnerican. (Lindbergh)
4. T[avel by plane is common now. (100 years ago)
5. There were telephones 100 years ago. (airplanes)
6. Ybu are in class today. (yesterday)
7. I was interested in the story about the aviators. (you)
8. I wasn't born in the U.S. (you)
-With
Exrncrsr 7 a partner or in a small group, discuss your answers to
these questions.
1. Where were you born?
2. pere you happy or sad when you left your hometov.'n?
3. Who was with you on your trip to the U.S.?
4. Were you happy or sad when you arived in the U.S.?
5. What was your first impression of the U.S.?
6. Were you tired when you arrived?
7. Who was at the airport to meet you?
8. How was the weather on the day you arived?
Exsncrsr 8 Read each statement. Then write a u)h- question with the words
in parentheses ( ). Answer the question.
ExRupr,s, Lindbergh was very famous. (why)
Why wae Lindberqh famoue?
A.
B.
He was one of the firet aviatore.
2?"O Lesson Eight

1. Lindbergh was a hero, (wll)
A.
B.
2. Lindbergh was American. (what nationality'Earhart)

A.
B.
o
D. Earhart was thirty-four years old when she crossed the ocean. (Lind-
bergh)
A
B.
4. Earhart's last flight wasn't successful. (why)

A.
B.
5. Lindbergh was a famous aviator. (who/the Wright brothers)

A.
B.
6. Lindbergh was born in 1902. (Earhart) (answer: 1897)
A.
B.
7. The Wright Brothers were famous. (why)
A.
B.
8.7 Simple Past Tenses of Irregulat' Verbs
bet-bet hurt-hurt bend-bent

cost--cost let-let build-built
cut-cut put-put lend-lent
fit-fit quit--quit
hit-hit shut-shut
(con.lin.uul )

feel-felt lose-lost bring-brought fight-fought
keep-kept mean-meantl buy---bought ieach-taught
leave-left sleep-slept catch-caught think-thought
break-broke steal-stole begin-began sing-sang
ehoose-chose speak-spoke drink--drank sink-sank
freeze-froze wake-woke ring-rang swirn-swam
dig--dug spin-spun drive-drove shine-shone

hang-hung !;- win-won ride-rode write-wrote
blow-blew grow-grew bleed-bled meet-met
draw-drew lcrow-lorew feed-fed read-read5
fly-flew throw-threw lead-led
sell-sold tell-told find-found wind-wound
shake-shook mistake-mistook lay-laid pay-paid

take-took say-saido
tear-tore weax-wore bite-bit hide-hid

light-lit
become-became eat-ate fall-fell hold-held
comHame
give-gave lie*lay run-ran see-saw
forgive-forgave sit-sat
forget-forgot get-got stand-stood
shoot-sllot understand-und erstood
be go-went hear-heard
-was/were have-had
do-did make-made
LnxcuncE NorEs
l. An irregular verb does not use the -ed ending for the past tense.
2. For an alphabetical list of irregular verbs, see Appe4dix D.
a
There is a change in the vowel sound. Mecrrl rhymcs with .serl.
I'The past fornr of rcad is pronoun<:ed like thc color rcd.
't.Soid rhymes rr'it.h Dr"rl.
222 Lesson Eight

Before You Read 1. Did you ever see the first moon landing in 1969?
2. Are you interested in astronauts and rockets?
Robert Coddard with early rocket Apollo I I on the moon
Read the following article. Pay special attention to past tense verbs.
Robert Goddard
Robert Goddard was born in 1882. When he was a child, he became
interested in firecrackers and believed in the possibility of rocket travel. He
became a professor of physics. He built rockets and carried them to a field,
but they didn't fly. In 1920, the New York Times heard about his ideas and
u'rote an article about him. The article said that space travel was impossible
and that Goddard was a fool. Goddard's colleagues laughed
at him. Goddard was angry, but he didn't stop his research.
In 1926, he built a ten-foot rocket, put it into an open
car, and drove to his aunt's nearby farm. He put the rocket
in a field and lit the fuse. Suddenly the rocket went into
the sky. It traveled at 60 m.p.h. to an altitude of 41 feet.
Then it fell into the field. The flight lasted 2% seconds,
Did you know...? but Goddard was happy about his achievement. 0ver the
years, his rockets grew to eighteen feet and flew to 9,000
l:,e first wonlan feet in the air. No one made fun of him after he was successful.
\\hen Goddard died in 1945, his work did not stop. Scientists continued
to buiid bigger and better rockets. In 1969, when the American rocket Apollo
i 1 took tlre first men to the moon, the Neu York Ti,m,es wrote: "The Ti,lnes
regretsi the error."
' llt grtt llre:ulii l(, lrt' sorry firr a ntisl.akc

vorr rrrarlt,.

rg2o Goddard published a paper on rockets.
1926-1939 Goddard built and flew rockets.
L944 Germany used the first rockets in WorIC War II.
1957 The Russians sent up their first satellite, "Sputnik 1."
1958 Ttre Americans sent up their first satellite, "Explorer 1."
1961 Yuri Gagarin, a Russian, beeame the first person in
space.
1961 Alan Shepard became the first American in space.
1969 The United States put the first men on the moon.
Exrncrsr 9 Fiu in the blanks with the past tense of one of the words from
the box below.
Ex.auprr,:
became
Goddard interested in rockets when he was a child.
1. IIe a professor of physics.
2. People' that space travel was irhpossible.

3. Goddard his first rocket in a car and to his
aunt's farm.
4. The rocket for ZYz seconds and then it to the
ground.
5. Goddard never the first moon landing.

6. The Nar York Times about their mistake 49 years later.
Exr,ncrse I O Fill in the blanks with the past tense of the verb in paren-
theses ( ).
ExRt'tpt g: The Wright brothers' father 4ave them a toy airplane.
1. They a dream of flying.

(hnue)
2. They intereSted in flyrng after seeing a flying toy.

(become)
3. They many books on flight.
4. They bicycles.
22,4 Lesson Eight

5. They the first airplane.
6. At first they problerns \{rith wind.
7. They some changes to the airplane.
8. They for the first time rn 1903.

&a)
9. Only a few peopl" the first flight.
c"o
10. President Theodore Roose.velt about their airplane.
(heor)
11. The airplane was an important invention because it people
(briw)
from different places closer together.
G.G Negative Forms of Past Tense Verbs
Lindbergh returned from his Earhart didn't return from her last
famous flight. flight.
Goddard became a professor. He didn't become a pilot.
People thought that space travel They didn't think tiat space travel
was foolish. was possible.
The Wright Brothers llew in their Goddard didn't fly in his rocket.
plane.
People laughed at Goddard's They didn't laugh when they saw
theories. the rocket in the slry.
LnNcuncE NorEs
For the negative of past tense verbs, rse didn't (did not) * the base
form for all verbs, regular and irregular.
Exrncrss 1 I F'ill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined
words.
Exlt'tpttt Goddard believed in space flight. Other people

didn't believe
ln
space ftight.
1. In 1926 his rocket fiew. Before that time, his rockets
2. He wanted to build rockets. He to build airplanes.

3. In 7920, a newspaper wrote that he was foolish. The newspaper
about the possibility of rocket travel.
The Simple Pasl; Tense 225

The first rocket stai,ed in the air for 272 seconds. It
in the air for a long time.
5. Goddard thought his ideas were important. His colleagues
his ideas were important.
o. Goddard saw his rockets fly. He rockets go to the moon.
7. A rocket went to the moon in 1969. A rocket to the

moon during Goddard's lifetime.
Ir1 1957, the Russians put the f,rst man in space. The Americans
the first man in space.
In 1969, the first Americans walked on the moon. Russians

on the moon.
10. Ttre Wright brothers dreamed about flyrng. They

aboui rockets.
11. They sold bicycles. They
L2. Their 1903 airplane had apilot. Their first airplane apilot.
13. The Wright brothers built the first airplane. fhey the
first rocket.
14. The Wright brothers wanted to show their airplane to the U.S. govern-
ment. The government to see it at first.
!+lira:. i :
ExrRcrsr 12 f iU in the blanks with the affirmative or negative form of the

verb in parentheses to tell about the time before you came t0
the U.S. Add some specific information t0 tell more about each
item.
, atudied I
ExnMrLss: English before came to the U.S. / studi,ed with a
(study)
prtaate teach,er Jor three months.
OR
, didn't atudy English before I came to the U.S. I didn't hnae

(studa)
enough time.
1. I my money for dollars before I came to the U.S.

(chnnge)
2. I a passport
@et)
226 Lesson Eight

3. I , foravisa.
(applv)
4. English.
(studa)
5. some things (houSe, furniture, etc.).
(sell)
ll. goodbye to my friends.
(saa)
nt. an English dictionary.
(buv)
8. a clear idea about life in the U.S.
(lwue)
9. afraid about my fufure
(be)
10. to another country flrst.
@o)
11. I (und.erstand) English well.
t2. a lot about Americans.

(knnw)
ExrRclsr l3 tett if these things happened or didn't happen after you moved
to this city. Add some specific information t0 tell more about
each item.
Exluptr' find'an apartment

I found an apartment two weeks zrfter I arrived in this city.
OR
I dirln't find an apartment right away. I lived with my cousins for two months.
1. find a job 6. get a driver's license

2. register for English classes 7. visit a museum
3. rent an apartment . 8. see a relative
4. buy acax 9. buy clothes
5. get a Social Security card -10. go to the bank
Exrncrsr l4 Tell if you did or didn't do these things in the past week. Add
some specific information t0 tell more about each item.
Exnuptrt go to the movies
I went to the movies last weekend with my brother. We saw a great movie.
OR
I didn't go to the movies this week. I didn't have time.
1. receive a letter 7. buy a magazine
2. write a letter 8. work hard
3. go to the library 9. Iook for a job
4. do my laundry 10. rent a video
5. buy groceries 11. send an e-mail
6. make a long-distance phone call 12. read a newspaper

8.9 Questions with Past Tenss Verbs
Compare statements and questions with tlle simple past tense.
Goddard studied physics.

Did he study hard? Yes, he did.
Why did he study physics?
Lindbergh flew across the Atlantic.

Did he fly alone? Yes, he did.
When did he fIy across the Atlantic?
Why didn't he fly with someone?
LnNcunGE NorEs
1. For all yes/no.questions of past tense verbs, fegulax or irregular, we
vse'did * the.6ase form.
2. For most uD- questions, we use did * the base form.
Exr,ncrsr 15 Use these questions to ask another student about the time
when he or she lived in his or her country. flou may work with
a partner.) r
1. Did jrou study English In your codntry?

t
2. Dfd you live in a big city?
3 Dld you live with your parents?
4. Did you lanow a lot about the U.S.?

5. Were you happy with the political situation?
6. Did you finish high school?

7. Did you own a cax?
8. Did you have a job?
9. Did you think about your future?
10. Were you happy?
2?8 .Lesson Eight

Exrncrsr l6 Read each statement. Write a yes/no question about the words
in parentheses ( ). Write a short answer.
Ex.rNptrt The Wright Brothers had a dream. (Goddard) (yes)
Did Goddard have a dream? Yee, he did.
1. \Yilbur Wrig}rt died in 1912. (his brother) (no)
2. The Wright Brothers built an airplane. (Goddard) (no)
3. Earhart loved to fly. (Lindbergh) (yes)
4. Lindbergh crossed the ocean. (Earhart) (yes)
5. Lindbergh worked for the U.S. Mail Service. (Earhart) (no)
6. Lindbergh became famous. (Earhart) (yes)
7. Earhart disappeared. (Lindbergh) (no)
8. Lindbergh was born in the twentieth century. (Earhart) (no)
9. Lindbergh won money for his first flight. (the Wright Brothers) {rrrr.1
10. People didn't believe the Wright Brothers at first. (Goddard) (nrl;
11. The Wright Brothers dreamed about flight. (Goddard) (yes)
12. The Russians sent a rocket into space in 1957. (the AmericztLsl (7r,,

(
(
13. The Russians put a man in space in 1961. (Americans) (yes) (
14. Americans saw tl-re first moon landing. (Goddard) (no) I

(
(
t
Exsncrss l7 Fill in the blanks u,ith the correct words. (
ExRupr-r' What kind of engine
did the fireL arrplane have? a
The first airplane had a gasoline engine.

I
I
1. Where t
The Wright brotl-rers built their plane in their bicycle shop. I
2. Why t
The fi rst plane crashed because of the wind. I
t
3. Why difficult to control'l
The p Iane was difficult to control because of the wind.
t
I
4. Why the first flight in I90:i.' I
Newspapers didn't report it because they didn't believe it. I
5. Where t
Lindbergh worked for the U.S. Mail Service. I
6. Why
e
He crossed the ocean to win the prize money.
I
a
7. How much money a
He won $25,000.
a
8. How old when he crossed the ocear a
Lindbe rgh was 25 years oki when he crossed the ocean. I
9. Where I
His plane landed in Paris. I
(
10. When
Lindbergh died in 1974.
I
(
tl. Why (
Nobody knows why Earhart didn't return. (
12. Where I
Earhar[ was born in Kansas.
13. Where
She disappeared in the Pacific Ocean.
23A Lrsson Ilight

14. Who with?
Earhart was with a copilot.
15. When I
The fi.rst man walked on the moon in 1969.
16. Why the first moon landing?

Goddard didn't see the first moon landing because he died in 194b.
ExrRctsr, l8 neaa each statement. Then write a question with the words in
parentheses ( ). Answer with a complete sentence. (The
answers are at the bottom of the page.)
Exlt'rpLr: The Wright Brothers were born in the nineteenth century. (Where)
Where were they born? They were born in Ohio.
1. The Wright Brothers were born in the nineteenth century. (When/

Lindbergh)
2. Their father gave them a to;'. (\[trat kind of toy)
3. They had a shop. (What kind of shop)
4. Ttrey designed airplanes. (Where)
5. They flew their first plane in North Carolina. (When)
6. The first plane stayed in the air for a few seconds. (How many sec-
onds)
l. The U.S. government didn't want to see the airplane at first. (\4hV)
8. The Wright Brothers invented the airplane. (What/Goddard)
ANSWEITS T0 EXER(JISTI IS:

l) 1902, 2) a flying toy, 3) a bicycle shop, 4) in their bicycle shop, 5) in 1903, 6) 12 seconds, T)Lhey n;*it
believe it, 8) the rocket, 9) to see if it would fly, l0) they didn't believe hirrr (they thought he wrs a f,,<,tt

9. Goddard took his rocket to his aunt's farm. (Why)
10. People laughed at Goddard. (Why)
Exrncrsr 19 Check (/) all statements that are true for you. Then read aloud
one statement that you checked. Another student will ask a
question with the words in parentheses ( ). Answer the
question.
Exluprss: A. / I did my homework. (where)

B. Where did you do your homework?
A. I did my homework in the library.
A. v I got married. (when)
B. When did you get malried?
A. I got maried six years ago.
1. I graduated from high school. (when)
2. - I studied biology. (when)
3. - I bought an English dictionary. (where)
4. - I left my country. (when)
5. - . I came to the U.S. (why)
6: . I brought my clothes to the U.S. (what else)
7. I'rented an apartment. (where)' .
8. - I started to study English. (when)
9. - I chose this college. (why)
10.
- I found my apartment. (when)
11.
- I needed to learn English. (when)
12.
- I got married. (when)
-
23.2 Lesson Eight I
I
Exrncrsr 20 Ctreck (/) which of these things you did when you were a
child. Make an affirmative or negative statement about one of
these items. Another student will ask a question about your
statement.
ExRupLt' I attended public school.

A. I didn't attend public school.
-B. Why didn't you attend public school?
A. My parents wanted to give me a religious education.
1. I participated in a sport.
2. I e4ioyed school.
3. I got good grades in school.
4. I took music lessons.
5. I lived with my grandparents.
6. I got an allowance.s
7. I had a pet.
8. I lived on a farm.
9. I played soccer.
r0. I studied English.
11. I had a bike.
12. I thought about my future.
Questions about the Subject
Who invented the airplane? When did the Wright Brothers

The Wright Brothers did? invent the airplane?
They invented it in 1903.
Who laughed at Goddard? Why did they laugh at Goddard?

His colleagues did. They laughed at him because they
didn't believe in rocket travel.
How many people went to see When did Lindbergh go to Paris?

Lindbergh in Paris? He went there in 1927.
Thousands of people did.
What happened to Barhart's When did the accident happen?

plane? It happened in 1937.
It disappeared.
6
An alloutance is money children get from their parents, usually once a week.

LlNcuncs Norss
When we ask a questibn about the subject, we use the past form, not the
base form in the question." We don't use did in the question. We can use
did in the short answer.
}:.Sa.= _ t::1:.i
Exrnclsr 2l Choose the correct word to answer these questions about the
subject.
EXlt"tpt g: Who invented the airplane? Wright Goddard, Lindbergh)
1. Who landed on the moon? (Yuri Gagarin, NeilArmstrong, John Glenn)
2. Who crossed the ocean n tg27? (Wilbur Wright, Orville Wright,

Charles Lindbergh)
3. Who sent up the first rocket? (The Wright Brothers, Goddard, Lind-
bergh)
4. Who disappefrred in 1937?'(Eaphart, Goddard, Lindbergh)
5. WhowonmoneytbflyaerosstheAtlantic Ocean? (Earhart, Lindbergh,

Goddard)
6. Which president showed interest in thg Wright Brothers' airplane?

(T Roosevelt, Lincoln, Wilson)
7. Which newspaper said that G"oddard was a fool? (The Chicugo TVib-
une, The Washington Post, TTw New York Times)
Exrnctss 22 nead o.ne of the tllao que$tions below. Someone will volunteer
an answer. Then ask a related question to the person who
answered "I did."
EXRUplf: A. Who went to the bank last week? '
B. I did.
A Why did you go to the bank?
B. I went there to buy a money order.
1. Who brought a dictionary io cla.ss today?
2. Who drank coffee this morning?
3. Who wrote a composition last night?
4. Who watched TV this morning?
5. Who came to the U.S. alone?
23+ {,esson Eight

6. Who made a long distance call.last night?
7. Who studied Engtish before coming to the U.S.?
8. Who bought a newspaper today?
Exrncrsr 23 f'm in the blanks in this conversation between two students

about their past.
A. , wao born in Mexico. I to the U.S.. ten years ago..

(born) (1 come)
Where born?
(p be)
B. In El Salvador. But my family (3 mot:e)

to Guatemala
'i
when
10 years old.
(4 be)
A. whv to Guatemala?
(5 moue)
B. We afraid to stay in El Salvador.

(6 be)
A whv afraid?
(r ?e)
B. Because there a war in El Salvador.

(8 be)
A. How long in Guatemala?

(9 staa)
B. We stayed there for about five years. Then I to the U.S.

(10 come)
A. What about your family? to the U.S. with you?

(11 come)
B. No, they .I ajob, my money,

(12) (13Iirut) (14 wue)
and them here later.

(15 brhw)
A. My parents with me either. But my older brother did.

(16 not/come)
to go tcl school as soon as I

(17 start) (18 Qttit:e)
B. Who you while you were in school?

(19 support)
A. My brother
(20)

B. I (21 rwt/go)
to school right away because I
(22 haue)
to work
Then I a grant *d to go to city college.

(23 set) r* r,a-
A. Why (25 chnose)
City College?
B. I chose it because it has a good ESL program.

A. Me too.
The Simple Past Tense
1. Be
I
Ifo were in Paris
il was in Paris
It
There was a prob.lem. There were many problems.
AFFIRMATME: He was in Poland. They were in France.

NEGATME: He wasn't in Russia. They weren't in England.
YESft{OQUESTION: Was he in Hungary? Were they in Paris?
SHORT ANSWER: No, he wasntt. No, they weren't.
I4lfl. QUESTION: Where was he? When were they in FYance?
NEGATTYE QUESTION: Why wasn't he in Russia? Why weren't they in Paris?
SUBIECT QUESTION: Who was in Russia? How many people were in FYance?
2. Other Verbs
t
AFFIRMAITVE: She worked on Saturday. They bought a car.

NEGATTVE: She didn't work on Sunday. They didn't buy a motorcycle.
YES/NO QUESTION: Did she work in the Did they buy an American car?
morning?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, she did. No, they didn't.
wIl- QUESTTON: Where did she work? What kind of car did Ihey buy?
NEGATTVE QUESTION: Why didn't she work on Why didn't they buy an American
Sunday? car?
SU&IECT QUESTION: Who worked on Sunday? How many people bought an
American car?
236 Lesson Eight

1. Use the base form, not the past form, after lo.
buv
I wanted to bouffi a new car,
2. Review the spelling rules for adding -ed, arrd use correct spelling.
atudied
Istudyed for the last test.
dropped
He dxipe* his pencil.
3. Use the base form after d,id, or d,idn't.

know
She didn't knew the answer.
Did your father ffieto the U.S.?
4. Use correct word order in a question.

vour moLher ao
Where did Bo-yeurmottftr?
did vour Eiater buv
What Uoui+*your-sisteit
5. Use be with born. (Don't add -ed to born.) Don't use be vith di,ed.
waa born
Her grandmother borned in Russia.
She was died in the U.S.

wa9
Where di* your grandfather born?
did
Where was your grandfather died?
6. Check your Iist of verbs for irregular verbs.

brcuaht
I txinged my photos to the U.S.
9aw
I seen the accident yesterday.
7. Use be with an age.

wa9
My grandfather had 88 years old when he died.

I
Don't confuse ?ras and toere. I
were
I
Where r#as you yesterday? (
o Don't use did n a question about the subject.
I
(
took
Who did*ake my pencil? (
I
I
I
I
PART I Find the mistakes with the underlined words, and correct them. a
Not every sentence has a mistake. If the sentence is correct, (
write C.
{
,^rtAA
Ex,quprrs, Lindbergh were famous. t
Lindbergh u'as born in 1902. (l
1. Lindbergh decided to flew across the Atlantic.
2. The first plane stay in the air for 12 seconds.
3. When Lindbergh crossed the ocean?
4. E.rrhart borned in 1897.
5. Who invented the first rocket?
6. When did Goddard invented the rocket?
7. When was Goddard diecl?
8. When was Goddard born?
9. Lindbergh won $25,000.
10. Thousands of people seen Lindbergh in Paris.
11. Lindbergh had 25 years old when he made his historic flight.
12. Who drd walk on the moon in 1969?
i3. Ifou, manv people walked on the moon'/
1,1. Earharl didn't returned frorn her flight across the Pacific.
15. 'l'he Wright Brothers' father gavr his sons a flying toy.
16. Gocldard's colleagues didn't believed him.

I
(
238 Lesson Eight (
(
i7. The first rocket flight lasteC 2% seconds.
18. When landed men on the moon?
19. What happened to Earhart's plahe'/
20. Who saw the first moon landing?
PART 2 lVrite the past tense of each verb.
Exltqptrs: hve
tived
feel
felt
1. eat 11. drink

2. see 12. build
3. get 13. stop
4. sit t4. Ieave
5. hit 15. buy
6. make 16. think

7. take L7,
8. find 18. carry _

9. say 19. sell
10. read 20. stand
PART 3 Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb.
EXlUflf: Lindbergh worked for the U.S. Mail Service. Earhart didn't work fnr
the U.S. Mail Service.'
1. There were trains in 1900. There any airplanes.
2- The Wright Brothers flew a plane in 1903. They

plane in 1899.
3. Charles Lindbergh was an aviator. He a presidenrt.
4. The Wright Brothers invented the airplane. They the

telephone.
Wilbur Wright died of typhoid fever. He in a plane

crash.
6. Lindbergh went to Paris. Earhart to Paris.
7. Lindbergh carne back from his flight. Earhart back

from her last flight.

8. Goddard was born in thp nineteenth century. He ln
the twentieth century.
9. Goddard built a rocket. He an airplane.
t0. He became a physics professor. He a pilot.
PART 4 Read each statement. Write a Aes/no question About the words
in parentheses ( ). Write a short answer.
EXlUplf, Lindbergh crossed the ocean. (Earhart) (yes)
Did Earhart cros,s the ocean? Yea, she did.
1. Wilbw. Wright became famous. (Oruille Wright) (yes)
.'l I
2. Lindbergh was an aviator. (Goddard) (no)
3. Lindbergh flew across the Atlantic Ocean. (Earhart) (yes)
4. Lindbergh was born !n the U.S. (Goddard) (yes)
Goddard wrote about rockets. (the Wright Brothers) (no)

t
6. The Russians sent a man into space. (the Americans) (yes)
7. Goddard died in 1945. (Wilbur Wright) (no)
8. The U.S. put men on the moon in 1969. (Rrssia) (no)
9. People laughed at Goddard's ideas in 1920. (in 1969) (no)
10. Goddard thought about rockets. (about computers) (no)
2+A Lesson Eight

?AR.T 5 Write a wh- question about the words in parentheses ( ). It is
not necessary to answer the questions.
ExRvpr"r, The\\'right Brothers became fam.ous for their first airplane. (n'liy/Linilbt'r'.rilr1
Why did Ltndberqh becorne famoue?
1. Earliart was born in 1897. (N,hen/Lindberglt)
2. Thornas Edison invented the phonograph. (what/the Wright Brothers)
3. Thomas Edison invented the phonograph. (who/the airplane)
4. Lindbergh crossed the ocean in 1927. (u'hen/Earhart)
5. Lindbergh got money for his flight. (how much)
6. Earhart wanted to fly around the world. (why)
7. Many people saw Lindbergh in Paris. (how n"rany people)
8. Goddard's colleagues didn't believe his ideas. (why)
9. Wilbur Wright died in 1912. (when/Orville Wright)
10. A president examined Goddard's ideas. (which president)

CLASSROOM 1. In a small group or with the entire class, discuss yow first experiences in
ACTIVITIES the U.S. What were your first impressions? What did you do in your first
few days in the U.S.?
ExRuptr' I lived u'ith my cousins. They helped me find an apartment. I didn't

have money to buy furniture. They lent me money. At first I wasn't
happy. I didn't go out of the house much.
2. Find a parbrer to interview. Ask questions about the circumstances that

brought him or her to the U.S. and the conditions of hisftrer life after he/
she a:rived. Write your conversation. Use Exercise 23 as your model.
Exlvplr, A. When did you leave your country?

B. I left Ethiopia five years ago.
A. Did you come directly to the U.S.?
B. No. First I went to Sudan.
A. Why did you leave Ethiopia?
3. Game: Who and When
Part A. On left side of the page, there are questions about famous people.
On the right side of the page axe some narnes of famous people. Work with
a parhrer and see how many you can match. (You can find the answers at
the end of the chapter.) The first one has been done for you.
a) Who invented the rocket? 4 1. Leonardo da Vinci

b) Who discovered America? 2. Yuri Gagarin
c) Who painted rlr" 146n2 Lisa? 3. William Shakespeare
d) IVho wrote Romeo and, Juliet? 4. Robert Goddard
e) Who was the first person to walk on the 5. Thomas Edison
moon? 6. George Washington
0 Who was the first person in space? 7. George Bush
g) Which president freed the slaves? 8. Pablo Picasso
h) Who composed Tlw Mogi,c F'lute? 9. Alexander Graham Bell
i) Who invented the phonograph? 10. Johann Sebastian Bach
j) !t/ho was the first president of the U.S.? 11. Christopher Columbus
k) Who became president after Reagan and 12. Neil Armstrong
before Clinton? 13. Wofgang Mozart
l) Who invented the telephone? -' 14. Abraham Lincoln
Part B. Take each question from above and write a question usrng uhen.
to guess the answer by choosing one of the years given.
Tiry
Exnupr.r: When did Goddard invent the rocket?
a)
b)
1903
1216
1914
1385
@L492
1935
1620
c) 1326 1503 L625 1788
d) 1596 L675 1801 1865
2I2 Lesson Eight

e) 1957 1960 1969 t972
f) 1957 1960 1969 1970
g) 1834 1850 1865 1899
h) i62r 1688 1699 1791
i) 1877 1899 L902 1920
j) 1620 1724 1789 1825
k) 1985 1989 1990 1992
l) 1845 t877 1910 1935
4. Finish these statements five different ways. Tl-ren find a partner and compare
your sentences to your partner's sentences. Did you have any sentences in
common?
1 didn't. like r.a do my ktoricn,ark
ExluPte: when I was a child,
Whenlwasachild, my parente Oave rne a oicycle fcr my tentit
birthda_v,
v.'aa "Curiy.''
Whenlwasachild, my nicknanie
a. When I was a child,
b. Before I came to the U.S.,
OUTSIDE 1. Interview an American about a vacation he or she took. Find out where he
ACTIVITIES or she went, with whom, for how long, and other related information.
2. Interview an American about a famous person he or she admires. Ask what

this famous person Cid.
Internet Activity
Using the Internet, find out something about one of the following famous people.
What did he or she do? When did he or she do it? When was he/she bom? Is
he/she still alive? If not, when did he/she die?
a. Marie Curie
b. Alexander Fleming
c. Thomas Edison
d. Alexander Graham Bell
e. Bill Gates
f. Henry Ford
g. Jonas Sdk
h. Edwin Hubble
i. Enrico Fermi
j. John Von Neumann
k. Leo Baekeland
l. Ian Witm.ut
ANSWERS TO CLASSROOM ACTIITIY 3:
PartA: b=ll, c=1, d:3, e=12,t=2, g=14, h:13, i-5, j:6, k:7, l=9
PartB:a:1926,b:1492,c:1503,d:1596,e:1969, f:1957,9:1865,h:l79l,i:18'i7,::1789,k:l!)Ul),
l= 1877
The Simple Past Tense 2+3

G RAMMAR
Imperatives
Infinitives
Modals
CONTEXT
Application for Check Cashing
Getting the Best Price
Smart Shopping: Coupons, Rebates, and Rain Checks
At the Customer Service Counter
LESSON FOCUS
We use imperative sentences to make requests or
give commands and instructions to other people.
Stay here. Be good. Open your book.
The infinitive is lo * the base form of the verb.

I want to leaae. I need fo go home.
We use modal auxiliaries to add certain meanings to
verbs. The modal auxiliaries alet can, could, sh,oul.d,,
may, might, must, u:ill, would.
lcan read this paragraph easily.
You should help your roommate.
2+5
Before You Read 1. Where do you shop for food?
2. What services do supermarkets have for customers?
Read the following article. Pay special attention to imperative forms.
Application for Check Cashing

You can cash checks at a supermarket near your house. Ask for an
application at the customer service counter. Read the instructions carefully
and fill out the form.
On this form, print all information, except for the last line. Sigr your
name on the last line and write the date.
stot sgs NM
lfl r r r .t
+il@r*reffireHE@oilMrc'm ilDroh fDl!q*hrrk\-r-'-*kl*d4

EF_-q{-F- .-.tuq-e*.i-.
d Hiqt tiiB
T* --E;--]
Clt
lI
H a**.*r*
votn:mom'olnoum y6rmowrsmrNururr
" *.1,h;*,;;;;;l;t
t;;;'
,*r*c
I** no
I-*. .-*; ,e
I
t, I I IlutrL--1-tl |
I
flE iMxM @
)1.,-.t ,,--1
ffi&MW lflffi
I
E
E:tl_ir
IdAl&tuad btHdryr*d-& M ak t* k.5dr a.& lF u ry6*f dlb qFd dp&l&d
h4ctd5fr ddE-sdryd,ldr-{.+ebadd*tddLb-krlwd5ffi -dt
tudrFbi*furdri.F
bt 'tdffidb Ft E * k f DCU. k & ffid|B
.**r'tgd,M*hddhtu-{5hrb&
: mMRrcrtu[oNty
ffi-- _ D,-"-"-,,*. !"*.**-- tr.*-** tr"-*."*

c'nfr@ lll I llll ll l----im-r"*
SF#.g.EroG (r^Fl(& hh E.rrEL
ti ________l_ I
Some forms ask you to put your last name before your first name. 0n
this form, however, put your first name before your last. Then frU in all parts
of section one. If you are married and want a card for your spouse,r fill out
the second part.
Do not write anything in the space that says "For 0ffice Use Only." Do
not fill out anything where you see "Dominick's Use 0nly."
I A spouscis a husband o. u *iio.
246 Lesson Nine

When you finish filling out the form, retum it to the customer service
desk. Show your driver's Iicense or state ID card.
q€
,tg Using Imperatives
Get an application. To give instructions

Print l-our narne on the first line.
Sign your narne on the bottom line.
Dont print your name on the bottom line.
Dont write in the box that says, "For Office Use Only."
Piease show me your driver's license. To make a request
Tirke this card to front desk, please.
Dontt open my mail. To make a command

Stand at attention!
Don't be late.
Watch out!
wffi
To give a warning
Be careful!
Don't be late for the meeting.
Don't move! You're under arrest.
Es,r-e a nice day.

Tlnve a good time.
Make yourself at home.
b In certain polite conversational
expressions
Drive safely.
Shut up! ln some mBrV, impolite expressions

*tind your own business!
Lnxcuncr Norrs
1. To form the imperative, use the base form. Th.e subject of the impera-
tive is you, bttt we don't include Aou in the sentence.
2. A negative imperative is do not * base form. The contraction is don't.
Imperatives; Infinitives; Modals 247

Exsncrss 1 Fill in the blanks with an appropriate imperative verb
(affirmative or negative) to give instructions.
ExRvprr, Oo
to the customer service desk for an application.
out the application in pen.
a pencil to fill out an application.
aII the information in clear letters.
If you have a middle narne, your middle initial.
anything in the box in the lower right corner.
If you are not married, out the second part.
When you give your telephone number, always your area
code.
your last name before your first name on this application.
the application to a person at the customer service
counter.
Exsncrsr 2 Parents often give their children rules with imperatives. Fill in
the blanks with an imperative, either affirmative or negative.
(Y0u may work with a partner.)
Do your homework.
Exauplss:
Don't eat so much candy
1. to strangers.
2. after school.
3. before dinner.
4. before you cross the street.
5. your brothers and sisters.
6. with matches.
7. your grandparents.
8. before you go'to bed.
Exrncrss 3 Choose one 0f the activities from the following list (or choose a
different one, if you like). Use imperatives to give instructions
on how to do the activity. (You may work with a partner.)
Exlt,tpt gt how to get from school to your house
Take the number 53 bus north on the corner of Elm Street. Ask the driver
for a transfer. Get offat Park Avenue. Cross the street and wait for a number
18 bus.
248 Lesson Nine

l. hang a picture
2. change a tire
3. fry an egg
4. prepare your favorite recipe
5. hem a skirt
6. write a check
7. make a deposit at the bank
8. tune a gutar
9. get a driver's license
10. use a washing machine
11. prepare for a job interview
12. get from school to your house
13. get money from a cash machine (automatic teller)
14. record a TV show on your VCR
Exrncrss 4 Work with a partner. Write a list of command forms that the
teacher often uses in class. Read your sentences to the class.
Open your booke to page 10.
ExRuplr,s:
Don't come late to claas.
1.
2.
3.
?.2 Lers
Let's go to the supermarket. We use l,et's* a base form to make

Let's hurry. an invitation or suggestion. .Lel's
includes the speaker in the
Let's not spend a lot of money. invitation.
LnNcuncr Norss
l. Let's is a contraction for let u,s.
2. For a fl€gatir.re, p:ut not afrer l,et's.

Exsnclsr 5 Fi[ in the blanks with an appropriate verb to complete this
conversation.
A. I need to cash a check.
B. We need to get some groceries. Let's qo

to the supermarket.
(ewmple)
A. Do you want to drive there?
B. The supermarket is not so far. Let's

(t)
A. It looks like rain.
B. No problem. Let's an umbrella

(2)
A. Let's . It's late and the store will close soon.

(3) (
B. Don't wory. This store is open 24 hours a day. (
I
A. We're almost out of dog food. Let's a 20-pound bag.
(4) I
(
B. Let's
(5)
then. I don't want to carry a 20-pound bag home.
I
Let's instead. (
(6)
(
i
(
Exsncrsr 6 work with a partner. write a few suggestions for the teacher or
(
other students in this class. Read your suggestions t0 the class.
(
ExRuplrs' Let's review verb tenses.
I
Let's not epeak our native languagee in claae,
1.
3.
Before You Read 1. Do you like to shop for new things such as TVs, VCRs, computers,
microwave ovens?
2. Do you try to compaxe prices in different stores before you buy an
expensive item?
250 Lesson Nine

Read the following ar[icle. Pay special attention to infinitives.
Getting the Best Price

fue you planning to buy a new appliance, such as a TV or microwave
oven? Do you want to get the best price? 0f course! Every shopper wants
to save money. But what do you do if you go to one store and see a VCR for
$275 and then go to another store and see the same VCR for $300? You
probably think it's necessary to go back to the first store to get the lower
price. But usually it isn't. You can simply tell the salesperson in the second
store that you saw the VCR at a better price. Usually the salesperson will
try to matchz the other store's price. However, you need to prove that you
can buy it cheaper elsewhere. The proof can be the advertisement from the
newspaper. If you don't have the ad, the salesperson can call the other store
to check the price. The salesperson doesn't want you to leave the store
without bupng any'thing. He wants to $ve you the best price. He wants his
store to make money. Some salespeople are happy to call the other store
to check the price.
What happens if you buy something and a few days later see it cheaper
at another store? Some stores will give you the difference in price for a
limited period of time (such as 30 days). It's important to keep the receipt
to show when you bought the item and how much you paid.
!'l<t ttttlt'lt a pdcc rnt,:rrrs 1o give yorr ittt crlutl ;lricc
Imperatives;lnfinitives;Modals 251
qE Verbs Followed by an Infinitive
a
,g CM
t
I
(
I want to get the best price. (
The salesperson hopes to make a sale. (
We are planning to buy a new TV.
(
(
(
LnxcuncE NorEs (
(
1. An infinitive is to * the base form of a verb: to go, to be, to haue.
2. We often use an infinitive after the following verbs. (
begin hope prefer I
continue like promise I
decide love start (
expect need try
forget plan want (
3. An infinitive never has an ending. It never shows the tense. Only the I
flrst verb shows the tense.
He needs to buy a new TV.
I
We wanted to get the best price. {
I'm planning io conxpare pnces at several stores. {
4. In an infinitive, we often pronounce lo like "ta," or, after a d sound {
or vowel sound, like "da" Listen to your teacher pronounce these
sentences
{
Do you like lo dance? {
I try tn ersrci.se every day. I
I decided to leaue. I
I need to talk to you.
In fast, informal speech, usant to is often pronounced "wanna." Listen I
to your teacher pronounce these sentences. i
' I want to go home. : I "wanna" go home. I
Do you want lo leave now? : Do you "wanna" leave now? I
I
Exrnctss 7 Make a sentence about yourself with the words given. Use an
(
I
appropriate tense. You may find a partner, and compare your
sentences t0 your partner's sentences.
ExRrqprrs: like/eat
I [ike to eat pizza.
learn/speak
I learned to epeak Cerman when I was a child.
252 Lesson Nine

try/find
l'm trying to find a biqger apartment.
1. love/go
2. like/play
3. need/have
4. errpect/get
5. want/go
6. plan/buy
7. need/understand
8. not need/have
9. hry/learn
ExEncrss 8 Ask a question with the words given in the present tense.
Another student will ansrer.
Exluptrt like/travel
A. Do you like to travel?
B. Yes, I do. oR No, I don't
1. expect/pass this course

2. plan/graduate soon
3. plan/transfer to another college
4. like/rcad
5. like/study grammax

6. trylunderstandAmericans
7. tryllearn idioms
8. expect/return to your country
rei.
Exrncrsr 9 Ask a question with "Do you want to . .
?" and the words
given. Another student will answer. Then ask a rzh- question
with the words in parentheses ( ) whenever possible.
ExRuptr' buy a car (why)
A. Do you want to buy a car?
A. Why do you want to buy a car?
B. I don't like public transportation.
take a computer course next semester (why)

move (why) (when)
return to your country (why) (when)

get a job/get another job (what kind of job)
become an American citizen (why)
transfer to a different school (why)

take another English course next semester (which course)
learn another language (which language)
review the last lesson (why)
9.4 It * Be + Adjective * Infinitive {

I
(
a
It is important to save your receipt.
It isn't necessary to go back to the first store.
I
(
It is easy to shop.
(
{
(
LnNcuncr Nores (
We can use an inflnitive after the following a{iectives:
(
dangerous good possible expensrve (
difficult hard necessary impossible (
easy important fun (
(
254 Lesson'Nine I
I
(
Exr,ncrss l0 Complete each statement.
ExRMplg' It's expensive to ,*n a bi7 car'
i. lt's important to learn
2. lt's hard to pronounce

o
J. It's hard to Iift
4. It's necessary to have
5. It's easy to learn
6. It's hard to learn
7. It isn't important to lcrow
Exencrss II Complete each statement with an infinitive phrase.

Ex,ll'rpr.r:
to ride a bike.
It's easy
1. It's fun
2. It's impossible
3. It's possible
4. lt's necessary
5. lt's dangerous
6. It's hard
7. It isn't good
8. It isn't necessary
?.5 Be + Adjective * Infinitive
I am happy to call the other

store.
She is ready to buy a new TV.
We are glad to help you.

LnNcuecr Norrs
We can use an infinitive after these a{ectives:
afraid happy prepared ready
glad lucky proud sad
Exsncrsp l2 Fill in the blanks.

ExRrqprr: I'm luc\y
to be in the U,5.
1. Americans are luclcy

2. I'm proud
3. I'm happy
4. I'm sometimes afraid
5. I'm not afraid
6. Are the students prepared
7. Is the teacher ready
Exrncrss l3 Answer the following questions. (You may work with a partner-
and ask and answer-wittr your partner.)
1. Are you happy to.be in this country?
2. Is it important to.lorow English or another language in your counhy?
3. Are you afraid to make a mistake when you speak English?
4. Is it possible to find a job without lcrowing any English?
5. Is it easy to learn English grammar?
6. Is it important to wear a seat belt when you axe a passenger in a car?
i. :'. ,
7.
I
Is it necessary to have a computer?

8. Were you sad to leave your country?
9. Are you prepared to have a test on this'lesson?
ff.& Using the Infinitive to Show Purpose
I went to the store to buy a VCR. We use the infinitive to show the
I bought a VCR to record my purpose of an action. We can elso
favorite programs. say in order fo: I bought a VCR in
order to record my favorite
The saleswoman called another programs.
store to check the price.
256 Lesson Nine

Exrncrsr 14 ru in the blanks to show purpose.
Exlt*,tPtg, I bought a phone card to call my frtends

1. I use my dictionary to
2. At the end of a concert, people applaud to
3. He went to the customer service counter to
4. She worked overtime to
5. I bought the Sunday newspaper to
6. You need to show your driver's license to
7. You can use a hammer to
8. Some people join a health club to
9. On a computer, you use the mouse to
10. When you return an item to a store, take your receipt to
9"? Ovewiew of Modals
can 1. Modals are different from other verbs because they don't have an -s,
could -ed, or -ing ending.
He can drive. (Nor: He carzs drive.)
should
2. Modals are different from other verbs because we don't use zrr
will infinitive after a modal.s We use the base form.
would Corupene:
may He wants to leave. He likes to swim.
He must leave. He can swim.
might
3. To form the negative, ptrt not after the modal.
must He should not drive.
You must not talk during a test.
4. Some verbs are like modals in meaning: haue to, be able to
He must sign the lease. : He has to sign the lease.
He can pay the rent. : He is able to pay the rent.
Observe statements and questions with a modal verb.
Mario study English.

He study literature.
he study grammar? Yes, he should.
he study grammar?
he study literature?
Who study literature?
3 Exception: ought to. Ought to means slrozld
Imperatives; Infinitives; Moda kzfr

Before You Read 1. Do you see coupons in magazines and newspapers? Do you use them?
2. Do you see signs that say "rebate" on store products? Du you see
signs that say "Buy one, get one free"?
MANUFACTURER'S COUPON I OO NOT DOUBLC I EXPIRES 121 121 OO I

I
I
I
.l
Save 500
:r - ; '-J-'IY5*I'":i
lL
!!
I
ll -
''i*;"ri
' 'r
:*'
{--J
'1,.1*t,
off next purchase of any E
CONSUMER: Limit one coupon
p€r purciase.
i
I Best Ghoiloe soup RETAILER: Please redeem lor
face value as specified. Any
I Other Use Constitutes Fraud.
Cash value 1/1OO cent. ililrtffiilruIilt
I
I
I
I
,lt Read the following article. Pay special attention to modals and related
i errpressions.
rl
Smart Shopping: Coupons, Rebates,

and Rain Checks
Manufacturers often send coupons to shoppers. They want people to try
their products. If you always use the same toothpaste and the manufacturer
gives pu a coupon for a different toothpaste, you might try the new brand.l
Coupons have an expiration date. You should pay attention to this date
because you'eannot use the coupon after this date.
Many supermarkets also have weekly specials. You might see a sign that
says, "Buy one, get one free" or "Tlvo for one." It's true: the supermarket
will give you one item for free. There is usually a limit on sale items. For
example, you might see a sign that says, "Eggs 490 a dozen. Limit 2." This
means you can only buy two dozen at this price. If you see a sign that says,
"3 for 990," you don't have to buy three items to get the special price. If
you buy only one, you will pay 330.
if you see a sign that says "rebate," this means that you can get money
back from the manufacturer. You have to mail the proof of purchase and
the cash register receipt to the manufacturer to prove that you bought this
product. Also you have to fill out a small form. The manufacturer will return
aThe bruntl is the company nanre.
258
I
Lesson Nine (
(
Sometimes the money you receive is very small. You should decide if it is
worth it to spend money for a stamp in order to receive a check for $1.00
or less.
Rebate Form ur!

g1 t
:E
O
U-
(, (I
zip o :f
o_
N
Product Name: d-
Size,ryVeight: (o o
ri.
Store where Purchased ()
Date ol Purchase: I
I
o
tf
Proof o, Purchase attached: yes I no
43000 12611
lo o_
What should you do if a store has a special but you can't find this item
on the shelf? If this item is sold out, you can g0 to the customer service
desk and ask for a rain check. A rain check allows you to buy this item at
the sale price even after the sale is over. A rain check usually has an
expiration date. You must buy this item by the expiration date if you want
to receive the sale price.
There are many ways to save mone;,when shopping.
9.8 Can
Ability
Ifyou use coupons, you can save money.
The sign says, "Eggs 490. Limit Tlvo." You can only buy
two cartons of eggs at the special price.
That sign says "Cash only." You can't use a credit card.
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. The negative of can is cannot (one word). The contraction is cant't.
2. In affirmative statements, we usuallypronounce can kan/. In negative
statements, we prono.ince can't k*nt/. Sometimes it is hard to hear
the final t, so we must pay attention to the vowel sound and the
stress to hear the difference between carl and can't. Listen to your
teacher pronounce these sentences:
I can 96. kan/
I cd,,n't go. kalnt/

In a short answer, we pronounce cun kan/.
Canyou. help me later?
Yes, I can. lknn/
4. We nse can in the following idiomatic expression:
I cut't efford to buy a new car. I don't have enough money.
I saved my money, and now I can alford to take a vacation.
Exrncrsr 15 Fi ll in the blanks with can or can't to tell about your abilities.
Ex,quprrst I- can drive a car.
can't fly a plane.
1. I read without glasses.
2, I speak Spanish.
3. I drive a cax.
4. I play tennis.
5. I sing well.
6. I change a tire.
7. I save money.
8. I program a VCR.
Exrncrsr 15 Ask a'luestion about a classmate's abilities with the words

given. Another student will answer.
Exluptg, speak Spanish

A Can you speak Spanish?
B. Yes, I can. oR No, I can't.
1. write with your left hand 6. play the piano

2. type 60 words per minuie 7. speak Arabic
3. use a compdter 8. bake a cake
4. play chess 9. play the guitar
5. ski 10. sew
260 Lesson Nine

txERclsE I / Write down one thing that you can do well. Share your answers
with a partner or with the Lntire class.
jrrrr+i-i--.
t 1'l
ExERclsE t o 'lhese sentences are
-
true about an funericarl suppermarket.
Check (/) which ones are true about a supermarket in your
country.
1. You can use coupons.
2' You can sometimes buy two ilertls for the price of one.
3. You can cash a check.
4. You can buy stamps.
5' You can get money back from a manufacturer.
6' You can pay by check or credit card.
7- You can't bargain5 for flre price.
8' You can return an item if you're not satisfied. You can
get your money back.
9.
10. You can use a shopping cart. Small children can sit in
the cart.
11. If you have a small number oi items, you can go to a

special lane.
12' -..--------- You can shop 24 hours a day (in some supermarkets).
? .9 shoutd,
You should look atthe date on

a coupon.
You should rJr:r:ide if it's worth
it to mail in thc rebate.
That milk i.g okl. You ehould not
use it. you should
throw it away.
To bargain {r* a priu' rn(:ans l.o make a.n offer lower than l.lrr. ltllr:t; l.ht, seller is asking.

LnNcuncs Norss
The contraction for sh,ould not is should,rL't.
Exrncrsr l9 What should a person do with each of the following health

problems? Write a sentence of advice for each one. (You may
work with a partner.)
ExRrqprr: He has a headache.
He ahould take an aepirin and lie down,
1. He has a stomachache.
2. She has a cut.
3. He has a burn.
4. She has a cold.
5. He has a fever.
6. She has a toothache.
7. He's always nervous.
8. She has a backache.
Exsncrsr 2O A father is giving his son advice. What advice do you think he is
giving? Write sentences with should. (You may work with a
partner.)
Exnupus: You eat hot dogs, fries, and colas all the time.
You ahould eat more fruits and veqetables.
You shouldn't eat ao much junk food.
1. You spend too much time at the computer.
2. You always ask me for money.
3. You always wait until the last minute to study for a test.
-i
,l
I
I
i1
l
4. Your hair is too long.
ii
r
:{
i
1
262 Lesson Nine
I
I
i
5. Your ciothes look difty.
6. You talk for hours on the phone with your friends.
7. You never clean your room. It's a mess!6
8. You never listen to your mother when she tells you something.
9. You want your driver's license, but you're not responsible.
Exrncrss 2l Check (/)

if you agree or disagree about rnrhat schoolchildren
should or shouldn't do. Discuss your answers with the whole
class or in a small group.
I agree. I disagree.
1. Children should go to a teacher with a family problem.

2. They should play video garnes.
3. They should select their own TV programs.
4. They should not trust all adults.
5. They should always tell the truth.
6. The5, should be responsible for taking care of younger
sisters and brothers.
7. They should select their own friends.
8. They should always obey their parents and teachers.
9. They should learn to use a computer.
10. They should study a foreign language.
11. They should help their parents with small jobs in the
house.
Exrncrsr 22 nead each statement. Then ask a question with the word in
parentheses ( ). Another student will answer.
Exnuprr, The students should do the homework (why)

A. Why should they do the homework?
B. It helps them understand the lesson.
6 A rl?ss is a disorganized place.

1. The students should study the lessons. (why)
2. The teacher should take attendance. (when)
3. The students should bring their textbook to class. (what else)
4. I should study modals. (why)
5. We should register for classes early. (why)
6. The teacher should speak clearly. (why)
7. The students shouldn't talk during a test. (why)
8. We shouldn't do the homework in class. (where)
9. The teacher should announce a test ahead of time. (why)
F.€* Must
You must send a proof of purchase for a rebate.

You must include your receipt.
You must have a license plate on the back of your car.

A driver must stop at a red light.
You must not park at a flre hydrant.
LnruculcE NorEs
1. The contraction for must not is mustn'L
2. Must not and cannot are very close in meaning.
You must not park at a fire hydrant. Qt's against the law.)
You cannol park at a fire hydrant. (It is not permitted.)
ExsRctsr 23 fiU in the blanks with rnust or rnust not for driving rules.
Exnuptgs' You
must stop at a red light.
You
must not drive slowly on the expressway.
1. You pass a driving test if you want a driver's license.
2. If a school bus stops in front of you, you stop.

o
.). You park at a bus dtop.
4. You put money in a parking meter during business
hours.
264 Lesson Nine

5. You drive over the speed limit.
6. You use your turn signal before you make a turn.
Exrncrsr 24 tlame something.

Exeuptr, Name something you must have if you want to fuive.
You must have a license.
1. Name something you must do or have if you want to leave the country.
2. Name something you must not carryr onto an airplane.
3. Name something you must not do in the classroom.
4. Name something you must not do during a test.
5. Name something you must not do or have in your apar[ment.
6. Name something you must do or have to enter an American university.
F.€ € Must vs. Haae To
You must use a coupon by a certain date. : It is a rule.

You have to use a coupon by a certain date.
I have to buy groceries tomorrow. It is a personal obligation or

necessity.
You must not steal. lt is against the law.
If a sale says, "3 for $1.00," you don't have It's not necessary to buy three
to buy 3 items. items to get the sale price.
You can buy one or two.
LnNcuncr Norrs
I. In affirmative statements, haue fo and must are very similar in mean-
ing. They both show necessity. Haae fo is more conunon than must
with a personal necessity or obligation. Must is stronger and usually
tells about rules.
I haue to go to the bank today.
I must go to court next week.
2. In negative statements, must arld haue to are very different. Must not
shows that something is prohibited, against the rules. Don't/Doesn't
haae to shows that something is not necessary.
You must not dnve without a license.
I don't haue to drive to school. I can walk.

3. In fast speech, haae to sounds like "hafba"; has [o sounds like "hasta" (
Listen to your teacher pronounce these sentences:
(
I have to leave now My friend has to leave too.
(
(
Exrncrss 25 Tell if yov haae to or don't haue to do these things at this
(
school. (Remember: don't haue lo means not necessary.)
(
ExRuptrs' srudy before a test
I llave to study before a test.
study in the library

I don't have to study in the library. I can study at home.
1. wear a suit to school 6. call the teacher uprofessor"
2. come on time to class 7. raise my hand to answer
3. stand up to ask a question in class 8. take a final exarn
4. do homework 9. wear a uniform
5. notify the teacher if I'm going to be 10. buy my own textbooks
absent
Exrncrsr 25 est your teacher what he or she hos to or d,oem't haue to da.
ExnuPtr: work on Saturdays
A. Do you have to work on Saturdays?
1. take attendance 5. work in the sununer

2. give the students a grade 6. have a master's degree
3. call the students by their 7. work on Saturdays
last names 8. come to this school every day
4. wear a suit
ExrRctsr 27 Wtte four sentences about students and teachers in your

country. Tell what they haae to or don't haae to do, Use the
ideas from the previous exercises. You may share your sentences
with a small group 0r with the class.
ExRuptrt ln my country, a atudent has to wear a uniform.
1.
2.
3.
4.
256 Lesson Nine

!
i
I
Exsnctsr 28 te.U what Judy has to or d,oesn't haae to d,o in these situations.
ExnNpr.s' Judy has a coupon for cereal. The expiration date is tomon'or,v. SI're has
u7e it by tomorrow or she won't qet the drscount
to
1. The coupon for cereal says "Buy 2, get 50( off." She has to
ln order to get the discount.
2. Judy has no milk in the house. Sl-re has to

more milk.
3. She has 26 items in her shopping cart. She can't go to a lane that
says "10 iterns or fewer." She has to another lane.
4. Eggs are on sale for 490, Iimit two. She
has three cartons of eggs. She has to
one of the cartons of eggs. - f..1'-- |
1/^..--
\"1'.\---
5. She has a rebate application. She has to fill \\n
out the application if she wants to get money
Ii t-\-
I flrtrl
I L i+a>=
\7 I (!^
( lel
back. She also has to i t ({
the proof-of-purchase symbol and the re- --{-- \l-

ceipt to the manufacturer.
6. She wants to pay by check. The cashier asks for her driver's license.
She has to
9 .12 Misht/May/wi;tt
I have a coupon for a new toothpaste. I might MaE and mi,ght have the same meaning.
buy it. I may like it and want to switch. They show possibility.
A rebate check might take six to eight weeks.
If you don't study, you might fail.
If the price is 3 for 994, you will pay 330 for I4lz/l shows certainty about the future.
one.
If the sign says "Two for one," the store will
give you one item for free.
LnNcuncr, Norrs
1. Compare maybe (adverb) and may or tnigh.t (modal verbs):
Maybe it wi,LL rain tomorrow.
\t may rain tontorrow. oR lt migh,t rai,n tomorrow.
2. \\'e do not usually make a contraction for may nol or migltt not,.

Exsncrss 29 f*what may 0r might happen in the following situations.
ExRuplr: Meg needs to go shopping. She's not sure what her kids want. They might
want a new kind of
cereal.
1.
I
She's not sure if she should buy the small size or the large size of
{
cereal. The large size may cheaper. (
2. If she sends in the rebate form today, she might (
a check in four or five weeks.

3. The store sold all the coffee that was on sale. The clerk said, "Sre
might more coffee tomorrow."
Bananas a.re so e>rpensive this week. If she waits until next week,
the price may
(
5. The milk has an expiration date of June 27. Today is June 27. She's
I
not going to buy the milk because it might I
She's not sure what brand of toothpaste she should buy. She might (
buy the one she usually buys, or she might

I
(
-. (
Exrncrss 3O tett what nxry or rnight happen in the following situations. If (
you think the result is certain, use will. (
ExRt'tplrs: lf you don't put money in a parking meter, you might get a (
parking ticket. {
(
lf you are absent from you may not paae the courae.
tests, I
If you don't pass the tests, you'll fail the coaree. (
(
1. If you drive too fast, (
2. If you get a lot of tickets in one year, (
(
3. If you don't water your plants, (
4. If you don't take the final exam, (
5. If you don't lock the door of your house, (
(
6. If you eat too much,
(
7. lf you work hard and save your money, (
8. If the weather is nice this weekend, (
268 Leeson Nine

Before You Read 1. Do you have a check cashing card at a local supermarket?
2. Do you pay with cash when you shop in a supermarket?
Read the following conversation betrveen a store clerk (A) at the customer
service counter and a store customer (B). Pay special attention to modals.
_,':.: ---
@ At the Customer Service Counter

A. Can I help you?
B. Yes. I'd like to cash a check.
A. Do you have a check-cashing card?
B. No, I don't.
A You need to fill out an application. Here's one. Would you fill it out,
please?
B. Yes. I don't have a pen. Could I use your pen?
A Here's a pen.
B. Thanks.
. . . Afew'mi,nutes later , . .
B. Here's my application.
A May I see your driver's license?
B. Here it is. Could you cash my check now?
A I'm sorry, sir. We have to wait for approval. We'll send you your check-
cashing card in the mail.
9.13 Making Polite Commands and Requests with Modals
These expressions are more polite than

S;Si) vou cash mv check, please? "Cash my check."
Mav I These expressions are more polite than "Give

Could I I u." your pen, please? me your pen."
Can )
I would like to cash a check. Would li,ke has the same mearing as wa?Lt.
How would you like your change? Would like is softer than uant. The
contraction of u:ou\d after a pronoun is 'd:
Id like to cash a check.

Larucuncr Norr,s
l. A command is very strong and is impolite in some situations. It is
softer and more polite to use rnodals to make a request.
2. Some people consider May I . . ? more polite than Can I . . . ?
for permission.
3. Another way to make a soft request or suggestion is with Why don't
you/we...?
Sit over there.
Whg d,on't you sit over there?
Let's go to the bank.
Why don't we go to the bank?
Exrncrgr 3l Read the following conversation between a waiter (W) and a

\ customer (C) in a restaurant. Change the underlined words to
make the conversation more polite.
would you like
W. What do you want to order?
C. I want the roast chicken dinner.
W Anything else?
C. Yes. Bring me a salad
W. What kind of dressing do you want?
C. Put garlic dressing on my salad.
W. Here's your salad, Miss.
C. Thanks. You lorow, it's a little cold at this table. Let me sit at another
table.
W. Of course. There's a nice table in the corner. Sit over there.
C. Thanks, and bring me anothel glass of water.
W. Of course. '
1. Imperatives
Sit down. Don't be late.
2. Let's
Let's go to the movies. Let's not be late.
270 Lesson Nine

3. lnfinitive Patterns
He wants to go.
It's necessary to learn English.
I'm afraid to stay.
I use coupons to save money.
4. Modals
He ean speak English. He has this ability.

An l&year-old can vote. He has permission.
Can I borrorv your pen? I'm asking permission.
can't You ean't park here. It's a bus stop. It is not permitted.
I can't help you now. I'm busy. I am not able to.
should You should eat healthy food. It's good advice.
sho,rldn't You shouldn't drive if you're sleepy. It's a bad idea.
may May I borrow your pen? I'm asking permission.

I may buy a new car. This is possible.
may not I may not be here tomorrow. This is possible.
might It might rain tomorrow. This is possible.

might not We might not have our picnic. This is possible.
must A driver must have a license. This is a legal necessity.

I'm late. I must hurry. This is a personal necessity.
j
I
must not You must not drive without a license. This is against the law
The manufacturer will send you a check. This is in the future.

You will not receive the check right away.
Would you help me move? I'm asking a favor.
I would like to use your pen. I want to use your pen.
Could you help me move? I'm asking a favor.
She has to leave. It's necessary.

She doesn't have to leave. It's not necessary.
Imperatives; Infinitives; Modals 27t

t. Don't use to aft,er a modal.
I must te go.
2. Use to behveen verbs.
to
They like^play.
3. Always use the base form after a modal.
He can swims.
drive
She can't driYkg the car.
4. Use the base form in an infinitive.
He wants to goes.
I wanted to worked.
5. We can introduce an infinitive with zt * a{ective.
Iti
important to get exercise.
Îs
Don't put an object between the modal and the main verb.
understand the leaaon.
ShecanM
7. Use the correct word order in a question.
can't vou
Why yeu-eInt stay?
Use an infinitive after some adjectives.

to
I'm happy meet you.
to
It's necessary have a job.
9. Use rwt after let's to make a negative.
not
Let's dent go to the parff.
10. Use don't to make a negative imperative.

Don't
Net come home late.
11. Use [o, notfor, to show purpose.
We went to the theater 6? ,.. a play.
272 Lesson Nine

PART I Find the grammar mistakes with the underlined words and
correct them. Not every sentence has a mistake. If the sentence
is correct, write C.
Exlt,tptts' You should to study more.
I don't have to work on Saturdav. C
1. I need cash a check.

2. What I can do for you?
3. I'm afraid to walk alone at night.
4. She has to leave early today.
5. We wanted to went home early last night.
6. Is necessary to have a car.
7. You must to go to court next week.
8. She can English speak very well.
9. Don't to walk so fast.
10. What I must do to get a driver's license?
11. He should study harder.
12. We want learn English quickly.
13. My brother can speaks English very well.
14. It's impossible learn English in one month.
15. She likes to swim in the ocean.
16. Let's don't make a lot of noise. Dad is sleeping.
17. I was glad to met him yesterday.
18. Don't worry. Everything will be all right.
19. She went to the school for talk to her daughter's teacher.

20. You should looking for a new job.
2L. The teacher always says, "Not talk during a test."
22.t I use spell check to checking my spelling.
PART 2 Fill in the first blank with to or nothing (X). Then write the
negative form in the second blank.
*n
UU 'rn noL ready tc atudy
ExRupr.ss, I'm ready study Lesson 10. I
Lesson 11.
You should drive carefirlly. You shouldn't drive fast.
1. I need learn English. I Polish.
2. You must stop at a red light. You

on the highway.
3. The teacher expects pass most of the students. She
all of the students.
4. We want study grammar. We

literahrre.
The teacher has give grades. He anA

to everyone.
6. We might have time for some questions later. We
time for a discussion.
7. It's important practice American pronunciation now. It
British pronunciation.
8. It's easy learn one's native language. It

a foreign language.
9. l€t's speak English in class.

our native languages in class.
10. Please attend the meeting. he here at six o'clock, please.
late.
274 Lesson Nine

Change each sentence to a question.
EHuptrs: I'm afraid to drive.

1tg1.r,
are J2u afrald to dr!'te?
He can help you.
when can he help me?

1. You should wear a seat belt.
whv
2. I want to buy some grapes.

whv
3. He must fill out the application.

When
4. She needs to drive to New york.

When
5. You can't park at a bus stop.
whv
It's necessary to eat vegetables.
whv
7. She has to buy a cax.
whv
They'd like to see you.
When
R.T 4 This is a p!o_r-re conversation,between a woman (w) and her

mechanic (M). choose the correct words to fill iir ftre blanks.
w. This is Cindy Fine. I'm calling about my car.
M.
can't hear you.
(euaruple: can't, mng rwt)
you speak louder, please?
(1 could,, rci,ght)
w. This is Cindy Fine. Is my car ready yet?
M. We're working on it now. We're almost finished.

w. When I pick it up?
(2 would, con)
M. It will be ready by four o'clock.

W. Horv much u,ill it cost?
M. $375.
\trr. I don't have that much money right now-. I pay by credit card?
(3 Catt, Migltt)
M. Yes. You use any major credit card.
(4 may, migh.Q
Later, at the mechanic's shop:
M. Ybur car's ready, ma'am. The engine problem is fixed. But you
(5 nzay, sltottldl
change your brakes. They're not so good.
w. do it right away?
I
(6 Do h,aue to, May I)
M. No, you do it immediately, but you
('7 rntrst not, don't haoe to) (8 toould, sltouLrl-r
do it within a month or two. If you don't do it soon, you har-e
(9 may, u,toukl)
an accident.
w. How much will it cost to change the brakes?
M. It cost about $200.

(10 rtould, tt:il.l.) I
w. I
(11 wilL, tuould)
like to make an appointment to take care of the brakes ner-t a
week. I bring my car in next Monday? a
(12 Can, Will) i
M. Yes, Monday is fine. ,""rA
*"* "orrr|ring
it in early because we ger \-erJ a
busy later in the day. a
W. OK. See you Monday morning.
a
J
PART 5 Decide if the sentences have the same meaning or different I
meanings. Write S for same, D for different. I
a
EXlptplfS, Would you like to go to a movie? Do you want to go to a movie?
We will not go to New York. We should not go to Ne,,r, York.
a
D
a
1. You should go to the doctor. You can go to the doctor. i
I
2. I may buy a new car. I must buy a new car. I
3. Could you help me later? Would you help me later?
T
a
4. She must not drive her car. She cloesn't have to drive her car. a
5. to leave immediately. She must leave imnrediatelv.
I
She has
a
6. We will have a t,est soon. We may have a test soon. a
a
J
27 6 Lesson Nine l
3
7. I can't go to the parby. I might not go to the party.
8. You shouldn't buy a car. You don't have to buy a car.
9. May I use your phone? Could I use your phone?
t0. He might not eat lunch. He may not eat lunch.
11. I should go to the doctor. I must go to the doctor.
L2. I have to take my passport with me. I should take my passport with me,
CLASSROOM l. Imagine that a friend of yours is getting married. You are giving him or her
ACTIVITIES advice about marriage. Write some advice for this person. (You may work
with a parbner or compare your advice to your partner's advice when you
are finished.)
lt's important lt's not important
It'e importanL to be honeEt. It'a not important to do every-

thinq to1ether.
2. Imagine that a friend of yours is going to travel to the U.S. You are giving
him/her advice about the trip and life in the U.S. Write as many things as
you can in each box. Then find a partner and compare your advice to your
partner's advice.
lt's necessary oR lt's important

oR You should It's difficult on You shouldn't
It'e neceeaary to have a It'E difficult to underatand

PaeePort. Ame:'tcan Enqlioh.
lmperatives; Infinitives; Modals 277

3. Working in a small group, write a list to give information to a new student
or to a foreign student.
should or shouldn't must or har,'e to don't ha-,.e to might or might not can or can't
You ahould bring your

f,ranecripte to thia
colleqe.
4. With a parbrer, write a few instructions for one of the following situations.
Exnuprs: using a microwave oven

You shouldn't put anything metal in the microwave.
You can set the power.
You should rotate the dish in the microwave. If you don't, the food
might not cook evenly.
a- preparing for the TOEFL?
b. taking a test in this class
c. preparing for the driver's test in this state
5. Bring in an application. (Bring two of the same application, if possible.) It

can be an application for a job, driver's license, Iicense plate, apartment
rental, address change, check cashing, rebate, etc. Work with a partner. One
person will give instructions. The other person will fill it out.
6. Bring in ads from different stores. You can bring in ads from supermarkets
or any other store. See what is on sale this week. Find a parbrer and discuss
the products and the prices. compare prices at two different stores, if
possible. What do these products usually cost in your country? Do you have
all of these products in your country?
DISCUSSTON In your country do shoppers use coupons, rebates, or rain checks?
WRITING Write about differences in shoppirig between your country and the U.S.
7The TOEFL is the Test of English as a Foreign Language.
278 Lesson Nine

hrnet Activities
1. Use the Internet to compare the prices of a product, such as a VCR, TV, or
computer.
2. Use the Internet to find application forns. (Examples: change of address

form from the post office; application for a checking account from a bank;
application for a credit card; application for a frequent flyer program from
an airline; motor vehicle registration form in your state)

G RAMMAR
Count and Noncount Nouns
Quantity Words
CONTEXT
A Healthy Diet
LESSON FOCUS
We can classify nouns into two groups: count nouns and noncount
nouns.
A count noun is something we can count. It has a singuiar form
and a plural form.
one egg eggs
five one American a thousand Americans
one book six books a child six children
A noncount noun is something we don't count. It has no plural
form.
bread suga.r cheese
milk oil rice
We can use quantity words with count and noncount nouns.
I bought afeus apples
I bought a l,ot of ice.
281
Before You Read 1. What kind of food do you like to eat? What kind of food do you
dislike?
2. what a^re some popular disites from your country cr native culture?
Fats, Oils, & Sweets

Use Sparingly Meat, Poultry, Fish,
Dry Beans, Eggs,
Milk, Yogurt, & & Nuts Group
Cheese Group 2-3 Servings
2-3 Servings
Fruit Group
Vegetable Group 2-4 Servings
3-5 Servings Bread, Cereal,
Rice, & Pasta Group
G-'11 Servings
(U.S. Department of Agriculture)
Read the fpllowing article. Pay special attention to count and noncount
nouns.
A Healthy Diet
Good nutrition is extremely important.
Eating the right kinds of food can keep you
healthy. It is important to get enough vitamins
and minerals. Vitamin and mineral supplements
1896
are important, but it is necessary to eat a well- t4%

1E%
balanced diet, too. 1t%

r8%
Did you know...? There are different food groups. It is im-

portant to eat some food from each group daily.
Americans spent The first group includes bread, cere&I, rice, and
$ l2 billion on paste. You should eat more foods from this
vitamin and min- group than from any other group. The second
eral supplements group includes vegetebles. The third group in-
nt 1997 . This is cludes fruit. The fourth group includes milk,
double the yogurt, and eheese. The fifth group includes meat, polltry,r frsh, bears,
amount spent in eggs, and nuts. It is also important to drink a lot of water. Nutritionists
1994. recommend eight glasses of water a day.
I Poultry includes domestic birds, such ab chickens, turkeys, and ducks.
282 Lesson Ten

You should avoid foods that contain a lot of fat, oil, and sugar. Also
avoid foods that are high in cholesterol. Cholesterol is a substance found
in animal foods. A little cholesterol is good for the body, but high levels of
cholesterol can be bad for the heart. Red rneat, eggs, cheese, and whole
milk contain a lot of cholesterol, and large quantities of these foods are not
good for you. Foods from plants don't contain any cholesterol.
fu people age, they need to make changes in their diet. People over 50
need to eat less to keep the same body weight. They also need to eat more
fiber.2 Foods which contain fiber are fruits, vegetables, beans, and rice.
Women over 50 need more calcium. f'oods which contain calcium are milk,
yogurt, and cheese.
Good nutrition and exercise help prevent disease and give us longer,
healthier lives.
tG.* Noncount Nouns
Group A: Nouns that have no distinct, separate pafis. We look at the whole
milk yogurt soup
oil air bread
water pork meat
coffee cholesterol butter
tea paper poultry
Group B: Nouns that have parts that are too small or insignificant to count.
rice snow hair
sugar sand grass
salt corn popcorn
Group C: Nouns that are classes or categories of things. The members of

the category are not the same.
money (nickels, dimes, dollars)
food (vegetables, meat, spaghetti)
candy (chocolates, mints, candy bars)
furniture (chairs, tables, beds)
clothing (sweaters, pmb, dresses)
mail (letters, packages, postcards)
fruit (cherries, apples, grapes)
makeup (lipstick, rouge, eye shadow)
homework (compositions, exercises, reading)
(conli nued)
: Fibet'is the part of food that resist.s digesl.ion
Count and Noncount Nouns; QuantiW Words 283

Group I): Nouns that are abstractions.
Iove advice 'happiness
life lorowledge education
time nutrition experience
truth inteltigence crime
beauty unemployment music
luck patience art
fun norse work
help information health
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. Count and noncount are grammatical terms, but they are not always
logical. Rice is very small and is a noncount noun. Beans and peas
6rs elss very small but are count nouns.
You sometimes see the plural forms/oods arrdfru,i,ts. Foods means
kinds of food. Fruits means kinds of fmit.
Oranges and lemons are Jruits that contain Vitamin C.
Foods that contain a lot of cholesterol are not good for .,ou.
3. When you talk about candy in general, canfl,y is noncount. When you
look at individual pieces of candy, you can usb the plural form.
Children like to eat cotrd,y.
There are three canfl,ies on the table.
Exgncrss I Fill in the blanks with a noncount noun.

Exlt'tptgt Dread is in the first food group.
1. People should ddnk a lot of every day.
2. contains a lot of calcium.
3. Food from animals contains
4. Children like to eat but it's not good for their teeth.
5. Food packages have information about
6. Some people put in their coffee.
t. Women over 50 need a lot of
284 Lesson Ten

10.8 Ways We See Noncount Nouns E,
strip of bacon
a bortle of water a slice (piece) of a spoonful of i a loaf of bread i a piece of mail

a carton of milk bread sugar I an ear of corn i a piece of
a jar of pickles a piece of meat a scoop of ice I a piece of fiuit i furniture
a piece of cake cream i a head of lettuce l^^:^^^-
i a piece of advice
a bag of flour
a quar[ of oil
j
a can of soda a strip of bacon

,
i
acanci5'[21 I
anieceof
(pop)' a piece (sheet) of a
pound of meat IL. "- _. I information
a roll of fihr
a bowl of soup paper a gallon of L I a work of art
a cup of coffee a slice of pizza
a glass oi milk a piece of candy
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. We cannot put a number before a noncount noun. With a noncount
noun, we use a unit of measure, which we can count.
one cup of coffee
five cups of coffee
2. For a list of conversions from the American system of measurement
to the metric system, see Appendix G.
Exr*csr.2 Think of a logical measurement for each of these noncount

n0uns.
Exnuplr,s: She bought one Pound of coffee.
she drank two cuPa of coffee.
1. She ate meat.

2. She bought meat.
3. She bought bread.
4. She ate bread.

5. She bought nce.
6. She ate nce.
7. She bought sugar.
8. She put sugar in her coffee.
'' Some Americans say "so<la"; othcrs say "pop-"

9. She bought gas for her car.
10. She put motor oil into her car's engine.

11. She used paper to do her homework.
t2. She took film on her vacation.

13. She ate soup.
t4. She ate corn.
€ *.re A Lot of, Much, Many
He baked many cookies. He baked a lot of bread.

He baked a lot of cookies.
He didn't bake many He didn't bake much bread.

cookies.
He didn't bake a lot of He didn'tbake a lot ofbread
cooicies.
Did he bake many cookies? Did he bake much bread?

Didhe bake alot of cookies? Did he bake a lot of bread?
How many cookies did he How much bread did he
bake? bake?
LnNcuncs Norrs
1. We rarely use much in affirmative statements. We usually use it with
questions and negatives. In affirmative statements, we'use o lnt of.
Did he drink much coffee?
No, he didn't drink much coffee.
He drank a lot of water.
2. When the noun is omitted, we say a lot, not o lnt of.
Did he bake o lot of bread?
No, he didn't bake o Jof because he didn't have time.
Exrncrsr 3 Fill in the blanks with nluch, nl,anA, or a llt of. ln some cases,
more than one answer is possible.
Exluprrs: She doesn't eat ffiuch pdsta.

Many American supermarkets are open 24 hours a day.
286 Lesson Ten

1. In the sununer in the U.S., there's
2. Children usually drink milk.
3. American people have an unhealthy diet.
4. I drink coffee only about once aweek. I don't drink coffee.
5. There are places that sell fast food.
6. It's important to drink water.
7. How glasses of water did you drink today?
8. How fruit did you eat today?

9. How cholesterol is there in one egg?
10. It isn't good to eat candy.
E *"€ A Few, A Little
I bought a few bananas. I spent a little money.

She ate a few cookies. She put a little sugar in her tea.
LnNcuncE NorES
We use a.fsto and o little to show a small quantity. We use a faa with
count nouns. We use a li,ttle with noncount nouns.
Exrncrsr 4 Fill in the blan}c with o fuw or a little.

Exlptplrs, He has
a few good friends.
He has
a little time to help you.
1. Every day we study gramrnar.
2. We do exercises in class.
tf. The teacher gives homework every day.

4. We do pages in the book each day.
5. students always get an A on the tests.

6. It's impor[ant to eat fmit every day.
Count and Noncount Nouns; Quantity Words 287

7. It's important to eat pieces of fruit every day.
8. I use milk in my coffee.

9. I receive mail every day.
10. I receive letters every day.
€ *"5 Some, AnA, and A
Aff,rmative I ate an apple. I ate some grapes. I ate some rice.

I didn't eat an I didn't eat any I didn't eat any
apple. grapes. rice.
.puestion Did you eat an Did you eat any Did you eat any
apple? grapes? rice?
LnNcuacE NorEs
1,, We sometimes use sonle for questions.
Do you want sorle fruit? : Do you want any fn;.jrt?
2. To make a negative statement with both plural count and noncount
nouns, we can vse onA with a negative verb, or we can use n o with
an affirmative verb.
Coupenp: I didn't btry any apples.
I bought zo apples.
I don't have any fruit at home.
I have rn fnljrt at home.
Exsncrss 5 Fill in the blanks with a, an, sorne, ot any ,
ExRMpr.r: I ate an
apple.
1. I ate
2. I didn't buy potatoes.
3. Did you eat watermelon?
4. I don't have sugar.
5. There are apples in the refrigerator.
6. Do you want orange?
7. Do you want cherries?
----:4-
288 Lesson Ten
8. I ate banana.
9. I didn't eat strawberries.
Exsncrsr 6 Make a statement about people in this class with the words
given and an expression 0f quantity. Practice count nouns.
Exluplrs, Vietnamese student(s)

There are a few Vietnamese students in this class.
Cuban student(s)
There's one Cuban student in this class.
1. Polish student(s) 6. man/men

2. Spanish-speaking student(s) 7. teacher(s)
3. American(s) 8. American citizen(s)
4. child(ren) 9. senior citizen(s)
5. woman/women 10. teenager(s)
Exsnclsr 7 Fill in the blanks with an appropriate expression 0f quantity. In

some cases, more than one answer is possible. Practice
noncount nouns.
ExRt,tptg, I can't eat eggs because they have
a lot of cholesterol.
1. You shouldn't eat so much red meat because meat has

cholesterol.
2. Onlyanimalproducts containcholesterol. There is choles-
terol in fruit.
3. Diet colas use a sugar substitute. They don't have sugar.
4. There is suga-r in a cracker, but not much.

5. Plain popcorn is healthy, but buttered popcorn has fat.
6. Coffee has caffeine. Tea has caffeine too, but not as much
as coffee.
7. She doesn't drink tea. She only drinks tea occasionally.

8. I usually put butter on a slice of bread.
9. I'm going to put some sugar in my coffee. Do you want
sugar in your coffee?
10. My sister is a vegetarian. She doesn't eat meat at all. She
fish or chicken either.

Exencrsr 8 Ask a question vmth much and the words given. Use eat or
dri,nk. Another student will answer. Practice noncount nouns.
Exlt,tptEs, candy
A. Do you eat much candy?
B. No. I don't eat any candy.
fruit
A. Do you eat much fruit?
B. Yes, I eat a lot of fruit.
Eat Drink
1. rice 7. apple juice
2. fish 8. Iemonade
3. chicken 9. milk
4.'pork 10. tea
5. bread 11. coffee
6. cheese 12. soda or pop
Exrncrsr 9 Ask a question with "Do you have . . ." and the words given.
Another student will answer. Practice both count and noncount
nouns.
ExRtqptrst American friends

A. Do you have any American friends?
B. Yes. I have a Iot of American friends.
free time
\r A. Do you have any free time?
B. No. I don't have any free time.
1. money with you now 5. orange juice in your refrigerator
2. credit cards 6. plants in your apartment
3. bread at horne 7. family pictures in your wallet
4. bananas at home 8. time to relax
Exrncrsr, l0 This is a conversation between a husband (H) and wife (W).

Choose the correct word to fill in the blanks.
H. many
Where were you today? I called you from work
(ea'antltlc: tnttclt, morty '
times, but there was no answer.

W. I went to the supermarket today. I bought things.
(l n titttr', rrf"a
H. What did you buy?
29O Lesson Ten

w. There was a special on coffee, so I bou$r, coffee.
,^ **rr,r"",
I didn't buy fruit, because the prices were verT
(3 ang, rn)
high.
H. How money did you spend?

(4 muclt, many)
w. I spent
- money because of the coffee. I bought 10
(i *uin, a t t-n
one-pound bags.
H. It took you a long time.
w. Yes. The store was very crowded. There were
(6 munh, many)
people in the store. And there was traff,c at that
(7 a lot oJ, mtrch)
hour, so it took me time to drive home.
(8 a Lot of, mu,ch)
H. There's not time to cook.
(9 mu,ch, mang)
w. Maybe you can cook today and let me rest?

H. I-fh. . Idon'thave
(10 m,uch, no)
expenence. You do it better.
You have expenence.

(11 a lpt oJ, rnuch)
W. Yes. I have because I do it all the time!

(12 a lat oJ, a lpt)
Exsncrsr I I This is a conversation between a waitress (W) and a customer

(C). Fill in the blanks with an appropriate quantity word. (In
some cases, more than one answer is possible.)
Would you like any (or eome) coffee, sir?
(era.mplc)
Yes, and please bring me crearn too. I don't need

(1)
sugar. And I'd like a of orangejuice, too.
(2) (3)
Afew minutes laten

W. Are you ready to order, sir?
C. Yes, I'd like the scrambled eggs with three of bacon. And
(4)
some pancakes, too.
Do you want symp with your pancakes?
(5)
Yes. What kind do you have?

W. We have kinds: strawberry, cherry, blueberry,
(6)
maple ..,
C. I'11 have the strawberry syrup. And bring.me butter too.
-.different
\fter the custamer is finished, eattng:
W. Would you like dessert?
(8)
C. Ye;,, I'd like a -- ,76 pie.,And put rce cream
€nu* (10)
on the pie. And I'd like ' ' more coffee, please.
(1 1)
Aftor the cu,stomsr eats' d,gssert:
W. Would you like anytkring else?

C. Just the check. I don't have cash with me. Can I pay by
(12)
credit card?
W. Of course.
€ #.6 A Lot o/vs. Too Much/Too ManE
I eat a lot of fruit. If you put too much sugax in my te4 I can't drink it.
I baked a lot of cookies. She invited too many people to the party, and there was not
enough food.
Lnrucuncr Norss
1. A lnt o/ shows a large quantiff. It is a neutral term. Too much and
too mony show that the quantity is excessive for a specific pu4lose.
2. In some cases, too much/too ryLonA zrnd'a lot oJ are interchangeable.
He eats a Lot of cookies. He's getting fat.
OR
He eats too many cookies. He's gettin g fat.
Exsncrsr 12 Fill in the blanks with rnuch or rnany, and complete each
statement.
Ex.quput If I drink ,on much

coffee, I won't be able to e,,lee? toniAht.
1. If the teacher gives too homework,
292 Lesson Ten

, If I take too classes,
o
D. ff I eat too candy,
-
4. If I'm absent too days,
5. Too cholesterol
J- ..E
?::
lrs=a::
='
,€:
Too Much/Too Mang YS. Too
I don't eat ice crearn. It is too fatteuing. I don't eat ice cream. It has too many calories.
It has too much sugar.
LnNcuncE NorEs
7oo comes before a{iectives and adverbs. Too much and too m,anA come
before nouns.
Exrncrsr l3 f iU in the blanks with too, too much) or tlo rnenu,

Situation A. Some students are complaining about the school cafeteria.
' They are giving reasons why they don't want to eat there.
Exluplrt It's norsy.
1. The food is greasy.
2. There are students. I can't find a place to sit.

3. The lines are Iong.
4. The food is expensive.
5. There's noise.
Situation B. Some students are complaining about their class and school.
1. The classroom is small.
2. There are students in one class.

3. We have to write compositions.
4. The teacher gives homework.
5. There are tests.

.=:=s-==::{::.-:::=: !
ExrncrsE l4 Write a few sentences to complain about something: your I
apartment, your roommate, this city, this college, etc. Use foo, a
too much, or too manA in your sentences. d
Exluplr' My roommate spends too much time in the bathroom in the moming. He's
d
too messy.a d
d
a
a
a
a
ExrRcrsr l5 f iU in the blanks vmth too, too much, or too manA if a problem
Fl==::.r=-:--sr:': : : :':=
e
is presented. Use a lot of rf no problem is presented. e
t
ExRuptr' Most people can't afford to buy a Mercedes because it costs too muc' a
money.
t
There are noncount nouns in English. a
1.
"Rice" is a noncount noun because the parts are

t
2.
count.
small to
e
e
3. If this class is
Ievel.
hard for you, you should go to a lo'*.er t
C
4. Good students spend time doing their homework, t
5. lf you spend time watching TV, you won't have time for a
your homework. e
6. It takes time to learn English, but you can do it. a
Oranges have vitamin
a
7.
8. If you are on a diet, don't eat ice crearn. It has

C.
calories
t
a
and fat. a
9. Babies drink milk. I
lf you drink
t
10. coffee, you won't sleep.
I
mf .l''lstfuoie:dvYt sil11:A;i rl .. C
Exrncrsr 15 I'doctor (D) and patient (P) are talking. Filt in the blanks with I
an appropriate quantity word or unit of measurement to a
complete this conversation. (In some cases, more than one {
answer is possible.) t
I
4
A ?ncs.sg person does not pul his or her l.hings in ordtr'. (
a
(
29+ Lesson Ten
t
t
D. I'm looking at your lab results and I see that your cholesterol level
is very high. Also your pressure is
blood
too high. Do
(erample)
you use salt on your food?

(1)
P. Yes, doctor. I love salt. I eat
(2)
potato chips and
popcorn.
D. That's not good. You're overweight too. You need to lose 50 pounds.
What do you usually eat?
P. For brealdast I usually grab
(3)
of coffee and a doughnut.
I don't have time for lunch, so I eat

(4) (5)
of potato chips and drink of soda while I'm work-
(6)
ing. I'm so busy that I have time to cook at all. So
(7)
for dinner, I usually stop at a fast-food place and get a burger and
fries.
D. That's a terrible diet! How exercise do you do?

(8)
P. I never exercise. I don't have time at all. I own my
(e)
own business and I have - work. Sometimes I work
(10)
8o hours a week.
D. I'm going to give you an important
(1 1)
advice. You're
guing to have to change your lifestyle.
P. I'M old to change my habits.

(12)

D. You're only 45 years o1d. You'rti young to die. And
(13)
if you don't change your habits, you're going to have a heart attack
I'm going to give you a booklet about stayrng heaiihy. ir has
information that will teach you about diet and
(14)
exercise. Please read it and come back in sk months.
Words that we use before count and noncount nouns
the x x x
a x
one x
two, three, etc. x
some x x
(affirmatives)
any x x
(negatives and questions)
a lot of x x
much x
(negatives and questions)
many x
a little x
a few x
1. Don't put o or an before a noncount noun.

90me
I want to give you an advice.
29 6 Lesson Ten
2. Noncount nouns are always sing,-rlar.
a lot of
My mother gave me man# adviced.
oiecea of
He received three maild today.
Don't use a double negative.

any
He doesn't have ne time. oR He haa nc tir:te.
Don't rse much with an affirmative statement.
Uncommon: There was much rain yesterday.

Common: There was a lot of rain yesterday.
Use o or an, not anty, with a singular count noun.

a
Do you have any computer?
Don't use o or axl before a plural noun.
She has * blue eyes.

7. Use the plural form for plural count nouns.
He has a lot of friendl
Omit o/after o Jol when ,* .,our, is omitted.
In my country, I have a lot of friends, but in the U.S. I don't have

a lot ef.
9. Use o/with a unit of measure.

of
I ate three pieces^bread.
10. Don't use o/ after mang, nl:tlch, a few, a little if a noun follows directly.
She has many ef friends.
He put a little ef sugar in his coffee.
11. Only use too much/too nxanA if there is a problem.

a lot of
He has a good job. He earns teffiu€h money.
t2. Don't use too muclt before an a{ective or adverb.
I don't want t0 go outside today. It's too mueh hot.
Count and Noncount, Nouns; Quantity Words 297

PART I Find the mistakes with the underlined words, and correct them.
write C.
Ex.euprrs, My dog doesn't get enough exercise. He's too iiti*eli fat.
You can be happy if you have a few good friends.
1. He doesn't have no money with him at all.
2. He's a lucky man. He has too many friends.
3. ThB.re are a lot of tall buildings in a big city" Ihere aren't a lot of in a small
tovvn.
4. I don't have much time to help you.

5. A l,{-year-old person is too much yOtmg to get a driver's license.
6. A few students in this class are from Pakistan.
t. I don't have some time to help you.

8. I don't have any car-.I use public transportation.
9. Did we hav'e many snow last winter?
10. Many people would like to have a lot of money in order to travel.
11. He doesn't have any time to study at all.
t2. I'd like to help you, but I have too many things to do this week. Maybe I
can help you next week.
13. She drinks two cups of coffee every morning.
14. I drink four milks a day.

15. He bought five pounds sugar.
16. How much bananas did you buy?
L7. How much money did you spend?
18. This building doesn't have a basement.
19. I have much time to read because I'm on vacation now.
20. She gave me a good advice.
2t. The piano is too much heary. I can't move it.
298 Lesson Ten

22. lhave a lot of cassettb, prbbably over 200.
23. I don't have much experience with cars.

24. There are many of books in the librar;'.
25. I have a little time, so I can help you.
?ART 2 Fill in the blanks with an appropriate measurement of quantiff.

ai;v)
Ex.eNplrr a of coffee
1-a of soda 6.a - 'ofadvice

2-a of sugar 7. a of bread
3.a of milk 8. a of paper
4-a * offumiture 9. a of meat
5.a of mail 10. a of soup
?AT,T 3 Read the following composition. Choose the correct quantity

word or indefinite article.
I had ?olne problems when I first came to the U.S. First, I
(eram,pl,e: sorte, oinA, a little-)
-
didn't have money. friends of mine lent
(1 much, a, sorne) (2 AJant, A li,ttle, Afew ofl
*o.reyl but I didn't feel good about borrowing it.
(3 som.e, a, any)
Second, I couldn't find apartment. I went to see
(4 a, an, tw)
apartments, but I couldn't afford of
(5 some, a little, an) (6 an, any, notw)
them. For months, I had to live with my uncle's family, but
(7 a littl.e, a few oJ, a few)
the situation wasn't good.
. Third, I started to study En$ish, but soon found

(8 a, arul, sorne)
job
and didn't have time to study. As a result, I was failing my

(9 rw, much, afaD)
course.
However, little by little my life started to improve, and I don't need
help from my friends and relatives an)rmore.

(10 no, sonte, muclt)
Count and Noncount Nouns; Quanl,ity Worrls 299

CLASSROOM 1. Make a list of unhealthy things that you eat. I\{ake a list of things that 1-o,;
ACTIVITIES need to eat for a healthy diet.
2. These are some popular foods in the U.S. Put a check (/) in the column
that describes your experience of this food. Then find a partner and compare
your list to your partner's list.
pruza
hot dogs
submarine
sandwich hamburgers
tacos
brealdast cereal
peanut butter
cheesecake
potato chips
popcorn
submarine sandwiches
chocolate chip
cookies
fried chicken
pretzels
tortilla chips tortilla chips
3. Take something from your purse, pocket, or book bag. Say, "I har-e
with me " Then ask the person next to you if he or she has
this.
ExRt'tptg: I have some keys h my pocket. Do you have any keys in your pocket?
I have a picture of my daughter in nry purse. Do you have any pictures

of your family in your purse?
300 Lesson Ten

4. fit and fill in the blanks rvith an expression
Cross out the phrase that doesn't
of quantrty to make a tme statement about the U.S. or another country.
FInd a parhner and compare your ans\vers.
Exnupr.r: There arelThere-aren* rnanY foreigners in ihe U,9.
a There's/There isn't interest in soccer in
b. There's/Ihere isn't oppoftunity to make money in
c. People in eatldon't eat natural foods.
d. There are/There aren't single mothers in
e. Most people in have/don't have education.
f. Parents in give/don't give their children advice.
g. People in drink/don't d-rink
DISCUSSTON 1. I-ook at the dialog that takes place in a restaurant on pages 29I-292. Do
you think this man is eating a healthy breakfast? Why or why not?
2. Americans often eat some of these foods for brealdast:

cereal and milk, toast and butter or jelly, orange juice, eggs, bacon,
coffee
Describe a typical brealdast for you.
Most American stores sell products in containers: bags, jars, cans, etc. How
do stores in other countries sell products?
4. Do stores in other countries give customers bags for their groceries, or do

customers have to bring thet own bags to the store?
Some things are usually free in an American restauranl salt, pepper, sugar,
crearn or milk for coffee, mustard. ketchup, napkins, water, ice, coffee
refills, and sometimes bread. Are these things free in a restaurant in another
country?
SAYING The following saylng is about food. Discuss the meaning. Do you have a similar
saying in your native language?
You are what you eat.
OUTSIDE 1.' Bring to class a package of a food or drink you eqjoy. Read the label for
ACTIVITY "Nutrition Facts." Look at calories, grams of fat, cholesterol, sodium, protein,
vitamins, and minerals. Do you think this is a nutritious food? Why or why
not?
2. Bring a favorite recipe to class. Explain how to prepare this recipe.
Count and Noncount Nouns; Quantity Words 30l

WRITING Describe shopping for food in the U.S. or in another country. You may inclu,le
infomration about the following:
. packaging
. open market vs. stores
. self-sen'ice vs. service from sales people
. sl-ropping carts
. fixed prices vs. negotiable prices
. freshness of food
Internet Activities
1. Go to the Department of Agriculture web site. Find the food p;,e'anlid chan
and brochure. Fill out the form called "How to Rate Your Diet."
2. Use the Internet to find a recipe for something you like to eat. Bring the
recipe to class.
302 Lesson Ten

C RAMMAR
Adjectives
Noun Modifiers
Adverbs
C ON TEXT
Helen Keller
Grandma Moses
LESSON FOCUS
An adjective describes a noun.
That's a red light.
A noun can also describe a noun.
That's a traffic light.
An adverb can describe a verb.
She stopped quickly.
303
Before You Read 1. In your coun!ry, are there special schools for handicapped people?
2. Do you lorow of a famous person who was handicapped?
Read the following article. Pay special attention to a{ectives and adverbs.
Helen Keller
Helen'Keller was a healthy baby. But when she was 19 months old, she
had a sudden fever. The fever disappeared, but she hecame blind and deaf.
Because she couldn't hear, it'was dfficult for her to learn to speak. fu she
grew up, she was angry and frustrated because she couldn't understand or
communicate with people. She became wild, throwing things and kicking
and biting.
When Helen was 7 years old, a teacher, Anne Sullivan, came to live with
Helen's family. First, Anne taught Helen how to talk with her fingers. Helen
was exeited when she realized that things had names.. Then Anne taught
Helen to read by the Braille system. Helen learned these skills quiekb.
However, lea^rning to speak was harder. Anne continued to teach Helen
patiently. Finally, when Helen was 10 years old, she could speak clearly
enough for people to understand her.
Helen was very intellfuent. She went to an institute for the blind, where
Did you know...? she did very well in her studies. Then she went to college,t where she
graduated with honors when she was 24 years old. Helen traveled extensively
ln Washington, with Anne. She worked tirelessly, traveling all over America, Europe, and
D.C., there is a Asia to raise money to build schools for blind people. Her main message
specialcollege for was that handicapped people are like everybody else. They want to live life
deaf students- fully and naturally. Helen wanted all people to be treated equally.
Callaudet Uni- While she was in college, Helen wrote her first of manybool<s,T'lu SW
versity. of Ma Life, in 1903.
t tn the U.S., the wor.ds college and unioersity usually have the same meaning.
304 Lesson Eleven

,g* d
=s*
5 Ee.t Adjectives, Noun Modifiers, and Adverbs
Helen was a healthy baby. A{ectives describe nouns. We ca:r

She seemed intelligent. use a{ectives before nouns or afler
the verbs be, beconte, look, seent., and
She became blind. other sense-perception verbs.
Anne Sullivan was a wonderful
teacher.
She feltfrustrated. Some -ed words are a{ectives:

She was excited when she nt anried, diuorced, ercited,
learned her first word. frtt s trated, handi,capp ed, w ottied,
finished, located, tit"ed, crotnded
Ilandicapped people are like
everybody else.
Helen had a college education. We sometimes use a noun to describe

Helen wrote her life story. another noun.
Anne taught Helen patiently. Adverbs of manner tell how or in what

Helen learned quickly. way we do things. We form most
adverbs of manner by putting -Lg at
People want to live life fully. the end of an a(iective.
Exrnctss I Choose the correct word to complete each sentence.

Exlvpu: Helen was a@at-t@t/ si.ck baby.
1. She was h,o,ppy / Jrastrated when she couldn't communicate.

2. She learned sign language when she was 5 / 7 years old.
3. It was easy / hard for Helen to learn how to speak.
4. She graduated / didn't graduate from college.
5. She wanted handicapped people to be treated differently / equally.
Exsnctsr,2 Fill in the blanks with an appropriate adjective. Change a to an

if the adjective begins with a vowel.
This is a
intereoting
Exaupts:
1. This classroom is
2. English is a language.
3. The U.S. is a country.
A{ectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 305

I
4. This iook is very
5. I come from a ciw.
6. The story about Helen Keller was
7. Helen Keller had a life.
8. I don't like food.
€€"8 Adjectives
Arure'was a good friend. A{ectives are always singular.

I have many good friends.
Helen was a normal, healthy baby. Sometimes we put two a{iectives
before a noun. We sometimes
separate the two a(iectives with a
cornma.
Some people have an easy Afber an a{ective, we can substitute

childhood. Helen had a hard one. a singular noun with one and, a plural
We read a short story about Heien. noun with ozas.
We didn't read a long one.
Do you like serious stories or funny
Exsnctss 3 Ask a question of preference with the words given. Follow the
example. Use one or ones to substitute for the noun. Another
student will answer. '
ExRttplsst an easy exercise/hard

A. Do you prefer an easy exercise or a hard one?
B. I prefer a hard one.
funny movies/serious
A. Do you prefer funny movies or serious ones?
B. I prefer funny ones.
1. a big city/small 6. green grapes/red

2. an old house/new 7. red apples/yellow
3. a cold climate/warm & strictteachers/easy
4. a small carlbig 9. noisy children/quiet
5. a soft mattress/hard 10. used textbooks/new
306 Lesson Eleven

1€ .= Noun Modifiers
She had a good education. She had a college education.

She vvrote an interestlng story. She wrote her life story.
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. When two nouns come together, the second noun is more general
than the first.
A department store is a store.
A shoe department is a department.
When tvro nouns come together, the first is always singular.
A sh,oe department is a department that sells shoes.
Arose garden is a garden of roses.
3. When a noun describes a noun, the first noun usually receives the
greater emphasis in speaking. Listen to youf teacher pronounce the
following:
I need a winter coat.
She works in a sh5e store.
Exrnclsr 4 Fill in the blanks by putting the two nouns in the correct order.
Remember to take the s off the plural nouns.
ExRupres: People need a

winter coat in cold climates.
(coat/w.inter)
We buy groceries in a lrocery atore.

(groceries/stnre)
1. delivers the maii.

(letters/catrier)
2. You have an important

(ph,one/call)
3. Do you owrr a ?
(phone/cell)
4. Weusea- (bru.sh/paint)
to paint the walls.
5. lf you want to drive, you need a

(dfiuer's/License)
6. A lot of women like to wear

(fings/ears)
A{ectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 3O7

7. A maried person.usually wears a on his or
0aedning/rirry)
her left hand.
8. Please put your garbage in the
(can/garbage)
9. The college is closed during

(uacation/winter)
10. There's a good at 7 p.m.
(program/TV)
11. I'm taking a this semester.
(course/math)
t2. I bought some flowers at the
(flnwers/shap)
13. My is green.
(tceth/brush)
ll.4 Adverbs of Manner
Arure was apatient teacher. She taught patiently. We form most adverbs of marurer
Helen was a quick learner. She learned quickly. by putting -ly at the end of an
a{iective.
She had a elear voice. She spoke elearly.
She had a tull'life. She lived life fully.
This is a fast car. He drives fast. Some a(iectives and adverbs have
I have a late class. I arrived late. the same form.
We had a hard test. I studied hard.
I have art early appoinftnent. I need to wake up early.
Helen was a good studenl She did well in school. This adverb is completely different
from the adjective form.
LnNcuncr Norus
1. Adverbs of marurer usually follow the verb phrase.
Suanpcr VonsPHnesp AovEns
My friend did his homework quickly.
2. You can vse asry before an adverb of manner.
She types uery qnicl<ly.
308 Lesson Eleven

Exsncrss 5 Check (/) if the sentence is true or false.
i
i False
i
-:,'"::" -
at
1. Helen lost her hearing slowly. iv
:
2. Anne taught Helen patiently. :
!
:
3. Helen learned quickly. :
:
i
:
4. Helen never learned to speak clearly.
i
5. Helen didn't do well in college.
6. Helen wanted deaf people to be treated differently from
hearing people.
II .lt E
Spelling of -ly Adverbs
easy I Change y to i and add -lg. easily

Iuckily
happily
consonant * le simple Drop the -e and add, -ly. simply

double doubly
comfortable comfortably
nice nicely
free freely
brave bravely
LnNcuncE NorEs
There is one exception for the last rule: tnte-tru,ly
Exsncrsr 6 Fil in the blanks with the correct form of the word in
parentheses ( ) to give advice about driving.
ExauPlr, It is impor+"ant to drive carefully
(careJul)
_
1. Don't follow the car in front of you
2. Make sure your brakes are working

(sood)
A{ectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 3O9

3. Check yourrearview mirror
(Jtequent)
4. Drive on a curve.
(slow)
5. Don't use your horn

(unnecessary)
o. Don't drive ln rarn or snow.

(fast)
7. Ifyou have an accident, stop
(i.mmediate)
Exrncrsr 7 Fill in the blan}s with the adverb form of the underlined
adjective.
ExRuplrt He's a careful driver. He drives

carefully
1. She has a bilautiful voice. She sings

, You are a responsible person. You always act
3. You have a neat handwriting. You write

4. ['m not a good swimmer. I don't swim
D. He is a cheerful person. He always smiles
6. He is fluent in French. He speaks French

l. You have a polite manner. You always talk to people
.& Nq*"q are hard workers. They work

9. She looks sad. She said goodbye
10. You are a patient teacher. You explain the grammar
11. My answers axe correct. I filled in all the blanks
Exsncrsr 8 Tell how you do these things.

ExRprpr.s: write
I write a composition carefirlly and slowly.
1. speak English 7. drive

2. speak your native language 8. sing
3. dance 9. ffie
4. walk 10. work
5. study 11. dress for class
6. do your homework 12. dress for a party
319 Lesson Eleven.

: i i:].:i
Exrncrsr 9 Name something.
Exltqptr' Name some things you do well.

I speak my native language well.
I swim well.
I sing rvell.
1. Name some things you do well.
2. Name some things you don't do u,ell.
3. Name some things you do quickly.
4. Name some things you do slowly.
5. Name something you learned to do easily.
Exsnclss I O ttre adjective is in parentheses ( ). Use the adjective or change

it to an adverb to fill in the blanks.
A. I heard you moved last month.

B. Yes, we did. The move was
difficult We had
( er amp Ie : dif.fi.cult )
movers. They didn't behave

(1 terriblc) (2 responsible)
They arrived and worked

(3 late) (4 sloto)
So the move was very And they didn't do

(5 eqtensit-rc)
job.
(6 good)
A. What happened?
B. They were so with the furniture. They broke
(7 careless)
a few of my dishes.
(8 Jauoritn)
A. You seem very

(9 upset)
about this.
B. Of course, I'm
(10 upset)
A. WelI, the move's over now. Are you

(11 hnpps)
with your
new apartment?
B. We like the apartment. It's very big and
(12 contfortabLe)
AII
of our furniture fits But we're not

(13 easA)
A(lectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 3l I

\4rith our neighbors.
(14 ha,ppa) (15 rudc)
They have flghts. I can hear them
(17 clear)
right through the walls. I think both of them are
(18 crazE)
And they have a dog. The dog barks I can't
(19 corctant)
sleep with all their noise.
(20 peorefuL)
A. Are you going to talk to them about it?
B. I already did. I hied talking to them .They
(21 pohte)
said that thby would try to be more , but nothing
(22 quiet)
changed. I'm so
(23 onarv)
A. When you were nothing changed. You need
(24 polite)
to speak to them more and
(25 direct) (26 h,oncst)
Tell them to be or you're going to call the
(27 quiet)
police.
Before You Read 1. Do you licrow of any old people who have a healthy, good life?
2. Who is the oldest member of your family? Is he or she in good health?
Read the following article. Pay special attention to aery and, too.
Grandma Moses (1860-1961)

Anna Mary Moses was born in 1860.
She had a verT hard life working as a :Jr
farmer's wife in New York state. She
was always interested in art, but she
was too busy working on the farm and
raising her 5 children to paint. In her
70s, she became too weak to do hard
farm work. She Iiked to do embroidery,
but as she became older, she couldn't
because of arthritis. It was easier for
her to hold a paintbrush than a needle,
so she started to paint. She painted
pictures of farm life. A New York City
art collector saw her paintings.in a drugstore window and bought them.
Some of her paintings are in mqior art museums.
When she was 92, she wrote her autobiography. At the age of 100, she
illustrated a book. She was still painting when she died at age 101. Better
known as "Grandma Moses," she created 1,600 pictures.
d"6s
E E "q3 Too vs. Very
Grandma Moses was very old when Vajr shows a large degree. It doesn't
she wrote her autobiography. indicate any problems.
Her paintings became very popular.
Strc was too busy working on the Too shows that there is a problem.
farm to paint. We often use an infinitive after too.
She became too weak to do farm
work.
I I Fil in the blanks with aery or too.

Exsncrsr
ExlNples: Basketbatl players *" n"U tdl.

l'm
too short to touch the ceiling.
1. -In December, it's cold to go swimming outside.
2. June is usually a nice month.
3. Some old people are in good health.
4. Some old people are sick to take care of themselves.
5. It's important to know English.
b- This textbook is long to finish in three weeks.
7. The President has a important job.
8. The President is busy to answer all his letters.
9. Some Americans speak English fast for me. I can't under-

stand them.
A{ectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 31 3

(
10. I can speak my own language well.
(
11. When you buy a used car, you should inspect it carefully. (
L2. A turtie moves slowly. (
(
13. If you drive slowly on the highway,
you might get a ticket. (
a
t 1.7 Too and Enough

(
I
(
My mother is 60. My father is 65. He rides a bicycle every day.
She's too young to retire. He's old enough to retire. He gets enough exercise. I
d
Grandma Moses was too old
to do farm work.
She yas talented enough to
catch the eye of an art dealer.
She hadenough time to paint
when she was older.
I
a
Some Americans talk too fast Our teacher speaks clearly I don't have enough a
for me. enough for me. experience with American
English. a
a
LnNcuncE NorEs
I
l. Put foo before the a{iective or adverb. I
too young too slowly {
2. Pl;it eruough aft.er the adjective or adverb. (
young enough fluently enough
3. Putenough before the noun.
(
. enough money enough time (
mm*@&r'/'r,l
I
Exrncrsr 12 Fill in the blanks with loo or enougD plus the word in (
parentheses ( ). (
too young
I
ExnMpus: My son is 4 years old. He's to go to first grade. (
(young)
old enouqh (
My daughter is 18 years old. She's to get a driver's
(oa) (
license. (
(
1. I can't read Shakespeare in English. It's
(lmrd)
for
(
me. (
2. My brother is 19 years old. He's
(ol.d)
to get a driver's (
(
license.
(
314 Lesson Eleven {
(
o years old and in bad l-realth. My family takes
J. My grandfather is 90
care of him. He's to take care of himself.

(sick)
4. I saved $5,000. I want to buy a used car. I think I have
(tnoneY)
5. I'd like to get a good job, but I don't have

(erperience)
6. She wants to move that piano, but she can't do it alone. She's
not
(stt'ong)
7. The piano is for one person to move.

(lrcu,ug)
8. I sit at my desk all day, and I don't get

(erercise)
[. A{ectives and Adverbs:

Aomctn'ns Aol,Bnes
She has a beautiful voice. She sings t eautifully.
She is careful. She drives carefully.
She has a late class. She arrived late.
She is a good driver. She drives well.
2. A{ective Modifiers and Noun Modifiers:

Ao;rcrrve Moorren NouN Moolnnn
a clean window a store window
a new store a shoe store
warm coats winter coats
a new license a driver's license
3. Very/Too/Enough:
He's very healthy.
He's too young to retire. He's only 55.
He's old enough to understand life.
He has enough money to take a vacation.
Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 3l 5

1. Don't make adjectives plural.
firose are importants ideas.
2. Put the speciflc noun before the general noun.

truck driver
He is a dri,rer-truek.
3. Some a{ectives end in +d. Don't omit the -ed.

': ed
I'm finislL with nij, project.
4. If the a{ective ends in -ed, don't forget to include the verb be.
,to;
He married.
A
5. A noun modifier is always singular.
She is a letters carrier.

l
Put the adjective before the noun.

verv imoortant
He ha"d a'meeti'ng rc+impe*ant.
7- lJse one(s) after an a{ective to substitute for a noun.

. He wanted a big wedding, and she wanteO a smafile
8. Don't confuse too arrd aery. Too indicates a problem.

VCIN
My father is *ed healthy.
9. Don't confuse too mu,ch artd too. Too mtrch is followed by a noun. Too is
followed by an a{iective or adverb.
It's too mu€h hot today. Let's stay inside.
10. Plur errough af[er the a{ective.

old
He's enough eld to drive.
1 1. Don't use aery before a verb. Very is used only with a{ectives and adverbs.
He rcry likes the U.S. vary much.
316 Lesson Eleven

12. Put the adverb at the bnd of the verb phrase.
laLe
He l*te came home.
elowlv
He opened slewly the door. "
13. Use an adverb to describe a verb. Use an adjective to describe a noun.

He drives carefull
That man is very nicely.
write C.
Exlupr.ss, She is very carefully about money.
She drives very carefully. C
l. I took my olds shoes to a shoes repair shop.
2. It's too much cold outside. Let's stay inside today.
3. Basketball players are too tall.
4. The very rich woman bought an expersive birthday present for irer beautiful
daughter.
5. She is only 16 years old. She's too young to get married.
6. I found a wonderful job. I'm too happy.
7. My father is only 50 years old. He is too much young to retire.
8. He speaks English very good.
9. You came home late last night. I was very worry about you.
10. He worked very hard last night.
11. He counted the money very carefully.
12. My sister is marry.
Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 317

13. This college located downtown.
14. I prefer a small car. My wife prefers a large.
15. He won a prize. He seems very happily.
16. I very like my new apartment.
PART 2 Find the mistakes in word order and correct them. Not every
sentence has a mistake. If the sentence is correct, write C.
ExRuPtrs, ue *rit"s
He has enough time to do his homework. C
1. I got my license driver's last year.
2. My"brother is only 15 years old. He's not enough old to drive.
3. He early ate brealdast.
4. She opened slowly the door.
5. She speaks English very fluently.
6- They are too young to retire.
PART 3 Fill in the blanks with the correct form, adjective or adverb, of
the word in parentheses ( ).
ExRuptrs, sue is a patient person. Don does e..'erything im?atiently

(patimt) (im.pati,ent)
1. Sue has a handwriting. Don writes

(neae (sloppa)
I can't even read what he wrote.
2. She likes to drive . He likes to drive

(careJuQ $ast)
o
rJ. She speaks English .Hehasa
Uluent) (hard)
time'with English.
4. She learns languages Learning a new language
(easy)
tsi for Don.
(difJicu.l0
She types He makes a lot of mistakes. He needs
(o,ccarate)
someone to check his work

(careJuQ
6. She has avery voice. He speaks

(soft) (Loud)
318 LessonEleven
7. She sings He sings like a
(beautiJu|) (sick)
chicken.
8. She is always very He sometimes behaves

(responsible)
(chnW.ish)
9. She saves her money He buys things he doesn't

(careful)
need. He spends his money
(fooLish.)
10. She exercises . He's very

(regilar) (Laza)
about exercising.
CLASSROOM 1. Circle the word that best describes your actions. Find apartner and compare
ACTIVITIES your personality to your partner's personality. How many characteristics
do you have in common?
a I usually spend my money carefully foolisNy

b. I dc my homework willingly unwillingly
c. I write compositions carefully carelessly
d. I usually Walk slowly quickly
e. I write neatly sloppily
f. I like to drive fast slowly
g. i write my language well poorly
h. Before a test, I study hard a little
i. I exercise regularly infrequently
j. I play tennis well poorly
k. I Iike to live dangerously carefully
l. I make important decisions quickly slowly and methodically
m. I learn languages easily with difficulty
n. I learn math easily with difficulty
o. I make judgments logically intuitively
fi.fl"
sloppy
A{ectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 319

Game: "1. th".manner of'
Teacher: Write these adverbs on sepa.rate pieces of paper or on index cards:
gladly, suddenly, slowly, comfortably, sirnply, steaciily, ioolisNy, efticiently,
accurately, quietly, surpnsingly, excitedly, promptly, fearlessly, fearfully, in-
decisively, carefully, carelessly, neatly, smoothly, repeatedly. Make sure ttre
students lorow the meaning of each of these adverbs. Ask one student to
leave the room. The other students pick one adverb. When the student
returns to the room, he/she asks individuals to do something by gring
imperatives. The others do this task in the manner of the adverb that was
chosen. The student tries to guess the adverb.
Exeuprr,, Edgar, write your name on the blackboard.

Sofia, take off one shoe.
Maria, open the door.
Elsq walk around the room.
Nora, give me your book.
DISCUSSIONS 1. In a small group or with the entire class, rliscuss the situation of older
people in your native culture. Who takes care of them when they are too
old or too sick to take care of themselves? How does your family take care
of its older members?
2. In a small group or with the entire class, discuss the situation of handicapped
people in your home town. Are there special schools? Are there special
facilities, such as parking, public washrooms, elevators?
QUOTE Discuss the meaning of this quote by Grandma Moses:

"What a strange thing is'memory and hope. One looks baclavard, the other
forward; one is of today, the other of tomorrow. Memory is history recorded in
our brain. Memory is a painter. It paints pictures of the past and of the day."
WRITING 1. \ilIrite,about a famous person you lcrow about who accomplished something
in.spite of a handicap or age.
2. Write about a man or woman whom you admire very much. You may write
about a famous persion or any person you know (family member, teacher,
doctor, etc.).
:.
Internet Activity
LTsethe Internet to find more information about Anne Sullivan. Share this infor-
mation with the class.
32O Lesson Eleven

GRAMMAR
Comparatives
Superlatives
CONTEXT
U.S. Geography
A Tale of Two Cities
LESSON FOCUS
A{ectives and adverbs have three forms: simple
form, comparative form, and superlative form.
Compare these sets of a{iectives.
Sntple San Francisco is a bi.g clty.
Cotupenarn'u Los Angeles is bigger than San FYancisco.
Supsnreuvn New York is the biggest city in the U.S.
Smpln She is intelligent.
CoupeRauvp She is rnore intelli,genf than her sister.
SupnRLerrvp She is t}ire most intelligenl person in her family.
321
__
Before You Read 1. What is the tallest building in this city?

2. In your opinion, what is the most interesting city? Why is it interesting?
3. What cities or regions have the best climate?
Read the following information. Pay special attention to comparative and

superlative forms. -
U.S. Geography
1. In area, the United States is the thfud largest country in the
world (after Russia and Canada).
2. In population, the U.S. is the third largest country in the world
(after China and India).
3. The biggest city in the U.S. in population is New York. Chicago
used to be the second largest crff, but now Los Angeles is
larger than Chicago. I
4. The tallest building in the U.S. is the Sears Tower in Chicago I
(1,450 feet or 442 meters tall). It is even taller than the World (
Thade Center in New York. However, the Sears Tower is not the t
tallest building in the world. That building is in Kuala Lumpur (
(1,483 feet or 452 meters tall).
(
World Trade 5. New York CiW has the highest cost of living.
Center, 6. Hispanics are the fastest growing minority in the U.S. In 1990, {
New York there were 5.9 million Hispanics in the U.S. That rtumber rose I
to 20.9 million in 1996. I

7. Rhode Island is the smallest state in area I
8. Alaska is the largest state in area Alaska is even larger than (
Colombia, South America (
Did you know...? 9. The least populated state is Wyoming. It has less than half a
million people. I
Before 1849, the 10. California is the most populated state. It has about 30 million I
population of people. There axe more people in California than in Peru. I
California was 11. Juneau, Alaska, gets the most snow, about 101 inches per year. t
very small. ln t2. Phoenix, Arizona, gets the most sunshine. Eighty-five percent I
1849, gold was of the days have sunshine.

found in Califor- 13. Mount Mcl(inley is the highest mountain in the U.S. (20,320 feet
nia and about or 6,178 meters). It is in Alaska
100,000 people t4. There are five great lakes in the U.S. The biggest is Lake Supe
rushed there to rior. The others are Lake Huron, Lake Michigan, Lake Erie, and
try to get rich. Lake Ontario.
Lesson Thelve
18. € Comparatives and Superlatives
New York Crty is the triggest city in We use the superlative form to point
the U.S. out the number-one item in a group
California is the most populated of three or more.
state in the U.S.
Los Angles is trigger than Chicago. We use the cornparative forrn to

There are more people in California compare two items.
than in Peru.
ExrncrsE, I Circle the correct word to complete the statement.

Exnuptg' Chicago is bigger t@"ttdman Los Angeles.
1. The tallest building in the world i,s / i,sn't in the U.S.

2. The most populated state is Alnska / CaliJomia.
3. The U.S. i,s / i,sn't the largest country in the world in area.
4. Ataska / Cati,fornto has the largest area.
5. The fastest growing minority is Hispanic / Afri,can-Ameri.can.
12.2 Comparative and Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs
Ctne-sy[able a{ectives and adverbs tall taller the tallest

fast faster the fastest
Ercet'noxs: bored more bored the most bored
tired more tired the most tired
Twosyliable a{ectives that end in -E easy easier the easiest
happy happier the happiest
Other two-syllable a(iectives frequent more frequent the most frequent
active more active the most active
Some two-syllable adectives have two simpler the simplest
forms. more simple the most simple
common colnmoner the commonest
more common the most common
q O{her tx'o-syllable a{ectives that have two forms are hnndsome, qui,et, gent,Le, narrolD, cleuer,
jriend.ly. ang?U, poli,te, stupid.)
(tnnLin.ued.)
Comparatives; Superlatives 323

e
I
a
Ad.lectives u-ith three or rnore
syllables
important more important the most importani e
difficult more difficult the most difficult
J
-ly arlverbs quickly more quickly the most quickl5u I
brightiy more brightly the most brightly a
Irregular adjectirres and adverbs good/u,eIl better the best J
bad,/llaclly worse the w-orst t
far fafther the farthest J
little
a lot
less
more
the
the
least
most
I
J
I
Spon,rNc Rulps FoR SHoRT Ao;pcrwps AND Aor,nnes
a
a
Add -er and -esI to shorl ad.iectives tallest
e
and adverbs. fastest
J
J
For adjectives that end in 3r, change
y to i, and add -et" astd -est.
easiest
!
happiest
I
For a{ectives that end in e, add -r
and -.s1.
nicest a
latest
!
For u,ords ending in consonant- bigger biggest t
vou-el-consonant, double the f,nal
consonant, then add -er and -est.
sadder saddest t
Ercnrnox: Do not double final to. a
new-Ilewer-neweSt t
a
t
Exrncrsr 2 Give the comparative and superlative forms of the word. a
fatter the fatteat
t
ExRtqptrsr fat J
important
more.importanL the moeL important I
a
1. interesting I
2. young e
o
J. beautiful
I
i
4. good I
5. common I
b. thin I
a
I
a
324 Lesson lkelve
t
j
7. carefully
8. pretty
9. bad
10. famous
11. Iucky
12. simple
13. high
L4. delicious
15. far
16. foolishiy
€ 8"3 Superlative Adj ectives
New York is the biggest city in We use the superlative form to

the U.S. point out the number-one item of a
California is the most populated group of three or more.
state in the U.S. Use th.e before a superlative form.
LnNcuncE NorEs
l. We sometimes put a prepositional phrase at the end of a superlative
sentence.
in the world in my family
in my class in my country
2. We often say "one of the" before a superlative form. Then we use a
plural noun.
San FYancisco is one of the most beautiful cities in the U.S.
The Mississippi is one oJ the longest riaers in the world.
Exencrsr 3 Fi[ in the blanks with the superlative form of the word in
parentheses ( ). Include the before the superlative form.
ExRtqptrt Alaska is
the larqeet state in area.
(large)
t. lake in the U.S. is Lake Superior.

(bit)

2. river in the U,S. is the Missouri.
(l,onS)
3. mountain in the U.S. is Mount McKinley.

(hwh)
4. The computer is one of inlentions in recent

(intportant)
years.
5. Johnson is one of last names in the U.S.

(comm,on)
6. Casablanca is one of American movies of al]

(populat)
time.
7. Titonic is one of American movies of all

(eccpmsi.ue)
time.
8. Marilyn Moruoe was one of American

(benutififi)
actresses.
9. Harvard is one of universities in the U.S.

(good.)
10. The Sears Tower is building in the U.S.

. (tnll.)
11. Crime is one of problems in the U.S.

(bod.)
12. Boston is one of cities in the U.S.

(old,)
Exrncrss 4 Talk about the number-one person in your family for each of
these a{ectives.
ExnMptrsr interesiing
My aunt Rosa is the most interesting person in my family.
tatl
The tallest pe6on in my family is my brother Carlos.
f. intelligent 7. serious
2. kind 8. nervous ,
3. handsome/beautiful 9. strong
\
4. stubborn 10. furury
5. lazy 11. responsible
6. tall 12. neat
326 Lesson Thelve

Exrncrsr 5 Write a superlative sentence, giving your opinion about each of
the following items. (You may use "one of the . . ." plus tr
plural noun.)
ExRptptgt big problem today
The brgqeet problem in the U.9. today is crime,
OR
)ne of the bigqeet probleme in my native counLry today t:,tltr

economy.
1. exciting sport
2. bad war
3. bad tragedy in the world or in the U.S.
4. important invention of the last 100 years
5. interesting city in the world
6. big problem in the U.S. today
7. badjob
8. goodjob
9. hard teacher at this school
10. popular movie star
Comparatives; Superlativr:s 327

t 8"4 Superlatives and Word Order
Which building is the tallest? Put superlative a{ectives af[er the

The Sears Tower is the tallest verb be or before the noun.
building.
The Hispanic population is Put superlative adverbs after the

growing the most quickly. verb phrase.
It snows the most in Juneau. Put the n1,ost, the Leost, the best,
the utorst after a verb.
Phoenix gets the most sunshine. Put the nlost, the lcost, th.e best,
th,e utorst before a noun.
Exrncrsr 6 Name the person in your family who is the superlative in each
of the following activities. (Put the superlative form after the
verb.)
Exlnprss, cook well
My mother cooks the best in the family.
eat a lot
My brother eats the most in my family.
1. talk a lot 5. stay up late

2. drive well" 6. get up early
3. walk fast' 7. speak softly
4. Speak English well 8. eat a lot
Exsnclsr 7 Name the person'in your family who is the superlative in each
of the fpllowing activities. (Put the superlative form before the
noun.)
Exnurtr, watch a lot of TV
My brother watches the most TV. He watches TV four hours a day. (
1. spend a lot of money {

{
2. get a lot of mail
{
3. drink a lot of coffee {
4. spend a lot of time in the bathroom {
i
(
| 328 Lesson Twelve (
(
5. spend a lot of time on the telephone
6. have a bad temper
7- use a lot of makeup (women)
Before You Read 1. Is this city similar or very different frorn your natir,-e city?
2. Do you have any friends or relatives in American cities? Do you visit
them?
Iook at the following chart. Then read the sentences that follow. Pay
special attention to compa.rative forms.
A Tale of Two Cities
$118,000
dollar spent for each

student

average high temp in July
average low temp in

January
Seattle has d larger population than Minneapolis.

A house in Seattle is more expensive than a house in Minneapolis.
Unemployment in Seattle is higher than in Mirureapolis.
Minneapolis spends more on education than Seattle.
Seattle has more high school graduates than Minneapolis.
Seattle has more rain than Minneapolis.
Minneapolis has more snow than Seattle.
Minneapolis is sunnier than Seattle.
Minneapolis is warmer in the summer.
Minneapolis is colder in the winter.
Minneapolis has more crime.
Jobs in Seattle are growing faster than jobs in Minneapolis.
i?
& /idOtij
q
Comparisons
Minneapolis is sunnier than We use the comparative form to

Seattle. compare two items. We ttse than
A house in Seattle is more before the second item of
expensive th#n d house in comparison.
Minneapolis.
LnNcuncr Norrs
1. Omit thnn tf the second item of comparison is not included.
Minneapolis is suzrzier than Seattle, but it is colder.
2. Much or a littl,e can come before a comparative form.
Minneapolis is m.uch colder in the winter.
Unemployment is a littl,e higher in Seattle.
.
3. When a pronoun follows thnn, the most comect form is the subject
pronoun (he, she, I, etc.). Sometimes an auxiliary verb follows (is,
are, do, did, etc.).Informally, manyAmericans use the objectprorourr
(hi,m, her, nxe, etc.) after than. An auxiliary verb does not follow.
330 Lesson Twelve

Fonvar, INro.nuar,
She is taller than he (zs). She is taller than him.
She is older than I (am.). She is older than me.
Exrncrsr 8 Circle the correct words,to complete the statement.

Exluptr: Minneapolis has
@, kss crime than Seat[le.
1. Minneapolis has a larger' / smallet" population than Seattle.

2. Mirureapolis has nLore / Less snow t[an Seattle.
3. Houses in Minneapolis are nl,ore. erpensiue / Less erpertsiae thal.l
houses in Seattle.
4. Jobs in Minneapolis are growing faster / sl,owqrthan jobs in Seattle.
5. Minneapolis is a safer / more dangerous p-lpce to live.
Exrncrsr 9 Compare yourself to another person, 0r compare two people you

know using these adjectives.
EHuplrs: tall
My father is taller than I am. (on than me.)
talkative
My mother is more talkative than my father.
1. tall 5. thin 9. successful

2. educated 6. quiet 10. strong
3. thendly 7. stubborn 11. nervous
4. laay 8. patient 12. polite
Exrncrsr I O Compare men and women. Give your own opinion. Talk in
general terms. Discuss your answers.
Exlupr"t' intelligent
In my opinion, women are more intelligent than men.
OR
In my opinion, men are more intelligent than women.
1. polite 5. kind 9. romantic

2. strong 6. friendly I.0. sensitive
3. tall 7. talkative 11. logical
4. intelligent 8. patieqt 12. responsible

ll
' tr 'l lqr
Exrncrsr Compare this city to your hometown. ".'
Exlrqprrs, big
Tokyo is bigger than Boston.
crowded
Tokyo is more crowded than Boston.
1. crowded 5. beautiful B. safe

2. modern 6. interesting 9. dirty
3. big 7. cold in rnrinter 10. sunny
4. noisy
12.6 Word Order with Comparisons
'Houses in Seattle are more Put comparative adiectives after

expensive than houses in the verb be or before a noun.
Minneapolis
I want to move to a warrner
climate.
Hefou4d a job more quickly in Put comparative adverbs after the

Minneapolis. verb phrase.
She speaks English more fluently
than I do.
It rhins rhore in Seattle. Put more, less, better, werse aft"er

You drive better than I do. a verb.
Minneapolis has more sunshine Plat motb, less, fewer, better, u)orse
than Seattle. before a noun.
Seattle has less snow.
Exrncrss 12 Compare men and woinen. Give your oWir opinion. Talk in
general terms.. Discuss your" answers.
ExRptpr.gst work hard

In my opinion, women work harder than men.
talk a lot
In my opinion, women talk more than men.
1. run fast 3. take cae of children well

2. gossip a lot 4. worry a lot
332 Lesson Twelve

5. drive foolishly 9. think fast
6. work hard 10. Iive long
7. drive fast 11. get old fast
8. spend a lot on clothes 12. make decisions quickly
i | :1r i. :--s:-a=i: a:s: - i
Exrncrsr l3 Compare this city to your hometown. Use better, wqrse, or

rnore.
Exlptplrs' factories
Chicago has more factories than Ponce.
public transportation
Moscow has better public transpor[ation than Chicago.
1. haffic 7. factories
2. climate 8. tall buildings
3. rain 9. people
4. crime 10. sunshine
5. pollution 11. snow
6. job opportunities 12. homeless people
Exsncrsr, 14 Make comparisons with the following words. Give your opinion
and reasons. You may work with a partner 0r in a small group.
ExRupr.r: men/women-have an easy life
In my opinion, men have an easier life than women. Women have to work
two jobs-in the office and at home.
1. men/women-have responsibilities
2. men/women-live long
3. American women/women in my native culture-have an easy life
4. American couples/couples in my native culture-have children
5. married men/single men-are responsible
6. American teenagers/teenagers in my native culture-have freedom

7. Arnerican teenagers/teenagers in my native cult,re*rrave
responsi-
I bilities
i.
t;
8. American children/children in my native culture-have

toys
, children/children in rny native culture-have a good

*::"an
cauon
edu-
10. American teachers/teachers in my native culture-have

high salaries
11.. American teachers/teadrers in my native c,lture-get respect

!]
F-- {f rgii.:iie'r:
ExERclsE I D Fill in the. blanks with the comparative o. rup.rirtive form
-..-
of
the word in parentheses ( ). Include than oithe where
necessary.
ExaMprrS: August is usually hotter than

May.
(hnt)
Januaiy is usually the coldeat
' month of the year.
(cold.)
1. A lion is a dog.
(bis)
2. A whale is animal.in the world.
(bio)
3. A dog is a bird.
(intehigsnt)
4. A dolphin is one of animals in the world.
(intelli,gent)
5. New York is Los Angeles.
(crowd,ed)
6. Mexico City is one of cities in the world.
(cxttod,ed)
7. New York is a crowded city, but Tokyo is
(crowded)
8. San Flancisco is one of cities in the U.S.
(beaufi.rttl)
9. distance between two points is a straight line.
(shan)
10. Line A is
(short)
lineB. A_ B
334 Lesson Tkelve

+*?,i:ir:a:: ::= .j
Exrnctsr 15 fho students in Seattle are talking. Fill in the blanks with
appropriate rvords to make comparatives and superlatives.
A. I'm planning to visit Chicago.

B. You're going to love it. It's a beautiful city. In fact, it's one of
Lhe moet' beautrful
cities in the u.s.
(e:rample)
A. lt's the second largest ci!y. isn't it?

B. Not any more. Los Angeles is now Chicago.
(1)
A. What should I see while I'm there?
B. You can visit the Sears Tower; It's building in

(2)
the U.S. It has 110 stories. On a clear day, you can see many miles.
A. Did you go to the top when you were there?
B. When I was there, the weather was bad. It was raining. I hope you
have weather than I had. When are you going?
(3)
A. In August.
B. Ugh! August is the month of the year.It's often
(4)
90 degrees or more. If you get hot, you can always go to the beach
and cool off.
A. Is Chicago near an ocean?
B. Of course not. It's near Lake Michigan.
A. Is it big like Lake Washington?
B. It's much than Lake Washington. In fact, it's
(5)
one of the lakes in the U.S.
(6)
A. Is it very rainy?
B. Not in the summer. It's sunny. In fact, it's much
(7)
than Seattle.
A. What do you suggest that I see?
B. You should see the famous architecture downtown. The
architects in the U.S. built buildings in
(8)
Chicago.

A. Do I need,{o,take.taxis everywhere or does".Chicago have a good
public transpoftation system? "
B. Thxis are so expensive! They're much than

(s)
the buses and trains. You should use the public transportation. But
remember there's a lot of crime in Chicago, so it's not safe to travel
alone at night. It's in the day time.

(10)
A. Does Chicago have crime than Seattle?

(1 1)
B. Yes. But if you're careful, you'll be OK. I'm sure you'll eqioy it. It's
an interesting place because it has people from all over the world.
In fact, I think it's one of the cities in the U.S.
(12)
1. Comparison of Adiectives
Suonr Ao,lncrrvrs
Chicago is a big city.
Chicago is bigger than Boston.
New York is the biggest city in the U.S.
LoNc Ao"lncuvEs
Houston is a populated city.
Chicago is more populated than Houston.
"
New York is the most populated city in the U.S.
Comparison of Adverbs
Suonr ADVERBS
She drives fast.
She drives faster than her husband.
Her son drives the fastest in the family.
-,TADVERBS
You speak English fluently.
You speak English more fluently than your brother.
Your sister speaks English the most fluently in your family.
3. Word Order
Vrnn lPnmsr) + Corupmntrve Aovons
She speaks English more fluently than her husband.
She talks more than her husband.
Corupenarrvp Wonn + Noir{
She has more ereerience than her husband.
She has a better accent than her sister.
336 Lesson Twelve

1. Don't use a comparison word when there is no compar-ison.
California is a bigger state.
Don't use nlore and -et'together.
My new car is mere better than my old one.
Use than before the second item in a comparison.

than
He is younger *hat his wife.
Use th,e before a superlative form.

the
China has^biggest population in the world.
Use a plural noun a^fter the phrase "one of the."
Jim is one 0f the tallest boyuin the class.

6. Use the comect word order.
drivea faater
She fester-dd+es than her husband.
more
' I have responsibilities *eere than you.
The U.S. is the €€u*,try most powe ft&i'{#tn"world.
7. Dort't use the with a possessive form.
My ths best friend lives in London.
Use correct spelling.

haooier
She is hef##er than her friend.
PAR,T I Find the mistakes with the underlined words, and correct them.
write C.
than
EXlptptgS: I anl taller.my father.
I am tall, but my father is taller. C

a
1. Paul is one of lhe youngest student in this class.
I
a
2. She is more older than her husband. (
a
3. I'm the nrost tall person in my family. (
4. N{y father is more educated my mother'. a
a
5. She is the most intelligent person in her farnilyr a
a
6. New York City is biggest city in tlie LI.S.
(
7. My sister's the oldest son got married last month. a
(
8. Houston is a very big city. (
9. He is much older than his wife. t
a
10. New York is biger than Los Angeles. (
a
11. I speak English more better than I did a year ago.
a
12. Book One is easyer than Book Tko. (
(
PART 2 Find the mistakes with word order and correct them. Not er-erf (
sentence has a mistake. If the sentence is correct, write C. (
(
Exlt.r p trs about the U.S. than I do.
'
Soccer is more interesting than foot,ball for me. C
(
(
1. I have problems more than you. I
(
2. I earlier woke up than you.
a
3. Paris is the city most beautiful in the world. (
I
4. She speaks English more fluently than her brother. (
5. You faster type than I do.
(
(
6. My father is the most intelligent person in the family. (
(
7. Your car is expensive more than my car.
(
8. You sing more beautifully than I do. (
(
9. I travel more than my friend does. (
(
10. You have more money than I do.
(
338 Lesson TWelve I
I
PART 3 Fill in the blanks with the comparative or the superlative of the
rvord in parentheses ( ). Add tlte or th,an if necessary.
ExRt,rptrst Nerr iork ,, bilqer than Chicago.
(bis)
Ne'rv York is the biq7eet city in the Lr.S.

(bis)
1. \{ount Everest is nr.ountain in the rvorld.

(trigh)
2. A D grade is a C grade.
(bad.)
3. Johnson is one of last names in the U.S.
(common)
4. Tokyo is Miami.
(populated)
5. June 21 is day of the year.
(lonS)
6. The teacher speaks English I do.
(weil)
7. Lake Superior is lake in the U.S.
(large)
8. Children learn a foreign language adults.
(quickly)
9. Some people think that Japanese ears are
(good)
American cars.
10. A dog is a cat.
(.friadta)
11. Women drive men.
(careful\y)
12. Who is student in this class?
(good)
13. The teacher speaks English I do.
Uluentlu)
14. A dog is intelligent, but a monkey is
(intcUigmt)
CLASSROOM 1. Form a small group of 3-5 students. Fill in the blanks to give information
ACTIVITI ES about yourself. Compare your list with the lists of other mernbers of your
group to make superlative statements.
ExRNprr: Susana has the rnost relatives in the U.S.
a. Number of relatives I have in the U.S.

b. My height
Comparativesl Superlatives 339

c. Number of letters in my last name
d. Number of children I have
e. Number of sisters and brothers I have
f. Age of my car
g. Number of hours I watch TV per week
h. Number of hours I exercise per week
i. Money I spent today

j. Distance I traveled to come to the U.S.
k. Cups of coffee I drank today
l. Number of miles I usually drive per day

m. Number of movies I usually see per yeax
Work with a parher from the same native culture, if possible. Compare
American men and men from your native culture. Compare American women
and women from your native culture. Report some of your ideas to the
class.
The mariager of a company is interviewing two people for the same job: a
younger woman (24 years old) and an older woman (55 years old). He can't
decide which one to hire. Find a parhrer. One person (the manager) will
malte a statement. The partner will say, "Yes, but . . ." and follow with
another statement.
Exnuplr,s: A. Older people are wiser.

B. Yes, but younger people are quicker.
A. Older people have more experience.
B. Yes, but younger people are more flexible.
{
4. Find a partner and choose one of the following pairs and decide which of I
the two is better. Write five reasons why it is better. One person will make I
a statement saying that one is better than the other. The other person will
{
follow with, "Yes, but . . ." and give another point of view.
Exlupr.r,s: A. I think dogs are better pets than cats. They are more loyal.
B. Yes, but dogs need more attention. I
. cats and dogs {
'. big cities and small towns I
. travel by train and travel by plane i
o houses and condos
. spring and fall
{
. voice mail and answering machines i

i
{
340 Lesson T\relve I
(
5. Pretend you and your friend are trying to decidc where to go on vacation
in July-to the mountains of Canada or to the coast of Mexico. Write a
dialog presenting your reasons for choosing one place over the other.
Exauprr: A. Canada is cooler.

B. Yes, but Mexico is more interesting.
WRITING 1. Choose one of the topics belorv to write a comparison:
a. Compare your present car with your last car.
b. Compare two cities you }orow well.
c. Compare American women and women in your native culture.
d. Compare Arnerican men and men in your native culture.
e. Compare soccer and football.
f. Compare your life in the U.S. and your life in your native country.
g. Compare the place where you lived in your native country with the place
where you live now.
2. Write about the biggest problem in the world (or in your native country or
in the U.S.) today. Why is this a problem? How can pe solve the problem?
OUTSIDE Interview an American. Get his or her opinion about the superlative of each of
ACTIVITIES the following items. Share your findings with the class.
good car: What do you think is the best car?
a. good car
b. famous celebrity
c. good president in the Iast 25 years
d. beautiful city in the U.S.
e. good universit5r in the U.S.
f. popular movie at this time

g. terrible tragedy in American history
h. big problem in the U.S. today
i. popular singer in the U.S.
j. best athlete

Internet.Activity
1. Using the Internet, flnd a site that compares cities. Compare any two Ameri-
can cities that interest you.
Usrng the Internet, find out about the city where you live. Find out:
' - the name of the mayor

o the population
o the arurual rainfall
' the coldest month
' interesting places to visit in this city
3+2 Lesson Twelve

GRAMMAR
Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Ei,ther
Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions
CONTEXT
Football and Soccer
LESSON FOCUS
We cart use auxiliary verbs with foo and ei,tlzer.
I speak FYench, and the teacher does too.
I went to Paris, and my friend did too.
We use auxiliary verbs in a tag question.
You speak Italian, don't you?
She bought a dictionaty, didn't she?
3+3
- -cqr-r=irrEfi1 rrl--rIlEL -ry

Before You Read 1. What's your favorite sport? Do you like to play it or
watch it?
2.. po you ever watch a football garne^ on TV in the
.; U.S.?
.t
Read the following conversation between a student

from Ecuador (E) and his American'friend (A). Pay football
special attention to auxiliary verbs.
Football and Soccer

E. My favorite sport is fqotba[. In my country, Ecuador, everyone likes
football.
A. I think you mean
soccer, don't you?
E. In Ecuador we say football, but football means something different for
you, doesn't it?
A. Ycs.
E. What exactly is the difference between football and soccer?
A. Well, for one thing, the ball is different. A soccer ball is round. A football
isn't. A football player can carry or throw the ball, but a soccer player
cantt.
E. A football team has the same number of players as a soccer team, doesnt
it?
A. Yes. They both have fl players, but a football team really has 22 players.
There are only 11 players on the field at one time.
E. There are other differences, a,rentt there?
A. 0h, yes. A soccer game lasts 90 minutes, but a football game doesn't. A
football game lasts 60 minutes.
E. I don't like football very much.
A. I don't either.
E. I prefer soccer.
A. I do too.
E. That's strange. I thought atl Americans love football.
A. Maybe most do, but I don't. soccer
344 Lesson Thirteen

d=
E"* t:
Auxiliary Verbs with 7oo and Either
A soccer team has 11 players, and a football team does too.
My brother plays soccer, and I do too.
Baseball is popular in the U.S., and basketball is too.
I like baseball. I do too.
Football isn't popular in my country, and baseball isn't either.

I don't like football. My brother doesn't either.
He can't play tennis well. I can't either.
LnNcuncE NorEs
1. The auxiliary verbs are do, does, did, the modals, and be. We use
auxiliary verbs in the above sentences to avoid repetition of the sarne
verb phrase.
2. Use foo with two affirmative statements.Use ei,th,er with two negative
statements. We can connect the sentences with omd.
3. In informal speech, Americans ofteir say nxe too and me neither.
A. I like soccer.
B. Me too.
A I don't like football.
B. Me neither.
4. When hante is the main verb, Americans usually use do, does, or did
as a substitute.
AunucaN: BRrrrsH:
A. I have tickets to a game. A. I have tickets to a game.
B. I do too. B. I haue too.
Exrncrss I
Terri and David have some things in common. Finish each
affirmative statement with an auxiliary verb (the same tense as
the main verb) too. *
EXnuptgS: Terri plays volleyball, and David doeg too. ,
Terri went to a soccer game last night, and David

did too.
1. Terri is interestcd in football, and David
Arrxiliary Verbs with loo and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 345
, Terri likes to play tenris, and Dar,'id
n
3. Terri went bowling last week, and David
4. Terri will u,atch a football game on TV next Sunday, and David
5. Terri can play chess, ffid David
Exsncrsr 2 Terri and David have some things in common. Finish each
negative statement with an auxiliary verb (the same tense)
either.
ExRrqprrs: Terri doesn't like hockey, and David doean't either.
,4
Terri didn't go to the hockey game, and David

didn't either.
1. Terri,doesn't lmow how to swim, and David

I Terri can't ski, and David
o
o. Terri won't go to the game next Sunday, and David
4. Terri isn't interested in baseball, and David

5. Terri didn't play tennis last summer, and David
13.2 Auxiliary Verbs with Opposite Statements
I like football, but my brother doesn't.
Football is popular in my country but baseball isn't.
You didn't see the soccer game,
Soccer players can't carry the batli but football players can.
LnNcuncs Norrs
1. The above sentences show opposites. We use auxiliary verbs to avoid
repetition of the same verb phrase.
2. We can corurect opposite sentences vmth but.
346 Lesson Thirteen

F^*tg::+=:3{=E=S!:+:::i: jr
ExEnctss 3 Terri and David are different in some ways. Finish each
statement with an auxiliary verb.
ExRtqptrst Terri rvorks downtown, but David doegn't'

Terri isn't interested in classical music, but David tg.
1. Ter:ri likes to cook, but David
2. Terri doesn't play the guitar, but David

.)
tJ. Terri can't speak Russian, but David
4. Terri went to Hawaii for vacation, but David
5. Terri won't work next Sunday, but David
Exsncrss 4 Fiil in the blanks t0 compare the U.S. and another country you
know. Use and . . . too or and . . . ei,ther for similarities
between the U.S. and the other country. Use but for differences.
Use an auxiliary verb in all cases.
Exlmpu: The U.S. is a big country and Ruaaia is too.
OR
The U.S. is a big country but Cuba ien't.
The U.S. has more than 270 million people,

The U.S. is in North America,
The U.S. has a president,
The U.S. doesn't have a socialist government,
The U.S. fought in World War II,

The U.S. was a colony of England,
Americans like football,
Americans don't celebrate Labor Day in May,

American schools are closed on December 25,
10. The U.S. has a presidential election every four years,
Auxiliary Verbs with 7oo and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 347
ExsncrsE,5 Check {,0 Ues or n0 to teit what is true for you. Exchange your
book with another student. Make statements about you and the
other student.
ExRuptgt I don't speak Spanish, but Luis does.
Yes No
1. I speak Spanish.
2. I'm interested in football.
3. I'm interested in soccer.
4. Ihaveaca-r.
5. I use the Internet.
6. I can drirre.
7. I plan to go back to my native country.
8. I'm going to buy a computer this year.
9. I wonld like to live in a small American town.
10. I exercise every day.
11. I'm studying math this semester.
12. I studied English when I was in my native country.
13. .I came to the U.S. directly from my nativ"e counky.
14. I finished college in'my native country.
15. I'm a vegetarian.
16. I have a cell phone-
Exrncrsr 6 Fi[ in the bkinks in the conversation below. Use an auiiliary

' verb and too or either when necessary.
A. I'm moving on Saturday. Maybe you and your brother can help me.
Are you working on Saturday?
B. My brother is working on Saturday, but I
'm not I can
(eao.mptcl
help you.
A. I need a van. Do you have one?

B. I don't have one, but my brother I'11 ask him if
(1)
we can use it. By the way, why are you moving?
A There are a couple of reasons. I donlt like the apartment, and my
. She says it's too small for two people.
348 Lesson Thirteen

B. How many rooms does your neu, apartment have?
A The old apar[ment has two bedrooms, and the new one
. But the roo[rs are much bigger in the ne!l' one,

(3)
and there are more closets. Also, we'd like to live near the lake.
B. , but apartnr.ents there are very expensir-e.

(4)
A We found a nice apaftment that isn't so expensive. Also, I'ci iike to

own a dog, but my pl'esent lar-rdlord doesn't pennit pets.
B. Mine doesn't . What kind of dog do you plan to

(5)
get?
A I like big watchdogs. Maybe a German shepherd or a doberman. I

$', don't like small dogs.
- _n
---JriN
\!i B. . They just make a lot of noise.
l\- ,i (6)
L- ;-J
,ru
A So now you lcrow my reasons for moving. Can I count on you for
Saturday?
B. Of course you can.
13.3 Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions
-{ football team has 1l players, doesn't it? Yes, it does.
\bu can play football, can't you? Yes, I can.
This is your football,
There are 11 players on a baseball team, aren't there? No, there aren't.
lm right, am I not? /aren't I?
Scccer isn't the same as football, No, it isn't.

F,rotball players don't wear a helmet,
S:ccer players can't carr5l the ball,
Auxiliary Verbs with 7oo and, Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 349
LnNcuncs Norss
1. A tag question is a short question that we put at the end of a statement.
You can use a tag question to ask if your statement is correct or if
the listener agrees with you.
2. A tag question uses the,auxiliary verb + a subject pronoun (1, you,
ue, tltey, kE, she, it). ff the subject is thi,s or thnt, use i, in the tag.
If the subject is these or those, use they in the tag. If th,ere introduces
the subject, use there in the tag.
o
o. The tag question uses the sarne tense as the main verb.
4. An affumative statement uses a negative tag. A negative statement
uses an affirmative tag.
5. Am I not? is a very formal tag. We often say aren't I?
6. When haae is the main verb, Americans usually use do, does, or did
in the tag question.
AwrpRrceN:
You have tickets to the garne, d,on't yort?
Bnrrrss:
Yotr have tickets to the game, hauen't you?
Exrncrsr 7 Add a tag.question. All the statements are affirmative and have
an auxiliary verb.
Ex,Ruplrt This class is large, isn't it?
1. You're a foreign student,
2. You can understand English,
3. We'lI have a test soon,
4. We should study,
5. There's a libr:ary at this school,
6. You'd like to improve your English,

i
7. This is an easy lesson,
8. I'm asking too many questions,
Exsncrsr 8 Add a tag question. All the statements are negative and have an
auxiliary verb.
ExRprpr.r,: You can't speak Italian, can you?
1. You aren't an American citizen,
2. The teacher can't speak your language,
350 Lesson Thirteen

3. lVe shouldn't talk in the library,
4. You weren't absent yesterday,
5. There aren't any Japanese students in. this class,

6. This exercise isn't hard,
Exrncrsr 9 Add a tag question. NI the statements are affirmative.

Substitute the main verb with an auxiliary verb in the tag
question.
ExAt*tptgt You have the textbook,

don't you?
1. English has a lot of irregular verbs,

2. You want to speak English vuel|,
3. You understood the explanation,
4. A soccer team has 11 players,

5. They went to a soccer game last week,
6. We had a test last week,
Exr,ncrsr 1O nOO a tag question. AII the statements are T.iltir..

EXnMptgt do we?
We don't have class on Saturday,
1. The teacher doesn't pronounce your name correctly,

2. Your brother didn't take the last test,
3. You didn't bring your dictionary today,
4. \['e don't always have homework,
5. I don't have your phone nurnber,
6. Your mother doesn't speak English,
'j!!:t€-;::i.::*'. ::
Exrncrsr II This is a conversation between two acquaintances,r Bob (B) and

Sam (S). Sam can't remember where he met Bob. Fill in the
blanks with a tag question.
B. Hi, Sam.
s. Uh, hi.
I Att acquairtlance is tr person you don't knou, u'ell.
Auxiliary Verbs rvith Too anrt, Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 351
B. You don't remember me, 4o You?
(eoampLe)
S. You look familiar, but I can't remember your name. We were in the
sarne chemistry class last semester,
(1)
B. No.
S. Then we probably met in math class,
B. Wrong again. I'm Linda Wilson's brother.
S. Now I remember you- Linda introduced us at a party last summer,
And your narne is Bob,

(3) (4)
B. That's right.
S. How are you, Bob? You graduated last year,

(5)
B. Yes. And I've got a good job now.
S. You m4jored in computers,

(6)
B., Yes. But I decided !o go into real estate. .
S. And how's your sister Linda? I never see her anymore. She moved
back to California,
(7)
B: No. She's still here. But she's ma:ried now, and shds expecting a baby.
S. That's wonderful. Say hello to Linda when you see.her. It was great
seeing you again, Bob.
Exrncrsr l2 A mother (M) is talking to her daughter (D). Fill in the blanks
with a tag question.
M. You didn't get your scholarshi n,
-4W-
D. How did you larow?
M. Well, you look very disappointed. You can apply again next year,
(1)
D. Yes. But what will I do this year?
352 Lesson Thirteen

M. There are government loans,
(2)
D. Yes.
M. And you don't have to pay then"r back until you graduate,
(3)
D. No.
NI. And your professors will give yorr letters of recommendation,
(4)
D. I'm sure they will.
M. So don't worry. Just try to get a loan, and you can apply again next
year for a scholarship.
!z
E rJr
&E Answering a Tag Question
California is a big state, isn't it? Yes, it is.

New Jersey isn't a big state, is it? No, it isn't. It's small.
California isn't a big state, is it? Yes, it is. It's very big.
New Jersey is a big state, isn't it? No, it isn't. It's small.
Lnrucuncr Norrs
1. When we use atz;g question, we expect the listener to agree.
2. When we add a negative tag question, we expect the answer to be
yes. No means the information is incorrect or the listener does not
agree.
3. When we add an affirmative tag question, we expect the answer to
be no. I/es means the information is incorrect or the listener does
not agree.
Exr,ncrsr, 13 Complete the answer in the left column. Then check the
meaning of the answer in the right column. (You may work with
a partner.)
Auxiliary \ierbs with loo and Ei,ther; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 353
A. You don't have a car, do you? u/PersonBhasaca^r.
B. Yes,
I do. Person B doesn't have a car.
A. You aren 't American, are you? Person B is American.

B. No, I Person B isn't American.
A. You don't like this city, do you? Person B likes this ciff.
B. No, Person B doesn't like the ciff.
A. The U.S. is the best country in Person B agrees with the

the world, isn't it? statement.
B. No, Person B doesn't agree with the
statement.
A. You don't speak Russian, do Person B speaks Russian.

you?
Person B doesn't speak Russian.
B. No,
-4. You can drive, can't you? Person B can drive.

Person B can't drive.
B. No, -
A. You don't have a watch, do PersonBhasawatch.
you?
Person B doesn't have a watch.
B. Yes,
A. You work on Saturday, don't Person B works on Saturday.

you?
Person B doesn't work on
B. Yes, Saturday.
ExrRctss l4 neaA a statement to another student and add a tag question.

The other student will tell you if this information is correct or
n0t. (
I
ExauplEst You speak Polish, don't You? (
No, I don't. I speak Ukrainian.
(
Ara You?
You aren't from Polan 6, (
No, I'm not. I'm from Ulcaine. (
You came to the U.S. two years ago, didn't you? (
Yes, I did. (
-(
1. You're ma:ried,
(
2. You have children, (
(
3. You didn't study English in your country
{
(
354 Lesson Thirteen (
I
4. You have a car,
5. You don't live alone,
6. You'll take another Engiish course next semester,
7. You won't return to your native country
8. You took the last test,
9. You have to work on Saturdays,
10. The teacher doesn't speak your language,
11. You can type,
L2. This class isn't too hard for you,
13. There was a test last FYiday,
t4. You don't speak German,
15. ['m asking you a lot of personal questions,
Exrnclse l5 fiU in the blanks with a tag question and an answer that tells
if the information is true or not.
A. You come from Russia, don't you?
(eaample)
R. I come from Ukraine.

(1)
A. They speak Polish in Uliraine,
(2)
B. . Tirey speak Ukrainian and Russian.
(3)
A. Ukraine isn't part of Russia,
(4)
B. . Uloaine and Russia are different. They rvere
(5)
both part of the former Soviet Union.
A. You come from a big city,
(6)
B. . I come from Kiev. It's the capital of Ukraine.
(7)
It's very big.
A. Your parents aren't here,
(8)
B. . We came together two years ago. I live with
(s)
my parents.
A. You studied English in your country
(r0)
B. . I only studied Russian and German. I never
(11)
studied English there.
Auxiliary Verbs with ?oo and, Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 355
{
A. You're not going to go back to live in your country,

I
I
(12)
I
B. I'm an immigrant here. I plan to become an
(1s) I
American citizen.
{
(
Uses of Auxiliary Verbs
(
1. To avoid repetition of the same verb phrase: I

(
(
I like footbalT, my friend does too. (

Football'is fun, soccer is too. (
(
(
I don't li,ke baseball, she doesn't either.
I
I didn't usatclt the game,
(
she didn't ei,then
I
(
(
I didrz't utatch the game, (
I can't go to the garne,
I
i\{y brother likes baseball,

I haue tickets to the gaftre, my friend doesn't.
2. To form tag questions:
Soccer is fun, isn't it?

You like soccer, don't yot?
He can't swim, can he?

She didn't go, did. she,?
356 Lesson Thirteen

1. Don't omit the auxiliary from a shorteneC sentence vrith loo or eitlrcr.
do
My brother has a new house, and [^too.
didn't
John didn't take the test, and I either.
Don't confuse too and eitlrcr.

eiLher
Jack doesn't speak French, and his rvife doesn't tee.
If half yorn sentence is negative and half is affirmative, the connecting word
is but, not anl^
He doesn't speak French, #I nir wife does.
4. Be careful to answer a tag question correctly.

No
New York isn't the capital of the U.S., is it? Y€s, it isn't.
5. Use a pronoun (or th,ere)in the tag question.

it
That's your hat, isn't thet?
there
There's some milk in the refrigerator, isn't ii?
Be careful to use the correct auxiliary verb and the correct tense.
did
Her sister didn't go to the paf,il, dees she?
will
She won't go back to her country, dses she?
write C.
:+
EXRttplrS, Toclay is Friday, isn't t#ayt

I\{y friend doesn't like soccer, and I don't either. C
1. My nrother speaks English well, and my father doesn't.
Auxiliary Verbs with 7oo and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 357
2. My mother speaks English well, and my brother does too.
3. The Vice President doesn't live in the White House, does he? Yes, he doesnt
4. A soccer team has 11 players, and a football'team too.
5. Bob doesn't have a car, and Mary doesn't too.
6. You're not an American citizen, do you?
7. You didn't finish your dinner, do you?
8. There will be a test next week, won't there?
9. Your father can't come to the U.S., can he?
10. This is the last question, isn't this?
pART 2 This is a conversation between two students who meet for the
first time. Fill in the blanls with an auxiliary verb to complete
this conversation. Use either ot tol when necessary.
C. Hi. My nalne is Carlos. I'm a new student.
E. I am too . My name is Elena.

(e,rampk)
C. I come from Mexico:
E. Oh, really? I . I come from a small town in the norfiem
- ---7D
part of Mexico.
C. I come from Mexico City. I love big cities.
E. I
(2)
. I prefer small towns.
C. How do you like living here in Los Angeles?
E. I don't like it much, but my sister . She has a goodiob,

@)
but I I miss my job back home.
(4)
C. I love it here, and my family . The climate is similar to
(s)
the climate of Mexico Cifi
E. What about the air quality? Mexico City doesn't have clean air, and Ls
Angeles -. (6)
so you probably feel right at home.
C. Ha! You're right about the air quality, but there are many nice things about Lc
Angeles. Do you want to get a cup of coffee and continue this conversation? I
don't have any more classes today.
358 Lesson Thirteen

E. I
(7)
but I have to go home nou, I enjoyed our talk.
C. I . Maybe we can continue it some other time. Well, see

(8)
you in class tomorrow.
PART 3 In this conversation, a new student is tryrng to find out

information about the school and class. Add a tag question.
A. There's a parking lot at the school, ian't there?
(amntple)
B. Yes. It's east of the building.
A. The teacher's American,

(t)
B. Yes, she is.
A She doesn't give hard tests,

(2)
B. Not too easy, not too hard.
A. We'll have a day off for Chrishnas,
(3)
B. We'll have a whole week off.
A. We have to write compositions,

(4)
B. A few.
A. And we catt't use a dictionary when we write a composition,
(5)
B. Who told you that? Of course we can. You're very nervous about
school,
(6)
A. Yes, I am. It isn't easy to learn a new language,
(7)
B. No.
A. And I should ask questions about things I want to know,

(8)
B. Yes, of course. You don't have any more questions,
(e)
A. No.
B. Well, I'll see you in the next class. Bye.
Auxiliary Verbs with Ioo and Eith,er; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 359
CLASSROOM 1. Complete each statement. Then find a parher and compare yourself to your
ACTIVITIES partrrer by using an auxiliary verb.
Exluprrs, A' I sPeak Chineae

B. I do too. oR I don't.
A. I don't speak 9?anioh

B. I don't either. oR I do.
a. I speak
b. I don't speak
c. I can
d. I have
e. I don't have
f. I'm
g. I usually ddnk every day.
h. I'm going to next week.
i. I come from
j. Im wearing: today.
k. I bought last week.

n,
ft
t. I went last week.
m. I don't like
n. I brought to the U.S.
o. I don't like to eat 't;, .
p. I can't very well.
q. I should more. i ;
2. Find a parErer. Tell your parbrer some things that you think you lorovr about
him or her and about his or her native culture or countr5r. Your pa:tner wiII
tell you if you are right or wrong.
350 Lesson Thirteen

ExRuplrs' The capital of your country is New Delhi, isn't it?
Hindus don't. eat meat, do they?
You're studying engineering, aren't you?
3. Work with a partner to match Column A with Column B.

(Alternate activity: Teacher, copy this page. Cut the copied page along the
lines. Give half the class statements from Column A and ha-lf the class tag
questions from Column B. The students walk around the room to match
the statement to the tag question.)
Washington is the capital of the U.S.,
Los Angeles isn't the biggest city,
Puerto Ricans are American citizens,
Americans have freedorn of speech, does it?
There's an election every four years, are you?
Americans fought in World War II, wasn't she?
There will be a presidential election in 20L2, isn't it?
The President lives in the White House,
George Washington was the first American president, won't there?
You're not an American citizen, did she?
Amelia Earhart didn't come back from her last flight, aren't they?
Florida doesn't have cold winters, wasn't he?
Helen Keller was a great woman, didn't ther.? -,
4. The teacher will read each statement. If the statement is true for you, stand
up. Students will take turns making statements about two people.
Exluptst Teacher: Stand up if you drank coffee this morning.

Student: I drank coffee this morning, and Tom did too.
Mario didri't drink coffee this morning, and Sofia dicln't either.
I drank coffee this morning, but Lisa didn't.
Stand up if you ...
. have more than five sisters and brothers
. walked to class today
. will buy a house in the next two years
. are wearing running shoes
. have a photo of a family member in your pocket or bag
Auxiliary Verbs with 1'oo and Ei,ther; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 351
'i"'; want.tb. review this lesson
"i,
. ., .s c went to a movie last wbek
ir*ri,:::'' . can't srvim
T*,1
i;,
"
. plan to buy a car soon
',
' are tired now l
7'
' aren't married
.'
ate pizzatoday
speak Polish
. don't like this game
. can understand American TV
. didn't take the last test
5. Tell the teacher what you think you lcrow about the U.S. or Americans. You
may work with a parhrer. The teacher will tell you if you're right or wrong.
Exlt,tptrs' Most Alnericans don't speak a foreign language, do they?

Alaska is the largest state, isn't it?
WRITING 1. Choose two sports, religions, countries, people, or stores, and write sen-
tences comparing them.
ExRt,tpLt' my mother and my father

My father speake En7lieh well, but my mother doeen't.
lvly father isn't an American cittzen, and rny mother
ien'f, either.
My father wae born in 1950, and my mother wao too.
2. Find a partner. Write a list of some things you have in conunon and some
differences you have.
ExRupu, Alex pla.ve the violin, and I do too.

Alex ie majorinq in chemiatry, buf, l'm not.
Alex doesn't have a corn ten and I don't either.
Internet Activity
Find information on the Internet about a sport you like or would like to lanow
more about. Write a list of facts about this sport. Bring your list to class. Other
students can ask you about this sport using tag questions. Tell them if they're
right or wrong.
Exluptr' A basebzrll team has nine players, doesn't it?

Ba^seball is popular in Japan, isn't i1.'?
362 Lesson Thirteen

G RAMMAR
Verb Review
CONTEXT
Letter from Puerto Rico
tEssoN Focus
We are going to compare the tenses presented in tiris book.
Sruple PnnspNt We usually study hard.

PRuspNr CoNrruuous We are studying four tenses now.
Srnrplo Pesr We stud';ed the simple past last week.
FrrrunB We are Eoing to study Book 2 next semester.
Furunr ii,re utiV study Book 2 next semester.
363
(
Before You Read 1. Do you like to vacation in warm, surmy places? (

2. Where did you go on your last vacation? (
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Letter from Puerto Rico (
(
Jane, her husband Ed, and their two children are on vacation now. Jane is (
writing a letter to her friend, Rosemary. Read the following letter. Pay speciai (
attention to verb tenses.
t
(
Dear Rooemary,
We arrived in Tuerlo Rico last Monday. )ur fliqht, wao omooih and com,':':'
(
able. We are staying af, a beautiful hotel in 1an Juan thie week. (1an i-a' ie (
the capital of TuerLo Rico,) Our hof,el has tennie courte and two biq ew'lr* ': (
poole, Ed playe lennie every morninq. I ueually eleep late in the mornin7. . :': (
afLernoon, we ueually go to lhe beach or Lo the pool. The children love lc 2,, -
(
7ometimee I go ehoVpinq in the early eveninq. At niqht we uoually eat, a. 2
resLaurant. Last nighi we had dinner in a lovely 7uefi,o Rican reetauran't. -': (
dinner was delicioue. Tomorrow we are going to try anolher reetaurant. (
Now I arr sitting on f,he beach. I am getting a qood sunf,an. The chila.e. (
are playing in the water. Ed is reading the newo?a?er in the shade. He aiv,,a_.=
(
likee the ehade, but I prefer the eun.
Next week we are going to visit another island nearby, 1aint, Thomae. i,:
(
are going to leave at 7 o'clock on Friday morning. We are goinq to be there ":- I
three daye. lf I have time, l'll write you a poetcard from 9t. thomae. Afler -r7 a:, (
we are going to return home. I will oall you when I 6et home. I will tell yoe a (
about our vacalion. (
fake care,
Jane
I
I
Id4 Lesson Fourteen

Verb Tenses-Uses
Surrpln Pnnspm I'prqsn
Puerto Rico is an island. o Facts

Puerto Rico has a tropical climate.
I\{ost Americans wear a batlling suit o Customs and i{abits
at the beach.
Ed and Jane visit Puerto Rico once . Regular activities
a year.
Jane sometimes writes letters.
Ed wants to sit in the shade now. . With nonaction verbs
Jane needs a stamp now.
I will call you when I return. . In a future time clause
If I have time, I will write you again. o In a future i/ clause
I come from Mexico. o With place of origin
PnnspNr Coxrnruous TENSE
Jane issitting on the beach. c Actions that are happenfurg now

Her husband is sitting in the shade.
They are vacationing in Puerbo o Actions that are happeniug in a
Rico this week. present time period
They are staying in a beautiful
hotel.
Nor:n: Do not use the continuous tense with nonaction verbs: beli,eue,
cost, haue,lrcar, knoxo, Li,ke,loue, need, own, prefer, renzember, see, seetn,
undastand, want
ftrrunu TsNsu
Next week they are going to Actions that will happen later
travel to St. Thomas. . Plans (Use be going to)
I hear the weather will tre warm r Predictions (Use uill or be
next week goi.ng t.o)
I will call you next week when l o Prornises and offers (Use zclilJ)
get home.
Verb Review 365

Pesr TnNsn
The flight was smooth and 'i' . Actions that happened at a

comfortable. specific time in the past
They went to Puerto Rico last
Monday.
They ate in a Puerto Rican
restaurant last night.
They bought their plane ticket one
month ago.
Puertb Rico is an island. ' . To classify or define the subject

Puerto Rico is beautiful. . To describe the subject
Puerto Rico is in the Caribbean o To tell the Iocation of the
Sea. subject
I am from Puerto Ricoi . Wirl: a place of origin
I was born in Ponce. . With bozrz
There are many beautiful beaches t ]:ilfrth th,ere
in Puerto Rico.
Exrncrsr I Fill in the blanks with the correct tense of the verb in
parentheses ( ) to complete this letter. Use the simple present,
the present continuous, the future, or the simple past.
Dear Rosemary,
arrived
We in Puerto Rico last Monday. Our flight
(eaample: a.rriue)
smooth and comfortable. We ata

(1 be) (2 stau)
beautiful hotel in San Juan this week. (San Juan the

(3 be)
capital of Puerto Rico.) Our hotel tennis courts and two

(4 hnte)
big swimming pools. Ed tennis every morning. I usually

(5 ptaa)
Iate in the morning. In the afternoon, we usually

(6 sleep) (7 so)
366 Lesson Fourteen

to the beach or to the Dool. The children to srvim. Sometimes
(8 loue)
shopping in the early erzening. At night we usually
(9 so)
at a restaurant. Last night we dinner

(10 eat) (11 lmue)
in a lovely Puer[o Rican restaurant. The dinner delicious.
(12 be)
Tomorrorv we another restaurant.
(13 b-a)
Now I on the beach. I a good
(14 sit) (15 set)
suntan. The children in the lvater. Ed

(16 pLaa) (17 read)
the newspaper in the shade. He always the shade, but

(18 tike)
the sun.
(19 preJer)
Next week we another island nearby, Saint Thomas.

(20 uisit)
\4re at 7 o'clock on Friday morning. We

(21 leaue) (22 be)
there for three days. If I - time, I you

(23lnae) (24 torite)
a postcard from St. Thomas. After that, we home. I

(25 retttttt)
you when I home. I
(26 call) (27 set) (28 tett)
you all about our vacation.
Take care,
Jane
l+.k Statements and Questions
Srupln Pnossr.{T TpNIsp
Ed plays tennis every day. They Like Puerto Rico.

He doesn't play soccer. They don't like cold weather.
Does he play handball? Do they like St. Thomas?
No, he doesn't. Yes, they do.
When does he play tennis? Why do they like Puerto Rico?
Why doesn't he play handball? Why don't they like cold weather?
Who plays handball? How many people like cold
weather?
Verb Refiew 367

PnnssNT Con rnuous Tpxsp
They aresitting on thc hcach.. She iswriting a letter.

They aren't sitting in a She isn't writing a post card.
restaurant.
Are they sitting in the shade? Is she writing a long letter?
No, they aren't. Yes, she is.
Where are they sitting? To whom is she writing a lemer,'
Why aren't they sitting in the Why isn't she writing a postcard:
shade?
Who is sitting in the shade? Who is writing a postcard?
Furunn TuNsp
She will call her friend next week. They are going to visit St.
Thomas.
She won't call her tomorrow. They aren't going to visit St.
John.
WilI call her on f,tiday?
she Are they going to visit Cuba?
No, she won't. No, they aren't.
When will she call her? When are they going to visit St
Thomas?
Why won't she"call her on FYiday? Why aren't they going to risit
Cuba?
Who will call her on FYiday? Who is going to visit Cuba?
Sttrrple Past TnNss
They arrived on Monday. They ate in a restaurant last

They didn't arrive on Sunday. They didn't eat at home.
Did they arrive in the morning? Did they eat in a Chinese
restaurant?
Yes they did. No, they didn't.
What time did they arrive? Where did they eat?
Why didn't they arrive on Why didn't they eat at homel'
Monday?
Who arrived on Monday? Who ate at honle?
358 Lesson Fourteen

Bs
She is in Puerto Rico. They were in a restaurant last I
night.
isn't at home.
Sl-re They weren't at the pool.
Is she in San Juan? Were they in an Americarr
restaulant?
Yes, she is. No, they weren't.
\Vhy is she in San Juan? When vvere they in a restaurant?
Why isn't she at home? Why u'eren't they at the pool?
Who is at home? Who was at the pool?
There will be a review tomorrow. She is going to be late.

There won't be a test. She isn't going to be on time.
Will there be any questions? Is she going to be here soon?
Yes, there will. No, she isn't.
How many questions will there When is she going to be here?
be?
Why won't there be a test? Why isn't she going to be on
time?
Who is going to be on time?
underl ined verb.
ExRMplr' They ate in a Puerto Rican restaurant. They didn't eat in a French
restaurant.
1. They went to Puerto Rico. They to Hawaii.

2. They're stayrng in a hotel. They with friends.
3. The hotel has tennis courts. It a golf course.
4. They rg at the beach now. They at the hotel.

5. Ed plays teruris every day. Jane tennis.
6. They'll be home in a few weeks. They home this

week.
7. Jane likes the sun. Ed the sun.
8. They're going to St. Thomas. They to St. John.
Verb Relieu' 369

9. They're going to spend three days in St. Thomas. They
a week there.
7t t"i' i"estion about the

EXlUplf,, Jane went to Puerto Rico. (her husband)
Dtd her hueband go to TuerLo Kico? Yes, he ard.
l. Jane Iikes to swim. (her husband)
Jane's getting a suntan now. (her husband)
3. Jane prefers the sun. (her husbanii)
4. Ed gets up early every day. (Jane)
5. They ate dinner in a restaurant. (in a French restaurant)
6. The hotel has a pool. (tennis courts)
7. The flight was smooth. (comfortable)
B. They'll visit Saint Thomas. (Saint.Jdhn)
9. There are a lot of adults at the beach. (a lot of chitdren)
Exrncrsr 4 Read each statement. Then write a wh- question about the
words in parentheses ( ). Answer with a complete sentence.
ExRl,tpr-g: Ed plays tennis. (when)

O. When doee he play tennie?
,. He ?laye tennra tn the morninq.
370 Lesson Fourteen

1. The5r went to Puerto Rico. (how)
A.
B.
Ed isn't sitting in the sun. (u,hy)
A.
3. They ate dinner last night. (where)
A.
B.
4. Jane will call Rosemary. (when)

A.
B.
5. The children are playrng now. (where)
A.
B.
6. They're going to leave on FYiday. (what time)
A.
B.
7. Someone plays tennis every morning. (who)
A.
B. Jane doesn't go shopping in the morning. (why)
A.
9. There are swimming pools at the hotel. (how many)
A.
B.
Verb Review 371

t €.5 Modals and Infinitives
He can play volleyball. She should speak Bnglish.

He can't play tennis. She shouldn't speak Spanish in
Can he play soccer? class.
Yes, he can. Should she speak English with her
classmates?
When can he play soccer?
Yes, she should.
Why can't he play tennis?
Why should she speak English in
Who can play tennis? class?
Why shouldn't she speak Spanish?
Who should speak Spanish?
I want to leave now. . An infinitive doesn't show ten*-

I tried to cnll you last night. o Always use the base form after
lt was hard to get a visa. to'
I'm happy to be in the U.S.
Exsncrsr 5 Fill in the blanks with the correct tense 0r form of the words in
phrentheses ( ):
I from India I to the U.S. ten
(euample: come) (1 dccidz/moue)
months ago. It was difficult my friends and family, but I
(2 l,eaue)
to the U.S. and have more opportunities.

(3 want/conw)
When I in India, I was a dra.ftsman. When I
(4 tiue) (5 com.e)
to the U.S. in July, I a job at first because my English

(6 not/find)
wasn't good enough. Last September, I a job in a laundromal
(7 Iind)
I don't like my.job at all. I a better job soon. I lorow
(8 wontffind)
a better job when I English better.
(9 set) (10 speal;)
I my money now. When I enough
(11 saue) (12lnae)
money, I engineering courses at the university. My
(13 begin/take)
-
parents
(14 be)
proud of me when I
(15 grad,uate)
372 Lesson Fourteen

Right now, I ESL courses at a college near my house.
(16 take) l,i
English in India, but it was different from American English:
(17 stu(ia)
When I listen to americans at"".my job or on T-tI, I
( 1 8 can /no t/unders t an d)
a lot of things they say. Sornetimes when I withAmericans
(19 speak)
at my job, they me. They sometimes
(20 ttot/ttnderstand) (21 laugli)
at my pronunciation. They aren't bad people, but they
(22 not/underst,and)
that it is hard another language and live in another country.
(23l.eanr)
I usually by myself at work. I
(24 stay) (25 know)
I more, b,tt I'm very shy.
(2 6 s h,oul.d, /prac tic e)
When I in India, I in a big house

(27 be) (28 Li,ue)
with my parents, sisters and brothers, and grandparcnts. Now I

(29 haae)
a small apartment and live alone. Sometimes I lonely. I
(30 be)
would like ma:ried someday, but flrst I want
(31 get) (32 earn)
some money and for my future.
(33 saoe)
Exrncrsr 5 Write the negative form of the underlined words.

Exnupu' He moved to the U.S. He
didn't
1. He studied English in India. He German.

2. He wants to work as an engineer. He tna
launclrornar
3. - study engineering. He
He is going to art.
4. He is taking courses at a community college now. He
courses at a university.
5. He's saving his money to get married. He hi.smoney
to go back to his country.
6. His coworkers know that he is a foreigner. They
how difficult his liFis.
7. He should practice English with Americans. He be
shv. ---
8. He can understand some TV programs. He
- all TV
prograrnr
Terb Review 373

Exrncrss 7 Read each statement. Then write a yes/no question about the
Exemptg' He studied English in india. (American English)
Did he etudy American Englioh? No, he didn't.
1. H"'! =!g9y engineering. (accounting)
2. Americans don't understand him. (Indians)
H"'1rlgdyr.g American English now. (American history)
4. He lives in a small apartment. (with his family)
5. He can understand British English. (American English)
6. It is hard to learn another language. (live in another country)
7 He wants to get ma:ried. (next yeax)
8. He lived with his parents in India. (wittr his grandparents)
Exr,ncrse 8 Read each statement. Then write a wh- question with the words
in parentheses ( ). (An answer is not necessary.)
ExRvptgt He left India. (why)
Why did he leave lndia?
1. He is saving his money. (why)
2. He is going to get married. (when)
3. Some people laugh at him. (who)
374 Lesson Fourteen

4. He is lonely. (why)
5. His parents aren't in the U.S. (why)
6. He didn't find a job at first. (why)
7. He will graduate from the university. (when)
8. He carne to the U.S. alone. (why)
9. His coworkers don't understand his accent. (why)
10. He lived in a big house. (when)
Exrncrsr 9 Write a question with the wh- word given. (You may answer the
question.)
Exlptplrt We had a test last week. What kind of test

did we have?
1. We often have a test. How often

2. We're reviewing tenses now. Why
3. We need more practice with verbs. Why
4. We'll have a final exam soon. When

5. The teacher doesn't speak fast in class. Why
6. The teacher usually comes to class on time. What time
7. We studied the present tense. When -

8. We should study every day. Why
9. We're going to finish this lesson. When
10. The school is closed on January 1. Why
11. Tire teacher is helping the students. How
t2. We're doing an exercise. What kind
-
Verb Revierv 375
e
13. We read a story about Helen Keller. Srhen e
e
14. Vacation is going to start soon. \\rhen
I
15. This class has many students. How many studer"rts a
16. Tl-re teacher explains the grammar. Hou, (
t7. The classroom doesn't have a cornputer. whv
a
d
18.
19.
\\re had a test on modals. \\rhen
You shoulcl register for classes early. \\rhy
I
(
20. It's important to leam English. Why a
(
2t. There are a lot of questions in this exercise. How many
a
a
22. The teacher shouldn't speak our language in class. Why a
q
a
23. Some students
24. One
will get an A. Who
student went back to his country. Who
ia
25. One student sits near the door. Who a
26. Some students come from Mexico. How many students i(
27. You won't be our teacher next semester. Who
I
(
a
a
a
a
a
CLASSROOM 1. Find a partner. Use the words below to ask and ansrl'er questions with 1-r:,rr
a
ACTIVITY partner. Practice the simple present, the present continuous, the futrrre. a:-.;
the simple past. a
a
ExRt'.tplrs, you/fronr Asia a
A. fu'e you from
B, Yes,
A^sia?
I am. ()R No, I'nt nol..
t
(
rvhere/you/fronr a
A. \\here ar-e you from'/
IJ. I'm fronr Pakisl,an. a
a
1. when/you/leave your hometown 1
2. how/you/come to the U.S. (
3. you/come/to the U.S. alone
4. where/you/born (
t
376 Lesson Fourteen
I
a
I
5. what language(sfi'ou sPeak
6. you/return to your hometown next year
7. you/have ajob now
8. you/have a job in Your hometown
9. how many brothers and sisters/you/have
10. your country/big
11. your country/have a lot of petroleum 'r'
12. you/live in an apar[ment in your hometown
13. you/study English in your country
14. what/You/studY this semester
15. what/You/studY next semester
16. you/like this class
17. the teacher/speak your language
18. this class/hard for You
19. who/your teacher last semester
20. who/your teacher next semester
present,
2. Write sentences in each category, if you can. Write one for simple
oneforpresentcontinuous,oneforfuture,andoneforsimplepast.
Present
Continuous Simple Past
i'm looktng for a NexL week l'm ln my cauntry, I

I work rn a
new job. qoinq to have an wae a taxi driver,
facf,ory.
interview.
School
Family
Weather
Apartment
Verb Review 377,

Use the words below to interview an American student at this college. Practice
the simple present, the present continuous, the future, and the simple past-
Repor[ somethiirg interffiing tg the class about this student.
Ex.Rt.tptp:' ' "' have a car (what kind)

8..;"
"A. Do you have a car?
B. Yes, I do.
A. \Vhat kind of car do you have?
B. IhaveaHonda.
1. you/study another language now (what language)

2. you/live alone (who. . . with)
3. your family/live in this city
4. you/like this city (why/why not)
5. you/go to high school in this city (where)
6. what/your m4jor
7. you/graduate soon (when)
8. what/you do/after/you/graduate
9. you/like to travel (when . . your last vacation) (where . . . go)
10. you/own a computer (what kind) (when . . buy rO
11. you/eat in a restaurant/last week (where)
L2. you/buy something nedin the near future (whaQ
13. you/do something interesting/Iast weekend (what . . . do)
L4. you/plan to do bomething interesting/next weekend (what . . . do)
Invite the American to interyiew you. Write down the questions that he or slre
asks you.
WRITING Write a short composition about a big change you made in your life. Use Exereise
5 on pages 372 and 373 as your model.
Internet Activity
Use the Internet to find a hotel in a ciff that interests you. Find out the price
of a room, the location of the hotel, and the facilities the hotel has (such as
swimming pool, tennis courts, etc.).
378. Lesson Fourteen

APPENDIX A
The Verb GET
Get has many meanings. Here is a list of the most common ones:
o get something : receive
I got a letter from my father.
. get * (to) place : arrive
I got home at six. What time do you get to school?
o get * object * inlinitive : persuade

She got him to wash the dishes.
o get *
past participle : become
get acquainted get worried get hurt
get engaged get lost get bored
get married get accustomed to get confused
get divorced get used to get scared
get tired get dressed
They got married in 1989.
o get * a(iective : become

get hungry get sleepy
get rich get dark
get nervous get angry
get well get old
get upset get fat
It gets dark at 6:30.
o get an illness : catch

\lhile I was traveling, I got malaria.
o get a joke or an idea : understand
Everybody except Tom laughed at the joke. He didn't get it.
The boss explained the project to us, but I didn't get it.
379
. get ahead - advance
He works very hard because he wants to get ahead in his job.
o get along (well) (with someone) : have a good relationship
She doesn't get along with her mother-in-law.
Do you and your roommate get along well?
o get around to something : find the time to do something
I wanted to write my brother a letter yesterday, but I didn't get around to it.
o get away : escape
The police chased the thief, but he got away.
o get awaf with something : escape punishment
He cheated on his taxes and got away \4rith it.
o get back : return

He got back from his vacation last Saturday.
o get back at someone : get revenge
My brother wants to get back at me for stealing his girlfriend.
o get back to someone : communicate with someone at a later time
I can't talk to you today. Can I get back to you tomorrow?
o get b[ : just enough but nothing more

have
0n her salary, she's just getting by. She can't afford a car or a vacation.
o get in trouble : be caught and punished for doing something wong
They got in trouble for cheating on the test.
. get in(to)' : enter a car

$he got in the car and drove away quickly.
r get out (of) : leave a car
When the taxi arrived at the theater, everyone got out.
o get ott : seat yourself on a bicycle, motorcycle, horse
She got on the motorcycle and left.
o get on enter a train, bus, airplane

=
She got on the bus and took a seat in the back.
. get off : leave a bicycle, motorcycle, horse, train, bus, airplane
They will get off the train at the next stop.
o get out of something : escape responsibility

My boss wants me to help him on Saturday, but I'm going to try to get
out of it.
380 Appendix A,lThe,Y erb GET

. get over something : recoYer from an illness or disappointment
She has the flu this week. I hope she gets over it soon.
. get rid of someone or something : free oneself of someone or something
undesirable
I\{y apartment has roaches, and I can't get rid of them.
o get through (to someone) : communicate, often by telephone
She tried to explain the harm of eating fast food to her son, but she couldn't
get through to him.
I tried to call my mother many times, but her line rvas busy. I couldn't
get through.
o get through with something : finish
I can meet you after I get through with my homework.
o get together : meet with another person
I'd like to see you again. 'ffhen can we get together?
o get up : arise from bed
He woke up at 6 o'clock, but he didn't get up until 6:30.
APPENDIX B
MAKE and D0
Some elpressions use maka 0thers use do.
Make Do
make a date/an appointment do (the) homework
make a plan do an exercise
make a decision do the dishes
make a telephone call do the cleaning, laundry, ironing,
make a reseryation washing, etc.
make a meal (breaKast, lunch, do the shopping
dinner) do one's best
make a mistake do a favor
make an effort do the righVwrong thing
make an improvement do a job
make a promise do business
make money What do you do for a living? (asks
make noise about a job)
make the bed How do you do? (said when you
meet someone for the first
time)
Appendix B/MAKE and D0 381

APPENDIX C
Que.S'tion Formation
1. Statements and Related Questions with a Main Verb.
She watches w.
When she watch TV?
My parents Iive in Peru.

Where do your parents Iive?
sister
Your likes someone.
she like?
They Ieft early.

they leave early?
She found some books.

she find?
He bought acar
What kind of car did he buy?
She didn't go home.

didn't she go home?
He doesn't like tomatoes.

doesn't he like tomatoes?
Someone has my book.
Who has my book?
Someone needs help.
Who needs help?
Someone took my pen.

Who took my pen?
One teacher speaks Spanish.
Which teacher speaks Spanish?
Some men have a cal.

Which men have a car?
Some boys saw the movie.
How many boys saw the movie?
382 Appendix C/Question Formation

l. Statements and Related Questions with the Verb -Be.
She in California.
\Yhere she?
They hungry.
they hungry?
He isn't tired.
\lrhy isn't he tired?
He \4',4s born in England.
\Vhen he born?
One student was late.

Who was late?
Which student w2s late?
Some kicts were afraid.

How many kids were afraid?
Which kids were afraid?
3. Statements and Related Questions with an Auxiliary (Aux) Verb and a Main Verb.
She running.
,she running?
They go on a vacation.
' they go on a vacation'?
He should do something.
should he do?
You take a pill.

How many pills you take?
You drive a car.

whv you dril,e a cat?
Someone should answer the question.
Who should answer the question?
Appendix C/Question Formation 383

Alphabetical List of Irregular Past Forms
arise arose forget forgot

awake annoke forgive forgave
be was/were freeze froze
bear bore get got
beat beat give gave
become became go went
begin began grind ground
bend bent grow grew
bet bet hang hungt
bind bound have had
bite bir hear heard
bleed bled hide hid
blow blew hit hit
break broke hold held
breed bred hurt hurt
bring brought keep kept
broadcast broadcast lmeel lorelt (or loreeled)
build built lanow knew
burst burst lay laid
"
buy bought lead led
cast cast leave left
catch caught lend lent
choo* chose let let
cli4g clung lie lay
come came light iit (or lighted)
cost cost lose lost
craep crept make made
cut cut mean meant
deal dealt meet met
dig dug mistake mistook
do did pay paid
draw drew put put
drink drank quit quit
drive drove read read
eat ate ride rode
fall fell ring rang
feed fed rise rose
feel felt run ran
fight fought say said
find found see saw
fit frt seek sought
flee fled sell sold
fly flew send sent
forbid forbade set set
I
Hanged is used as the past form to refer to punishment by death. Hung ts used in other situatjons: $re lillryr
thc picturc on the uall.
384 Appendix D/Alphabetical List of Irregular Past Forms

shake sl-rook stink stank
shed shed strike struck
shine shone (or shined) strive strorre
shoot shot s\vear swore
shrink shrank sweep swept
shut shut swim swam
sing sang swing swung
sink sar-rk take took
sit sat teach taught
sleep slept teal tore
slide slid tell told
slit slit think thought
speak spoke throrv threw
speed sped understand understood
spend spent upset upset
spin spun wake woke
spit spit wear wore
split split weave wove
spread spread weep wept
spring sprang win won
stand stood \Mind wound
steal stole withdraw withdrew
stick stuck wring wrung
sting stung write wrote
.t
APPENDIX E 't -. I
Meanings of Modals and Related Words

. AbiliW, Possibility
Can you drive a truck?
You can get a ticket for speeding.
. NecessiW, 0bligation
A driver mru,st have a license.
lhaae lo buy a new car.
o Permission
Yol can park at a meter.

You can't park at a bus stop.
. PossibiliW
I ma,A buy a new car soon.
I might buy a Japanese car.
r Advice
Yon should buv a new car. Your old car is in terrible condition.
Appendix E/Meanings of Modals arid Related Words 385

. Permission Request
.,, i^ , MW I borrow your car?
Can I have the keys, please?
Could I have the ke,ys, please?
. Polite Request
ii . ,,:.,
lYoum you teach me to drive?
' Could you show me your new car?
. Want
What would yol li.ke to eat?
I'd like a turkey sandwich.
APPENDIX F
Capitalization Rules
o The first word in a sentence: My friends are helpful.
. The word "I": My sister and I took a trip together.
o Names of people: Michael Jackson; George Washin$on
. Titles preceding names of.people: Doctor (Dr.) Smith; President Lincoln; Queen
Elizabeth; Mr. Rogers; Mrs. Carter
. Geographic names: the United States; Lake Superior; California; the Eocky Mour
tains; the Mississippi River
Norr: The word "the" in a geographic name is not capitalized.
o Street names: Pennsylvania Avenue (Ave.); Wall Street (St.); Abbey Road (Bd-)
. Names of organizations, companies, colleges, buildings, stores, hotels: the Bepubli-
can Party; Heinle and Heinle Publishers; Dartmouth College; the Universrty of
lVisconsinl the White Ilousel Bloomingdale's; the Hilton Hotel
. Nationalities and ethnic groups: Mexicans; Canadians; Spaniards; Americus;
Jews; Kurds; Eskimos
. Languages: English; Spanish; Polish; Vietnamese; Russian
. Months: January; February
: I
. Days: Sunday; Monday ,;r
. Holidays: Christmas; Independence Day

o Important words in a title: Grammar in Context; The Old Man and the Seq
Romeo and Juliet; The Sound of Music
Norn: Capitalize "the" as the first word of a title,
386 Appendix F/ Capita,lization Rules

APPENDIN G
Metric Conversion Chart
LEI''{GTH
incl-res in 2.54 centimeters Cnl
feet ft 30.5 centimeters Cn1
feet ft 0.3 meters m
yards yd 0.91 meters m
m.iles mi l.b kilometers kn
centimeters CM 0.39 inches ln

centimeters cm 0.32 feet ft
meter m 3.28 feet fr
m 1.09 yards yd
meters
kilometers Ian 0.62 miles mi
Norn:
1 :
foot 12 inches
1 yard : 3 feet or 36 inches
squaxe inches inz 6.5 square centimeters cm2
square feet ff 0.09 square meters m2
square yards yd' 0.8 square meters m2
mi2 2.6 square kilometers km2

square miles
square centimeters cm2 0.16 square inches

square meters m2 10.76 square feet
square meters m2 t.2 square yards
square kilometers km2 0.39 square miles
Appendix Gi Metric Conversion Chart 387

WEIGHT (Mass)
grams
kilograms
grams g o.o4 ounces oz

kilograms kg z.z pounds Ib
Notr::
16ounces: lpound
fluid ounces floz 30.0 milliliters mL

pints pt 0.47 liters L
quarts qt 0.95 Iiters L
gallons gal 3.8 liters L
milliliters mL 0.03 fluid ounces fl oz

liters L 2.Lt pints pt
Iiters L 1.05 quarts qt
liters ":L 0.26 gallons ga]
TEMPERATIIRE
degrees Fahrenheit "F Subtract 82, then degrees Celsius oC

multipty by S/9
degrees celsius "c Multiply by 9/b, then degrees Fahrenheit oF

add 32
388 Appendix G/Metrie. Conversion Chart
ri
Sample temperatures:
Fahrenheit Celsius "s't5r'd:

:. ' :i.-|\,.i
0 -18
10 -t2
20 -7
30 -1
4A 4
50 10
60 It)
70 2L
80 27
90 32
100 38
APPENDIX H
Prepositions of Time
. in the morning: He takes a shower i,n the morning.
.in the afternoon: He takes a shower in the afternoon. . :
. in the evening: He takes a shower i,n the evening.

. at night: He takes a shower of night.
. in the summer, fall, winter, spring: He takes classes in the summer.
. on thaUthis day: October 10 is my birthday. I became a citizen ora that day.
r on the weekend: He studies on the weekend.
. on a specific day: His birthday is oz March 5.
. in a month: His birthday is iz March.

. in a year: He was born in 1978.
. in a century: People didn't use cars in the l9th century.

. on a day: I don't have class oz Monday.
o at a specific time: My class begins al 12:30.
. ftom a time to another time: My class isy'oraa 12:30 fo 3:30.
. in a number of hours, days, weeks, months, years: She will graduate in 3 weeks.
(Th.is means "after 3 weeks.")
Appendix H/Prepositions of Time 389

. for a number of hours, days, weeks, months, years: She rvas in Meico for 3
weeks. (This means during the period of 3 weela.)
. by a time: Please finish your test by 6 o'clock. (This means "no later than 6
o'clock.)
. until a time: I lived with my parents unti,l I came to the U.S, (This means "all
the time before.")
r during the movie, class, meeting: He slept duNng the meeting.
. about/around 6 o'clock: The movie will begin about 6 o'clock. People will arrive
around 5:45.
. in the past/future: In the past, she never exercised.
. at present: z4l present, the days are getting longer.
. in the beginning/end: In the beginning, she didn't understand the teacher at all.
. at the beginning/end of something: The semester begins at the beginning of
September. My birthday is al the end of June.
job beJore Friday. The library will

" hefore/after a time: You should finish the
be
closed afier 6:00.
. before/after an action takes place: Turn off the lights before you leave. Wash
the dishes afier you finish dinner.
't-j ;
APPENDIX I
Glossary of Grammatical Terms
" i'l' ' . A(iective An adjective gives a description of a noun.
It's a tall tree. He's an old, man. My neighborc arc nice.
.Adverb An adverb describes the action of a sentence 0r an adjective or another
t
adverb.
She speaks Englishlasntlu. I drive carefuLlg.
She speaks English ertrenely well She is uery intelligent.
. Adverb of Frequency An adverb cf frequency tells how often the action happens.
I neler drink coffee. They usually take the bus.
o,Affinnative means gtas.
(
. Apostrophe ' I
.Article The definite article is the . The indefinite articles arc a and, an. i
I have a cat. I ate an apple. 7ha President was in New York last {
(
weekend.
{
i
390 Appendix l/Glossary of Grammatical Terms (
o Auxiliary Yerb Some verbs have two parts: an auxiliary r'erb and a main verb,
He can't study. We wi,ll retwn.
. Base Form The base form of the verb has no tense. It has no ending (-s or <d):
be, go, eat, take, wri,te
I didn'tgo out. He doesn't kttow the answer. You shouldn't fal& loud.
.Capital LetterA B C D E F G . . .
. Clause A clause is a group ofnords that has a subject and averb. Some sentences
hare only one clause,
Slte speaks Spanish.
Some sentences have a main clause and a dependent clause.
MAIN CTAUSE DEPENDENT CTAUSE (reason clause)

She found a good job because she has computer skills.
MAIN CLAUSE DEPENDEM CI"AUSE (time clause)
She'll turn off the light before she goes to bed.
MAIN CTAUSE DEPENDEM CLAUSE (f clause)
I'll take you to the doctor if you don't have your car on Saturday.
. Colon :
. Comma ,
. Comparative Form A comparative form of an adjective or adverb is used to

compare two things.
My house rs bigger than your house.
Her husband driveslrster than she does. : i
. Complement The complement of the sentence is the information after the verb.
It completes the verb phrase.
He works laard. I sleptfor fiae hours. They are late.
. Consonant The following letters are consonants: D, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, l, m, n, p,

Q, T, s, t, 1), 'Iil, fr, U, z.
Norn, E is sometimes considered a vowel.
o Contraction A contraction is made up of two words put together with an

apostrophe.
He's my brother. You're late. They won't talk to me.
Q{e's : he is) (You're : you are) (won't : wi,ll nat)
. Count Noun Count nouns are nouns that we can count. They have a singular
and a plural form.
I pen/3 pens I table/4 tables
o Dependent Clause See Clause.
Appendix l/Glossary of Grammatical Terms 391

r Direet Object A direct object is a noun (phrase) 0r pronoun that receive the
action of the verb.
We saw the moai,e. You have a ni,ce car. I love you.
. Exclamation Mark !
'Hyllhen
. lmperative An imperative sentence gives a command or instructions. An impera-
tive sentence omits the word groa.
Come herc. late. Please szl down.
Don't be
. lnfinitive An inJinitive is lo * base form.
I want tn leaae. You need to be here on time.
. Linkingl Verb A linking verb is a verb that links the subject to the noun or
adjective after it. Linking verbs includebe, seern,feel, srnell, sound,, l,ook, appmr,
ta"ste.
She as a doctor. She seenxs very intelligent. She looks tired.

. Modal The modal verbs are cary could,, shall, sh,auld, will, waull,, may, migtL
must.
They should,leave. | rutst go.
o Negative means no.

. Nonaction Verb A nonaction verb has no action. We dc not use a continuous
tense (ba *
verb -ing) wtth a nonaction verb. The nonaction verbs are: fulim,
cost, coru, haue, hear, know, like,laae, matter, rneln, fwed, ouru, preJer, fiilnEt-
ber, see, seem, thi,nk, understand, wont
o Noncount Noun A noncount noun is a noun that we don't count. It has no phnel
form.
She drank some water. He prepared some r^cce. Do you need ary
mnney?
. Noun A noun is a person (brothnr), a place (ki,tchsn) or a thing (tohk).Nouns
can be either count (1 table,2 tables) or noncount (money,water).
My brother lives in California. My sisters live in New York. I get mail fuom
them.
o Noun Modifier A noun modifier makes a noun more specific.
lre department Indepmdmce Day con opener
o Noun Phrase A noun phrase is a group of words that form the subject or object
of the sentence.
A aery ni,ce womaa helped me at registration.
I bought a bi,g bo* of cand,y.
. Cbjeet The object of the sentence follows the verb. It receives the action of the
verb.
He bought a car. I saw a m,oui,e. Lmetgour brother.
392 Appendix I/Glossary of Grammatical Terms

. Object Pro*oun Use object pronouns (me, Eou, hi,m, her, it, Its, them) after the
verb or preposition.
He likes frer. I sarv the movie. Did vou see il?
. Parentheses ( )
o Paragraph A paragraph is a group of sentrences about one topic.
. Participle, Present The present participle is verb * -ittg.
She is sleqting. They were lau.ghing.
. Period
. Phrase A group of words that go together.
Last month my sister came to visit.
There is a strange car in front of rnU house.
. Plural Plural means more than one. A plural noun usually ends with -s.
She has beautiful qyas.
. Possessive Form Possessive forms show ownership or relationship.
Mary's coat is in the closet. ll,/g brother lives in Miami.
. Preposition A preposition is a short connecting wotd: about, aboae, across, aJter,
around, 6, at, awWt bo.ck, before, behind,, below, bg, down, Jor, from, in, i,nto,
like, of, 0ff, orq out, ouer, to, u,nl,er, up, witlt.
. Pronoun A pronoun takes the place of a noun.
I have a new car. I bought il last week.
John likes Mary, but slae doesn't like hi,nt,,
. Punctuation Period . Comma , Colon : Semicolon ; Question Mark ? Exclamation
Mark !
. Question Mark ?
o Quotation M&rks ""

. Regular Verb A regular verb forms its past tense with -ad.
He utorked yesterday. I laughed at the joke.

. Sense-Perception Verb A sense-perception verb has no action. It describes a
sense.
She/eek fine. The coffee smelk fresh. The milk lasles sour.
o Sentence A sentence is a group of words that contains a subject' and a verb (at
least) and gives a complete thought.
Sentence: She came home.
Not a sentence: When she came home
rln an imperrtive sentencc, the subject you is ornitted: Sil r/olt,rr. Conrc \rcrc.
Appendix I/Glossary of Grammatical Terms 393

. Simple Form of Verb The simple form of the verb has no tense; it nere.r has
an -s, ed, or -i,ng ending.
Did you see the movie?
I couldn'tfzd your phone number.
. Singular Singular means one.
She ate a sond,wi,ch. I have one teleuision.
. Subject The subject of the sentence tells who or what the sentence ls about.
My sister got married last April. The weddi,ng ivas beautiful.
. Subject Pronouns Use subject pronouns (1, you, he, she, it, we, you, thty) before
a rrerb.
They speak Japanese. We speak Spanish.
. Superlative Form A superlative form of an adjective or adverb shows the number
one item in a group of three or more.
January is the coldest month of the year.
My:brother speaks English the best in my family.
o Syllable A syllable is a part of a word that has only one vowel sound. (Some
words have only one syllable.)
change (one syllable) after (af'ter :
2 syllables)
look (one syllable) responsible (re.spon.si.ble :
4 syliables)
o Tag Question A tag question is a short question at the end of a sentence. It is
used in conversation.
You speak Spanish, d,on't you?
He's not happy, is he?
. Tense Averb has tense. Tense shows when the action ofthe sentence happened-
Snrapln Pnesmm: She usually works hard.
Funinu: She will atorlc tomorrow.
Pnrsnur CovrNuous: She rs working now.
Srupr,u Pesr: She worked yesterday.
.Verb A verb is the action of the sentence:
He runs fast. I speak English.
Some verbs have no action. They are linking verbs. They connect the subject to
the rest of the sentence:
He zs tall. She loofts beautiful. You seerz tired.
. Vowel The following letters are vowels: a, e, i, o, tr,. Y is sometimes consiclered
a vowel (for example, in the wordmrystery).
394 Appendix l/Glossary of Grammatical Terms

APPENDIX t
Verbs and Adjectives Followed by a Preposition
(be) accustomed to forgive someone for @e) proud of
@e) afraid of (be) glad atrout recover from-
agree lr.ith (be) good at (be) related to
(be) angry about (be) happy about rely on/upon
(be) angry at/witli hear about @e) responsible for
approve of I-rear of (be) sad about
argue about hope for (be) satisfled with
(be) ashamed of (be) incapable of (be) scared of
(be) aware of insist on/upon @e) sick of
believe in (be) interested in (be) sorry about
(be) bored with/by (be) involved in (be) sorry for
(be) capable of (be) jealous of speak about
care abouUfor (be) known for speak tolwith
(be) compared to (be) lazy about succeed in
complain about listen to (be) sure oflabout
@e) concerned about look at (be) surprised at
concentrate on look for take care of
consist of look forward to talk about
count on (be) mad about talk tolwith
deal with (be) mad at thank someone for
decide on (be) made from/of (be) thankful to someone for
depend on/upon (be) married to think abouVof
dream abouUof object to @e) tired of
(be) engaged to participate in @e) upset about
(be) excited about plan on (be) upset with
(be) familiar with pray to (be) used to
(be) famous for pray for wait for
feel like (be) prepared for warn about
(be) fond of prohibit from (be).worried about
forget about protect from worry about
Appendix J/Verbs and Adjectives Followed by a Preposition 395

A./an, 12,81,99 An/a, 12 uses ol 165
in generalizations, 86 Angry expressions, imperative for, 2,{? British English. use of haue ln,5l,
A,/ang/somn, with count and Answers 57, 345, 350
noncount nouns, 288 short. See Short ansners
Action verbs, 167-168 to tag questions, 353
Can,259
A(iectives, 303 Ang, 100 pronunciation of, 259-260
comparative. See Comparatives inyes/no questions, 94
Can't,259
descriptive, ll Any/a/somn, with count uid pronunciation of, 259-260
examples o[ 305, 306 noncount nouns, 288
Come, with origin, 63
following hws,30 Apostrophe, with possessive nouns,
Commands, 269
inlinitives following 254, 255-256 130-131
imperative for,247
irregular, comparatives and Articles, 12,81
Comparatives
superlatives of,324 definite,99, 100
to compare items, 330-331
rnodiffing nouns, 305, 307 in generalizations, 86
examples of, 323
multiple, 305 indefinite, 99
rules for forming, 324
before nouns, i2 Auxiliary verbs, 343
Comparisons, 330-331
possessive, 129, 132-133 with opposite statements, 346
word order with, 332
simple form of 321,323-324 in tag questions, 349-350
Complement, questions about,
superlative. Sea Superlatives with loo and either, 345
142-l4i)
two-word, comparatives and
Contractions
superlatives of, 323 Be, l-35 rvith be, 9, L7,27,92,
Adverbs, 303 ' contractions with, 9, 17, 27, 92,
155
of cannol, 259
comparative. See Comparatives 155
with do, 5l
examples of, 305 with definitions, 12
of let us, 249
irregular, comparatives and with descriptions, 10-l I
of. must not, 264
superlatives of, 324 forms of 2, 4
negative, 18-19
of manner, 305, 308 with frequency words, I12
in negativc statements, 57
simple form of, 321, 323-824 with location and origin, lS-16
in short ansrvers, 24, 94
spelling of, 309 negative statements $-ith, l8-19,
of should not, 262
superlative. See Superlatives 2t7
rvith arrlll, 183
A Jeu/a kttle, \ith count and past tense of, 2L7, 218, 219
Conversational expressions,
noncount nouns,28? with present continuous tense, 156
imperative for,247
Affirmative statements questions with, 219
Co.sl, questions with, 65
auxiliary verbs with, 346, 349 in statements and questions, 369
Count nouns, 281
with De and other verbs, 49 subject with, 6-7
a tr.u, tvith,287
a lnt of/mr,ch in, 286 tenses o( 369
a lot of/much/many with,28tt
rzusl versus hnue tn in, 265 with ,lz?r, th,at, these, and lhose, l'i
questious with, 288
with past tense ofDq 21? uses of, 4-5, 218, 366
some/an.y/a with, 288
too with, 345 in wh,at and how questions, 29-30
Ago,2l3 in zoh- questions, 27-28
A littla, in comparisons, 330 word order with, 5, 16. 24 Delinitions, Dr rvith, l2
A littl,e/a !au, with count and inyes/no questions and short Dcscript,ions, Dc with. l0-11
noncount nounq 287 ansrvers, 23-24 Do
A lnt o!, too much/tm rrur,nu versvs, Bc going to Britislt versus American use of, 3{ir
292 future tense with, l8{. 185, 189, cotrtractions with, 5l
A lnt of/much/many, with count and 199 ilegati\'c lirrnts ol pasl l,ettse verbs
noncount nouns, 286 questions with, 189 $'ith. :12i-,
t 397
t\
questigns with past tense verbs Inpolite expressions, imperative for, with Da, 18-19, 217
-A.aA,228, 233-234 247 with be and other verbs compared.
gifirple. present and present /rr, with future tenses, 184 54
,'' continuous tenses compared. 166 Infinitives, 246, 372 co;rtractions in. l8-19, 57
in arlz- questions, 142 after adjectives, 254, 255-256 with count nouns, 288
in yes/no questions and short fbllowing verbs, 252 either with,845
ansrvers, 57 pronunciation of,252 nezsl versus hnue to in, 265, 266
Double negatives, l14 to show purpose, 256 with noncount nouns, 288
-ed verb ending -ing verb ending. See also Present with simple present tense, 51, 51
in adjectives, il, 305 continuous tense with tr;ill, 183
pronunciation \yith, 215 in adjectives, l1 Negative tag questions
spelling with, 214 Instructions, lmperative for, 247 ansrvering, 353
Intonation, for questions, 21, 28 auxiliary verbs in, 349-350
Eitlrcr, au:iiliary verbs tvith, 345 Irregular adverbs and adectives, Negative words, double, ll4
Ertouglt, 314 comparatives and superlatives i{q in negative statentents with count
rvord order with, 3i4 of,324 and noncount nouns, 288
-er ending, for adverbs and Irregular verbs, simple past tenses of, Nonaction verbs, 167-168
adjectives, 324 22t-222 Noncount nouns, 281, 283-284
-es noun ending, 83 n, 97 a little with, 287
-esl ending, for advertrs and a lot oJ/much/many wrth,286
. a{ectives, 324 Let's, 249 questions with, 288
Euer, yes/no questions with, 114-115 .Lfue, simple present and present som,e/ony/a with, 288
continuous tenses compared, 166 ways of seeing, 285
Feel, 169 Location, be with, 15-16 Nouns, 303
Frequency expressions, ll7 Look, 169 a{ectives modifying, 12, 305. 30?
Frequency rvords, 109
-J3r adverb ending, spelling with, 309 articles with, 8l
expressions and questions with count. ^9ee
Count uouns
how o.flat, llT Mang/much/a lnt oJ, wrth count and definition of 12
positir.n of, 112, 114 noncount nouns, 286 examples of, 305
with simple present tense, lll Maybe,268 following uhnt,30
nith z'il/, 183
It ay /mig ht/will, 267 -268, 269 introducing wtth there + be. 6l
yes/no questions with, 114-ll5 trIean, questions with, 65 modi$ing nouns, 305, 307
Future tensc, l8l l[e neither, 345 noncount. ,Sea Noncount noun-i
rvith De going to,184, 185, 189, lgg l[e too, 845 paired, 307
forms of, 198-199 M ight/may /wiL, 267 -268, 269 plural. See Plural nouns
questions u,ith, 189 It{odals, 246,257,372. See also possessive. .See Possessil'e nours
in statements and questions, 368 Auxiliary verbs quantity words with, 8l
rvith time/if clauses, lgl cun,259-260 replacing vith one/ones, X1i
mig ht/may /willl 267 singular, 6-7,81
'rses of, 185, 198-199, 365 -268
with lrrrll1, 183, 185, 189, 198 must, 264 there + ba to introdLce.82. 92-9,
zzzsl versus haae tn,265-266 Number rvords, 85
in questions, 257
Generalizations, 86
shnuld, 26I-262 0bject
"Gonna," l84
uses of, 257 position of, 136, 137
Huue, 169
l[uch, in comparisons, 330 questions about, 142-143
British versus American use of, 51,
Itfuch/many/a lnt oJ, wrth count and Object pronouns, 137
57, 345, 350
noncount nouns, 286 position of, 137
Must,264 Orw/ones, to replace nouns, 30.1
flqu:e lo, rr?r,s/ r,ersus, 265-266 lmue to versus, 265-266 Oppnsite statements, auxiliary t-erbs
Ht)u qfion questions, ll7
with, 346
,l/orl questions, 29-30 Negative expressions, with,e/s, 249 0rigin
Negative forms with D4 63
-fi,,s noun ending, 83 of rnodals, 257 De with. 15-16
If clauses, fut,ure tense rvith, lgl of past tense verbs, 225 with come, 63
Imlleratives, 245 Negative siatements Or questions, with simple presen:
uses of, 217 auxiliary verbs with, 346 tense, 6l
398 Index
Past tense. Sec Sirnple past tense De in, 369 negative slatements u'itlt, 51, 5,1 ,.
People/persons, 85 future tense in, 368 in or questions, 61 t.,*
f'lural nouns, 6-7, 9. 12,81, 83 witlr ftou: oJten, ll7 present continuous tense compareil'fu
articles introducing, 100 intonation for,24,28 g,ith, 165-166 '\
in generalizations, S6 rnodais in, 257 prouunciation of -s fronr., 48
introduced b1,I/rerz + be, 92 with past tense verbs, 219,228, in questions about meaning.
irregular, 85 233-234 spelling, aud cost, 65
pronunciation of. 84-85 with present continuous tense, spelling of -"s frorn, 47
quantity rvords introducing, 100 159-160 in statements and questicns, 367
regular, 83 present continuous tense in, 368 uses of. ,16, 198, 365
Polite erpressions, irnperative for, 247 short ansu'ers to. See Short in a'li- questicns, 62-6:3, 67
Position. ,See \\brd order ANS\YETS in ges/no questions and short
Possessive adjectires, 129, 132-133 simple past tense in, 368 ans\\'ers, 56-57, 60
Possessive nouns, 129, 130-131 simple present tense in, 367 Singular nouns, 6-7, 31
form ot 130-131 some in,288 articles introducing, 99
uses of, 131 tag. See Tag questions introduced by tltere + be,92
Possessive pronouns, 134-135 with there, 94 Smell, 169
forms of, 135 vith wos/were, 219 -s noun ending, 6, 83, 130. See ako
questions with urftos4 133 wh-. See II42- questions Plural nouns
Prepositions, 16 vith what and haw, 29-30 Solze, 100
of time, 109, 12I-122 vithwhose, I33 Some/any/a, with count and
wh,om aft,et,63 with ufll, 189 noncount nouns, 288
arlz- questions with, 62-63 word order for, 63, 65 Spell, questions with, 65
word order with, 63 yes/no. See Yes/no questions Spelling
Present continuous tense, 153-175 of -ing verb form, 157
as action verbs, 167-168 Requests of -s verb form, 4?
forms of, 155, 198 imperative for,247 Statements
questions with, 159-160 soft, 270 De in, 369
as sense perception verbs, 169 future tcnse in, 368
simple present tense compared ,Say, questions with, 65 present continuous tense in, 368 -.
with, 165-166 Sense perception verbs, 169 simple past tense in, 368
spelling of, 157 Short answers simple present tense in, 367
in statements and questions, 368 be in,23-24 Subject
uses of 156, 198, 365 contractions in, 94 with Da, G-7
word order with, 155 frequency words in, 114 position of 136
Present tense. See Simple present with simple present tense, 56-57 pronouns as, 6-7, 17
tense Should,,26I-262 questions about, 142-143
Pronouns Simple form of adverbs and Suggestions, 270
following than in comparisons, a{ectives, 32i Superlatives
330-33r examples of,323-324 of a(iectives, 323-324, 325
as objects, 137 rules for forming, 324 of adverbs, 323-324
possessive. Ser Possessive pronouns Simple past tense, 2ll-238 examples of 323
in short ansvers, 24, 57 ofbe,2ll,2l8,2l9 rules for forming, 324
as subject, 6-7, 17 of irregular verbs, 221-222 word order and, 328
for subjects and objects, 136 negative forms of, 225 -s verb form
lhere versus lftqy and other pronunciation of, 215 in present tense questions about
pronouns and, 97 questions with, 219, 228,233-231 subject, 143
Purpose, infinitives to show, 256 of regular verbs, 213 pronunciation of, 48
spelling of,2l4 spelling of, 4i
Quantity words, 81, 100, 282 in statements and questions, 368 Tag questions, 343
Questions uses of, 366 ansrvering, 353
about meaning, spelling, and cost, Simple present tense, 43-72
65 with De and other verbs, 49, 54, 60,
about subject or complement, 67 Taste,169
142_t43 forms of 45, 198 Tenses. See Future tense; Presettt
with Dr going to, 189 frequency words u'ith, 1ll continuous tense; Simple past
Inriex 399
(
(
tensel Simple present tense; infinitii'es foltowing, 252 ll,i I I
(
\-erb tenses seuse perception, 16,9 contractions sitli. 1S.j
i'iian, in comparisons, 330-331 \Ierb tenses ficrquencl' ri'ords rritli. 1>: (
f-nnlnn yu,
l/t(, future tense 1.ith. iS:1. iir. -:,
luu
uith superlatives, i125
coniparison of, I98-199
futurc. St'r' Iiutut'e teuse 199
I
Tlrcn4 137 riith infinit ivt's. 2ii2 negativc slatenlents riith, ir.: (
Tltere present contilrious. Sct' Present questions ivith. lS9 I
compared u'ith other pronouns, 97 continuous tense uses of, 185
pronunciatiorr of, $7 simplc past. Sce Sirnple past tense lf i ll /rtr,i Qh t / ntay. 26i-268, 2tlii
(
T'here * Dc, to introduce nouns, 82, sinple present. Sce Siltple pl'esent \\'ord order (
0.)_0.1 tense rvith adverbs of manner. 3l.t: (
Iliere questious, 9.1 of tag questions, 350 rvith l;e 5, 16, 2.1
They, con1-tared rvith other pronouns, Very rvith comparisons, 332 (
97 rrith adverbs of manner, 308 of frequency u'ords, Il2, ll{
a
Tlrcy'r'e, pronunciation of, 97 loo versus, 310 rvith otrject pronouns, 137
I'ltirtk, 169 -u€,s noun ending, 83 rvith prepositions, 63 I
Tl tis / t h a t /these/ tho
se, 17 \rorvels, l2 nith present continuous tense. ii: a
Time. See ako Frequency words for questiotts, 63, 65
prepositions of, 109, l2l-122 "lltanna," 252 for subjects and objeets, I36 a
Time clauses, future tcnse with, 191
Too
\Varnings, imperative for, 247
lllas/were, questions with, 219
with subjects and objects, 136
lvith superlatives, 328
I
a
auxiliary verbs w'ith, 345 I,lftal questions, 29-30 rvith loo and, enough, 314
too trtttclt/too mang versus, 293 llhont, after prepositions, 63 for wh- questions, 62 t
uses of, 314 llhose, questions with, 133
I
Uer] versus, 310
n'ord order with. 314
II4i- questions
asking about complement, 142 I'eslno questions I
Too trtuch/too nmny asking about subject, 142-143 any ln,94 a
c lot of versus, 292 with be and other verbs compared, rvith Da and other verbs compare l
lco versus, 293 67 60
be Ln,27-28 be Ln,23-24
Verbs, 363-376. Src also Be rvith prepositions, 62-63 with euer, lI4-115
action versus nonaction, 167-168 rvith simple present tense, 62-63s with simple present tense. 5i--t-
auriliary. See Aruiilia4' verbs rvord order for, 62
{00 Index
I
''..,. :6
I
t
1i
I
- , I'
,!i'a
'
--1rpf ''u I I
1
:;' i.. .* I
(
i.
,
l ,
:
: .. 1
I
r::
.. t
I I
Stur!enl. i r. il m ,i *, !'*riIefflher rit*l'e, ag:i{ car. u$€,: $r'?t':::iiii;" $-,j;:i' .lf I
,"hri , I ;:il'h
!ongt-lage in cc,itte>.t" ii'ar;rffitar ift ,"J1.'ntr:x"to'e-rtiri.
€or-r,: .::.1:: !:.;:rtlltrtBr" with /lilnerica.rr cutlurrai (*Erf sxt. p'',:n'idin; ieal'sit,"r
t
,:i,g!ish v,::"Ii a use ul auti meaningi'Lri skilI ane knr-.'..1*ig: ba.st.
{
I
I
(
I(
I
a
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
i.. I
i. I
_t (
I
|. !' ;
, -:|'
I
I
i"-. (
(
'(
1(
' ;l',,
(
,'. .(
(
{
(
i: (
l,
"
:

Mucho más que documentos.

Grammar in Context, book 1: high beginning. Third Edition

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción:

Descripción:

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Grammar in Context, book 1: high beginning. Third Edition

Cargado por

Descripción:

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Títulos relacionados

:.,ir.ar:i .

I:,. .,.:- ' i; *tt': ..: t",...

New York City

The United States

The United States of America

.l The Present Tcnse of rBc

I am in New York now.

Exsncrss I Fill in the blanks with 'is, a,re, or arn.

ExRvptrt The U.S. rc a big country.

1. Alaska the largest state in the U.S.

Washington, D.C., is beautiful.

Washington, D.C.,is the capital of

Washington, D.C., is in the East.

Exrncrss 2 Fill in the blanks to make true statements.

1. Washington, D.C., is on the coast.

2. Chicago is a Illinois is a state.

6. The American president is about

t. The teacher is from

$.m Word Order with Be

am from Los Angeles.t . The subject is first. The subject

The Present Tense of .Be

is / beautiful / San FYancisco

is / Texas / abig state I-'

the teacher / from / is / New York

my parents / in Germany /axe- '

Chicago is very big. My friend and I are in California.

Exsncrsr 4 Fi[ in the blanks with the correct pronoun.

l. Florida is a state. is in the Southeast.

5. The United States is a big country. is between Canada

7. My parents are in California.

8. You and I are students.

10. Fuerto Rico and Cuba are islands.

The Present Tense ofBe v

1. is a city in the East.

Read the following postcard. Pay special attention to the contractions.

Postcard from New York City

1876 to honor wo?oatt*aftaatoof tibery x.out Wr obeau;tifiL

I am I'm in New York City. We can make a contraction

My daughter is My daughter's with me. S'e can make a contraction.

1. Canada and Mexico countries. They in North

2. Texas a big state in the U.S. It in the South.

3. The \4rhite House in Washington. D.C. It the

home of the President. He busy now.

The Present Tense of ,Be

7. English the main language of the U.S. Spanish and En-

Exrnclss 7 Fil in the blanks. Make a contraction whenever possible. Not

I\{y class big. interestirig. All the students

1.6 Be wtth Descriptions

New York City ls big.

Exrncrsr 9 Write a form of be and an adjective to describe each of the

The Prcstrnt 'l't't.lst' ol'8,

New York and L.A. are big cities.

€m{4'igxii}3;;!il!ii ::: iri :

Exsnclss l0 f iU in the blanks with a form of be and a definition of the

10. California and Illinois

12" Lesson One

Thanksgiving American holiday.

France and Spain countries.

The present Tense r_rf Be 13

1l$ Lesson One

On The book is on the table.

i et ta general area) I am at school.

In (a complete or The students are in the classroom.

The empty desk is between the two students.

The Present Tense of Be r5

Near/By/Close to The sharpener is by the window.